Author: Johannes Surya

Understanding the Politics of Fighting Against One Against One in Indonesia – Indonesia is a country that is rich in natural resources and other biodiversity. Not a few of the colonial countries seized and conquered Indonesia. In order to obtain its natural resources so much.

Until finally making the Indonesian state colonized by other nations. The country uses a politics of pitting one against the other or also called the politics of division, has a term called divide et impera. Means that there is a combination of political, economic and military strategies that have the aim of gaining and maintaining power through the division of large groups into small groups so that they are easy to conquer.

Based on another context, divisive politics means that it prevents small groups from uniting to become a large group that is even stronger. The colonial countries that colonized Indonesia were the Netherlands, Spain, Portugal, France and England.

In order to find out a full explanation of the politics of pitting one against the other in Indonesia, let’s look at the following explanation. There are several explanations regarding the notion of pitting one against the other, the origins of pitting one against the other, and the efforts made in pitting one against the other.

 

Understanding the Politics of Fighting Sheep

Literally, the word Devide et Impera can be interpreted as broken, and powerful. This strategy was introduced by a man named Julius Cesar as an effort to build the Roman empire. Divide et Impera or politics of pitting one against the other is a political, military and economic strategy by causing divisions in an area so that it can be easy for them to control.

Not only that, in other contexts, Divide et Impera also has the meaning of preventing small groups from uniting to turn into large groups that have even stronger strength. However, over time the term Divide et Impera began to be known as the politics of pitting one against the other or the politics of division.

The politics of Divide et Impera in the archipelago, especially in Indonesia, was first popularized by the Dutch through the VOC or also known as the Vereenigde Oostindische Compagnie. In addition to monopoly, which was one of the tactics carried out by the VOC to conquer the archipelago, namely Divide et Impera.

This policy of pitting one against the other was also used as a habit for the VOC to carry out its political, economic and military matters. The orientation is to seek as much profit as possible by conquering the kings in the archipelago.

That’s a little review about the political notion of pitting one against the other. So, to find out more. Let’s look at the following discussion regarding the origins of the politics of pitting one against the other.

The Origin of the Politics of Fighting Sheep

Initially, the politics of pitting one against the other was a war strategy or effort that had been implemented by various colonialist nations in the 15th century. The countries involved included the Netherlands, Spain, Portugal, France and England. The colonialist nation carried out an expansion and conquest with the aim of finding sources of natural wealth in other nations, especially those in the tropics. However, over time the methods for carrying out these conquests have developed. So that divisive politics is no longer just a war strategy but as a political strategy.

The colonial invaders (Dutch) had a political strategy of divisiveness which was used to thwart the establishment of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia (NKRI) after Indonesian independence in 1945. Politics of disunity was dissension that was used to aim at dividing a nation in order to conquer territories or areas that aimed to gain and maintaining power by dividing large groups into small groups so that they are easy to control.

The Netherlands formed a puppet state in 1947-1948 which included five puppet states, including the State of East Indonesia (now Papua), the State of East Sumatra, the State of Madura, the State of Pasundan, the State of South Sumatra and the State of East Java. The purpose of the Netherlands to form a puppet state was to promise independence to these countries.

The early history of the occurrence of a World War II, coincided on August 6 and 8 1945. At that time Japan had admitted defeat to the allied forces by bombing the cities of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. On August 14, 1945, Japan finally surrendered to the allies and then the allies ordered Japan to implement the status quo.

The status quo means that the condition is to maintain the situation and conditions as they were at that time until the arrival of the allied troops to Indonesia. On September 16, 1945 at Tanjung Priok there was a Dutch group and representatives of the allies who were anchored.

The presence of the allied troops, accompanied by the NICA (Netherland Indies Civil Administration – civil government of the Dutch East Indies) led by Dr. Hubertus J van Mook. The meeting opened the negotiations on the basis of Queen Wilhelmina’s radio broadcast speech in 1942 which discussed the staatkundige concept or also known as the state conception.

Japan’s defeat resulted in a government vacuum in power in Indonesia. On August 16, 1945 the youth (Golongan Muda) made a strategy by kidnapping Soekarno-Hatta who then took the two of them to Rengasdengklok. Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945. This was in contrast to the Dutch who rejected Indonesian independence in 1945, because the Dutch wanted to return to power. This started the first military aggression in 1947 and the second military aggression in 1948.

Dutch Aggression I and II, occurred After Indonesia became independent in 1945, the Netherlands was still firm in asking for the return of all former Dutch colonies which were still part of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia (NKRI). With the independence of the Indonesian state, the country has become a sovereign country. As well as making Indonesia have to fight the Dutch to defend the declared territory from Sabang to Merauke.

Meanwhile in the Linggarjati Agreement In 1946, there was an agreement called the Linggarjati Agreement in Linggarjati, West Java which was attended by the Indonesian side, namely Sultan Syahrir and the Dutch side represented by Wim Schermerhorn. The agreement resulted in a resolution that weakened Indonesia in a de facto manner which only recognized Java, Sumatra and Madura as part of the Indonesian state.

Until finally there was a Dutch Military Aggression I in 1947. In the negotiations for the Linggajati agreement on the Dutch side, Deputy Governor-General of the Netherlands, Johannes van Mook, confirmed that the results of the negotiations were no longer valid, confirming that this had happened on July 21, 1947.

The Dutch would start a military operation (Dutch Military Aggression I) which lasted until August 5, 1947. The military operation was called the Police Action and declared this action an internal affair. The formation of Dutch aggression aims to seize rich plantation areas and areas that have natural resources, especially oil.

While the 1948 Renville Agreement occurred as a result of Dutch actions which formed military aggression I finally the United States intervened to neutralize the situation by acting as a mediator between Indonesia and the Netherlands. Therefore, both parties signed the Renville Agreement on January 17, 1948 on the deck of a United States warship as a neutral location for the USS Renville which was anchored at Tanjung Priok Port, Jakarta.

The results of the negotiations from the 1948 Renville agreement were that Indonesia succeeded in forcing a ceasefire but lost part of its territory, while for the Netherlands it only recognized the sovereignty of the Republic of Indonesia (RI) in Central Java, Yogyakarta and Sumatra and asked the Indonesian State Army (TNI) to withdraw its troops from the occupied territories.

After that, there was a Dutch Military Aggression II in 1948. At that time the Dutch rebelled on December 19, 1948 against the contents of the Renville agreement and violated the ceasefire. The Dutch carried out the attack by deploying 80,000 troops which then attacked the Indonesian capital, which at that time was in Yogyakarta. In addition, the Dutch arrested several Indonesian figures, including Soekarno, Mohammad Hatta, Sjahrir and several other figures.

Then, the Round Table Conference was formed in 1949. At that time the United States held Round Table Conference (KMB) negotiations by pressing the Netherlands and Indonesia in The Hague on November 2, 1949. The negotiations discussed the return of all Dutch colonial territories to Indonesia including Papua in them .

The results of this agreement stated that the Netherlands agreed to transfer their political sovereignty over the entire territory of the former Dutch East Indies to Indonesia. The West Papua region is the only part of the territory that was not transferred to Indonesia, but will be discussed again after a year later in 1950.

Until finally the State of East Indonesia or which was precisely in the area of ​​Papua, the territory of Indonesia in 1947 to 1948 resulted in the Dutch taking control of Indonesia easily and dividing it into small groups with a total of 6 parts of the country, including the State of East Indonesia (now Papua), the State of Sumatra East, Madura State, Pasundan State, South Sumatra State and East Java State.

The state of Papua was still not returned by the Dutch until 1961. The Dutch should have returned Papua to become part of the territory of Indonesia in accordance with the results of the negotiations on the results of the Round Table Conference (KMB) in The Hague, Netherlands, which were discussed one year later in 1950. Dutch reasons still makes the Papua region its own because the Netherlands still wants to maintain its influence in the Asia Pacific region and to strengthen its economic base in the Papua region.

This action prompted the Dutch to establish a puppet state of Papua. On October 19, 1961 the Netherlands started by forming a committee called the New Guinea Council. The committee is tasked with drafting the Manifesto for Independence and Self-Government, the national flag or also called the Morning Star Flag, the state stamp, selecting the national anthem, namely Hai Tanahku Papua and asking people to be known as Papuans.

On November 18, 1961 the Netherlands recognized the Papuan flag and national anthem and these regulations came into effect on December 1, 1961. In addition, in 1961 the Netherlands established the Papoea Vrijwilligers Corps or Papua Volunteer Corps (PVK) and a Dutch-made army consisting of native Papuans. .

Therefore, there are several things that can be done by the colonial nation. Some of these things include techniques in divisive politics, as well as efforts in the politics of pitting one against the other. So, to find out more details, you can pay attention to the explanation below.

Efforts in the Politics of Fighting Against One Another

In carrying out divisive politics, there are several elements that are used as techniques in the politics of playing one against the other. What are the techniques? The following are the elements that become techniques in divisive politics, including:

• Encouraging, and creating a division in society in order to reduce alliances that can oppose sovereign power.
• Promote, or assist those who wish to cooperate with sovereign powers.
• Encouraging hostility, and a sense of distrust between groups or communities.
• Encouraging consumerism that aims to weaken political and military costs.

There are various kinds of strategies carried out by colonial nations. One of the most effective strategies of the colonialists to face resistance with local rulers, namely through the politics of pitting one against the other.

The initial step of the VOC was to be able to conquer the great kingdoms in the archipelago by taking advantage of civil wars and the existence of hostilities between kingdoms.

After their first plan was successful by using the politics of pitting one against the other. They were also successful in bringing the Indonesian people into conflict and fighting for power in the archipelago.

By making the effectiveness of devide et impera effective, it also received special attention from the royal government of the colonial nation because it succeeded in creating divisions that occurred in the archipelago.

There are several kinds of efforts made by the colonial nation to conquer the territory of the archipelago. What are they? The following are some of the efforts made by the colonial nation when implementing the divide et impera policy:

1. Become Friends and Create Enemies

In these efforts, the colonial nation, tried to make the Indonesian nation a friend. After that, they created an enemy together.

This is because when the colonial nations have made friends, then all the negotiations and diplomacy processes will run easily and smoothly. With everything being easy, it will make that country destroy other countries. Until finally making other parties serve as VOC business rivals. That is what is called creating enemies.

2. Issue management

In this second attempt, namely by managing issues, the pattern that was usually carried out by the colonial people was by spreading grapevines of news and rumors, both carried out in a political or social environment. Another form of issue management is propaganda.

3. Play on both sides

The next effort is to play on two sides. The colonial nation in general would side with two opposing camps as if they were in a neutral position.

4. Recruit local leaders

In general colonials would recruit a local leader to be part of the lower management chain. This trick was carried out in order to give recognition on behalf of the colonial nation to political entities in an area. This is similar to the occurrence of a Diponegoro War and the Malay Sultanate.

5. Set the occurrence of civil war

This step was carried out by using the natives as a military force against their own people. This pattern can be seen in history in West Sumatra in 1821-1837, at which time the colonial nation succeeded in provoking the Indigenous People to wage war against the Padri.

Those are some explanations about the politics of pitting one against the other in Indonesia. It consists of the political meaning of pitting one against the other, the origins of the politics of turning one against one another, and also the efforts made in politics against one another. Hopefully the discussion above can add to your insight about the politics of pitting one against the other.

Iftitah Allahumma Baid prayer – Salat 5 times as one of the pillars of Islam for Muslims which then becomes an obligation to fulfill. The obligation to perform the 5 daily prayers has been narrated in the hadith of Ibn Abbas radhiyallahu anhu which reads:

“That the Prophet SAW. had sent Muadz RA to Yemen, he said to him, ‘Invite them (the inhabitants of Yemen) to be able to testify that there is no god but Allah and that I am indeed Allah’s messenger, if they then wait for it, then tell them that Allah has made it obligatory for them five pray in a day and night,” HR. Al-Bukhari.

In prayer there is an Iftitah prayer which some people usually use with the Iftitah Allaahu Akbar Kabiraa prayer and there is also an Iftitah Allahumma Baid prayer. The two iftitah prayers can both be used when a Muslim prays.

In this article, we will discuss more about the pillars of prayer and also the two types of iftitah prayers.

Terms and Pillars of Prayer

To perform the 5 daily prayers, there are several conditions that must be met. The conditions for prayer include:

1. Must be Muslim
2. Baligh and common sense
3. Must be Clean from minor uncleanness and major uncleanness
4. Must know how to pray
5. It’s time to pray 5 times
6. Must always face the Qiblah and must comply with the rules of covering the genitals.

In addition to the conditions for prayer, every Muslim is then obliged to fulfill the pillars of prayer. The pillars of prayer in question include the following:

1. Stand up for those who are still able
2. Speak the intention in the heart
3. He must also pronounce takbiratul ihram (first takbir)
4.  He is obliged to read the letter Al-Fatihah in every cycle
5. It is obligatory to bow and tuma’ninah
6. He is obliged to read the iktidal after bowing and doing tumaninah
7. He is obliged to undergo two prostrations. Sit between the two prostrations
8. He is also required to sit in the final tasyahud
9. In addition, he is also obliged to read the final tasyahud prayer
10. He is obliged to read the blessings of the Prophet Muhammad SAW during the final tasyahud
11. Doing the first greeting Orderly and the pillars of prayer sequentially

Prayer Prayer Order and Explanation

Takbiratul Ihram

Takbiratul ihram is then carried out after reading the intention. The way to do takbiratul ihram is to raise your hands parallel to your ears and then say, “Allahu Akbar”.

The procedure for performing takbiratul ihram, namely:

1. The position of the palms when performing takbiratul ihram is to stretch out perfectly and not grip. Fingers are also not too wide or too tight when opening it.

From Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu ‘anhu, Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said: “The Messenger of Allah shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam when he started praying, he raised his hands and spread them out.” (Narrated by Abu Daud 753, Turmudzi 240, and authenticated by al-Albani)

1. The palms are then faced towards the Qiblah and raised to the level of the shoulders or ears. From Ibn Umar radhiyallahu ‘anhu, he narrated that Rasulullah shallallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam then raised his hands to shoulder height, when starting to pray.
2. Raise your hands up to your shoulders and then read the sentence “Allahu Akbar”.

Raise your hands then cross your arms together with the recitation of the takbir. From Ibn Umar radhiyallahu ‘anhuma he said: “I saw the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam starting takbiratul ihram when praying, he raised his hands when takbir.” (Narrated by Bukhari 738)

1. The legal conditions for takbiratul ihram include doing it while standing for those who can afford it. Takbiratul ihram must also be performed in a perfectly upright body position and may not appear to be slouching.
2. Takbiratul ihram in prayer is only done once and does not need to be repeated.
3. For someone who prays alone, or acts as a makmum, then the reading of takbiratul ihram can only be heard by himself.

Takbiratul Ihram reading

For Muslims, the reading of iftitah prayers and takbiratul ihram then becomes mandatory to know. Because, takbiratul ihram is included in the pillars of prayer which is then obligatory to do.

The prayer service will then begin with takbiratul ihram by raising both hands. After that, it is continued by reading the iftitah prayer. As in the Hadith of the History of Imaam Al Bukhoory no: 6251 and Imam Muslim no: 397, from Abu Hurairah RA’s friend, that Rasulullah SAW said:

“If you then stand up to pray, then complete your ablution then face the Qibla, then say takbir.” So what are the correct iftitah and takbiratul ihram prayers?

The reading of takbiratul ihram is as follows: اللَّهُ أَكْبَرُ Allahu Akbar Meaning: “Allah is Great”

When reciting the takbir, it’s best to pause when pronouncing “hu” (from the word Allahu). Besides that, don’t combine it with “a” (from the beginning of the word besar). So that the takbiratul ihram will not sound like as if reciting “huwa” (Allahu Akbar). It’s also best not to extend the word “actor”, so that it becomes great. Muslims should pronounce the end of takbir with “bar”, not “akbaru”.

Iftitah prayer

After saying the first takbir, fold your hands in front of your chest, again to be precise in the area that is closer to your heart.

One of the iftitah prayer readings, namely:

“Allaahu akbar kabiirow wal hamdu lillaahi katsiiroo wasubhaanalloohi bukrotaw wa-ashiilaa. Innii wajjahtu wajhiya lilladzii fathoros samaawaati wal ardlo haniifaa wamaa ana minal musyrikiin. Inna sholaatii wa nusukii wamahyaa wa mamaatii lillaahi robbil ‘alamin. Laa syariikalahu wa bidzaalika umirtu wa ana awwalul muslimiin”.

Al-Fatiha prayer

In each cycle, you are then required to read Surah Al-Fatihah. Reading the Al-Fatihah letter in every rak’ah is part of the pillars of prayer.

Reading Short Letters

The procedure for the 5 obligatory prayers the next time is to read a short letter. This short letter is then read in the first two cycles of prayer. However, unlike Al-Fatihah, reading short legal letters is sunnah.

Ruku and i’tidal

After finishing reading Al-Fatihah and short letters, it’s time to bow. When bowing, the prayer recited is: “Subhaana rabbiyal adzimi wa bihamdihi” (read 3 times).

After bowing, then it is required to read: ” Sami Allahu liman hamidah” . This reading is then recited while raising both hands at the level of the ears and standing straight. After that, the procedure for the next prayer is to read the itidal. The reading of the i’tidal prayer is: “ Rabbana lakal hamdu mil us samawati wa mil ul ardhi wa mil umasita min syai’in badu’ ‘.

Prostrate and sit between the two prostrations

Sujud is a position that is done by placing both palms and pressing the forehead and nose on the sejadah. As for the reading of the prostration prayer that must be said is: ” Subhaana rabbiyal ‘a’la wa bihamdihi ” (read 3 times).

After that, the next pillar of prayer is sitting between two prostrations. The reading of the prayer sitting between the two prostrations is: ” Robighfirlii warhamnii wajburnii warfa’nii wahdinii wa ‘aafinii wa’fu ‘annii “.

Initial Tasyahud

The initial tasyahud is then performed during the second cycle of the midday, afternoon, evening and evening prayers. The following below is the initial tasyahud prayer reading: ” Attahiyyatul mubarakaatus salawatut tayyibatu lillah. Assalamu alaika ayyuhan nabiyyu warahmatullahi wabarakatuh. Assalamu alaina wa ala ibadillahis salihin. Asyhadu alla ilaha illallah. Wa asyhadu anna Muhammadar Rasulullah. Allahumma salli ala sayyidina Muhammad .”

Final Tasyahud

The last pillar of prayer in a good and correct way of praying is the final tasyahud. This pillar is then carried out before greeting the last rak’ah. As for reading the final tasyahud, namely:

“ At-tahiyyaatu al-mubaarakaatu al-shalawaatu al-thoyyibaatu lillahi. Assalamu ‘alaika ayyuhan nabiyyu wa Rahmatullahi wa barakaatuhu. As-Salaamu ‘alainaa wa ‘alaa’ibaadillahi as-shoolihin. Asyhadu an laa ilaaha illa Allah wa Asyhadu anna Muhammadar rasuulullah. Allahumma Sholli ‘ala Sayyidinaa Muhammad. Wa ‘ala aali sayyidina Muhammad Kamaa shollayta ‘ala sayyidina Ibrahim. Wa Baarik ‘ala sayyidina Muhammad wa ‘ala aali sayyidina Muhammad. Kamaa baarakta ‘ala sayyidinaa Ibrahim, wa ‘ala sayyidina Ibrahim, fil ‘aalamiina innaka hamiidun majiid.”.

Regards

Greeting is the last movement in prayer by saying “Assalamu ‘alaikum warahmatullah” by turning to the right, then saying the greeting again by turning to the left.

Kinds of Iftitah Prayers

Iftitah prayer is divided into two versions, here are the full explanations.

Prayer Iftitah Allaahu Akbar Kabiraa

اَللهُ اَكْبَرُ كَبِيْرًا وَالْحَمْدُ لِلّهِ كَثِيْرًا وَسُبْحَانَ اللهِ بُكْرَةً وَاَصِيْلًا. اِنِّى وَجَّهْتُ وَجْهِيَ لِلَّذِيْ فَطَرَالسَّمَاوَاتِ وَالْnk Amen. لاَ شَرِيْكَ لَهُ وَبِذَلِكَ اُمِرْتُ وَاَنَا مِنَ الْمُسْلِمِيْنَ

Latin:

Allaahu akbar kabiraa walhamdulillaahi katsiiraa, wa subhaanallaahi bukratan wa’ashiilaa. Innii wajjahtu wajhiya lilladzii fatharas samaawaati wal ardha haniifan musliman wa maa anaa minal musyrikiin. Inna shalaatii wa nusukii wa mahyaaya wa mamaatii lillaahi rabbil ‘aalamiin. Laa syariikalahu wa bidzaalika umirtu wa ana minal muslimiin.

It means:

Allah is the Greatest with the greatest, all praise be to Allah with much praise. Glory be to Allah in the morning and evening. Indeed, I turn my face to Allah, who created the heavens and the earth with all obedience or in a state of submission, and I am not from those who associate partners with Him. Verily, my prayer, my worship, my life and my death are only for Allah, the Lord of the Worlds, Who has no partner for Him. Thus I was ordered. And I am one of the Muslims.

Prayer Iftitah Allahumma good

??? اللَّهُمَّ نَقِّنِى مِنَ الْخَطَايَا كَمَا يُنَقَّى الثَّوْبُ الأَبْيَضُ مِنَ الدَّنَسِ . Allah, the Most High, the Most Merciful

Latin:

Allahumma baa’id bainii wa baina khathaayaaya kamaa baa’adta bainal masyriqi wal maghrib. Allahumma naqqinii minal khathaayaa kamaa yunaqqatsawbul abyadlu minaddanasi. Allahummaghsil khathaayaaya bil maai watstsalji walbaradi.

It means:

O Allah, distance between me and my mistakes as you keep the east and the west. O Allah, purify my mistakes as white clothes are purified from dirt. O Allah, wash my faults with water, snow and cold water.” (Narrated by Bukhari and Muslim)

Thus the discussion about the pillars of prayer along with iftitah prayers. In general, the Iftitah prayer used is the Iftitah Allaahu Akbar Kabiraa prayer. Even so, there are also some people who read the Iftitah Allahumma Baid prayer during fardhu prayers. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for Sinaumed’s.

If you want to find books about midnight prayers and Duha prayers, then you can get them at sinaumedia. com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Sofyan

Source: from various sources

Recommended Books Related to Iftitah Prayer:

The Miracle of Dhuha, Tahajjud, and Other Sunnah Prayers

From Abu Hurairah, he said that the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said: “Indeed, the first practice that will be brought to account by humans on the Day of Judgment is prayer. Allah ‘azza wa jalla said to His angels and He who knows better, ‘Look at my servant’s prayer. Is the prayer perfect or not? If the prayer is perfect, it will be recorded for him a perfect reward. However, if there is a slight deficiency in his prayer, then Allah says: see, whether my servant has sunnah practices.

If My servant has a sunnah practice, Allah says: make up for the deficiencies that exist in the obligatory practice with the sunnah practice.’ Then other practices will be treated like this.” (Narrated by Abu Daud no. 864, Ibn Majah no. 1426 and Ahmad 2:425. Shaykh Al Albani says that this hadith is valid.) The Miracle of Tahajud and Other Sunnah Prayers.

Through this book, you can find out how many sunnah prayers you can perform in addition to the good practices that can be used as provisions on the day of reckoning. Happy reading, may we be part of the people who always get priority from Him. Amen.

 

The Power Of Tahajjud

It is fitting for those who believe to always establish prayer. However, the real prayer is heavy, except for those who are humble in their prayers. Then, how can someone be humble when praying? Namely by knowing the virtues of the prayer. So one can easily get solemnity in worship. This book tries to diskuss the primacy of the various kinds of worship that we have often done.

It is hoped that by knowing the various kinds of virtues, all of us as believers will become more enthusiastic and better at worshiping Allah SWT, especially in prayer. In addition to prayer, the book also diskusses blessings in the morning. Very lucky are those who are used to getting up in the morning and very much at a loss for those who spend their mornings just sleeping.

We can see all of this and we imitate it from our role model, Rasulullah, Muhammad SAW. This book is also equipped with scientific research from the various worships that we live which turn out to be very good for our bodies. But even so, the most important thing and we must guard is that worship by faith, not by research.

 

The Power of Tahajud Dhuha Alms (TDS)

In the Qur’an, Allah often combines prayer orders with zakat. Because, the first is worship related to God’s rights, while the other is related to human rights. These two acts of worship have a very important position, especially prayer. So, to perfect these two worships, Allah gave the people of Muhammad the opportunity to perform sunnah worship of a kind, in the form of sunnah prayers and alms.

Tahajud and Dhuha prayers are complementary to our obligatory prayers. Similarly alms sunnah, to complement our zakat. In these three practices, there are great benefits and powerful virtues. Answering prayers, abundance of sustenance, blessings, forgiveness of sins, noble position at His side, ward off misfortune and illness, prayers of angels, multiple rewards, serenity and serenity, are just a few of them. While the greatest is freedom from hell and being put into heaven.

 

The Power of Alms Tahajud Dhuha & Donation for Orphans

Ihsan is the highest level of worship. A muhsin will not limit himself, by simply carrying out or aborting obligations. He will add other acts of worship as a complement to the obligatory worship he has done. The more someone does ihsan, then Allah will do ihsan to him more than what he did. So that his life will be filled with awesomeness. Alms, Tahajud, Dhuha, and Santuni for orphans are ihsan practices that will add to the awesomeness of our lives. Do these practices with all your heart, with determination, and with all your faith in your soul, so that we can enjoy their awesomeness.

Praying is a habit for every religious community. Prayer is one practice that is often done by Muslims. By praying, creatures of faith will continue to devote all their wishes and hopes only to Allah SWT. By praying, we always have good thoughts, that what we want will be granted.

Praying is not only done when carrying out the obligatory prayers, Muslims can also pray anytime and anywhere. Even the habit of praying can be done every time you want to start a job until you finish the job.

This habit has no other purpose so that we can continue to remember Allah and only ask Him. One of the prayers that is recommended to be practiced in Islam is the prophetic prayer. Nurbuat prayer or often also called nubuwwah prayer is one of the prayers that has many fadilah if it is said consistently in everyday life.

This nurbuat prayer is a practice for Muslims who seek protection from Allah SWT. In addition, this prophetic prayer has various good benefits for oneself, such as being able to get protection from Allah, avoiding hostility, and avoiding various disturbances by magic and jinns.

Nurbuat prayer can also be a practice that can be applied in everyday life. In addition to getting the benefits of protection from Allah, prophetic prayer can also add rewards that can be useful for the afterlife.

The priority of Du’a

Prayer is one of the most important things. By praying we ask something only to Allah SWT. The following are the virtues of prayer to Allah SWT, namely:

• Live Longer

According to research, those who are spiritual and adopt a healthy lifestyle can have a longer life time compared to others.

By praying, it can help in lowering blood pressure and calming a person. This can help in lowering the pulse so that it can help synchronize the heart system in the body.

 

• Make Yourself More Optimistic

For people with depression or chronic illness, if they do religious activities every day they are reported to be more optimistic than others. Several studies have also explained that people who regularly pray or meditate can tend to experience a decrease in stress and an increase in a positive mood within them.

 

• Stable Blood Pressure

Several studies have found that people who pray daily have a 40% lower risk of developing hypertension than those who don’t pray regularly. This is supported by the impact of praying on lowering the pulse and maintaining heart rhythm.

 

• Happier

For someone who prays regularly, he can be happier. This is as revealed by a study that when praying, the brain will release the hormone oxytocin. By praying, a person can become a more peaceful and comfortable person in carrying out various activities.

Not only the hormone oxytocin, by praying, a balance will occur in the hormones serotonin and melatonin in the body. So, never hesitate to pray regularly, Sinaumed’s.

 

• Think Clearly And Positively

It cannot be denied that it is a fact that prayer and meditation are effective in reducing reactivity to traumatic and negative events because when praying, a person will focus on positive thoughts outside of himself.

In addition, praying involves the prefrontal cortex, which is the part of the brain that regulates executive function. For example, self-control and making someone more able to make good decisions.

 

• Prevent Dementia

In addition, the benefits obtained when praying are closely related to the brain. By praying, you utilize the areas of the brain that are used for reading, speaking, and thinking. However, in a more complex way.

So the more often you use your brain, the better it will function. You too can prevent aging and dementia. Our brains and bodies were created to be used. The more we use it, the better we will be.

 

• Relieves Stress

Besides being able to make yourself happy, by praying regularly, the stress that a person has can be reduced. Not only reduced, but the stress that you are currently facing can also be done.

The Meaning of Prophetic Prayer

Nurbuat prayer in Arabic comes from the word nurun nubuwwah or which means the light of the prophet. This prophetic prayer is said to have various good benefits if applied in everyday life.

Starting from prayers to ask for protection when leaving the house, asking for protection from interference by jinns and other dangers, to prayers to be loved by enemies. This is one of the good prayer practices that can be practiced in everyday life.

The following is a prayer reading from various sources, namely:

بِسْمِ اللهِ الرَّحْمٰنِ الرَّحِيْمِاَللّٰهُمَّ ذِى السُّلْطَانِ الْعَظِيْمِ وَذِى الْمَنِّ الْقَدِيْمِ وَذِي الْوَجْهِ الْكَرِيْمِ وَوَلِيِّ الْكَلِمَاتِ التَّامَّاتِ وَالدَّعَوَاتِ الْمُسْتَجَابَةِ عَاقِلِ الْحَسَنِ وَالْحُسَيْنِ مِنْ اَنْفُسِ الْحَقِّ عَيْنِ الْقُدْرَةِ وَالنَّاظِرِيْنَ وَعَيْنِ الْجِنِّ الْاِنْسِ وَالشَّيَاطِيْنِوَاِنْ يَّكَادُ الَّذِيْنَ كَفَرُوْا لَيُزْ لِقُوْنَكَ بِاَبْصَارِهِمْ لَمَّا سَمِعُوا الذِّكْرَ وَيَقُوْلُوْنَ اِنَّهُ لَمَجْنُوْنٌ وَمَاهُوَ اِلاَّذِكْرٌ لِّلْعَالَمِيْنَ وَمُسْتَجَابُ اْلقُرْاٰنِ الْعَظِيْمِ وَوَرِثَ سُلَيْمَانُ دَاوُدَ عَلَيْهِمَا السَّلَامُ الْوَدُوْدُ ذُوالْعَرْشِ الْمَجِيْدِطَوِّلْ عُمْرِيْ وَصَحِّحْ جَسَدِيْ وَاقْضِ حَاجَتِيْ وَاَكْثِرْ اَمْوَالِيْ وَاَوْلَادِيْ وَحَبِّبْنِيْ لِلنَّاسِ اَجْمَعِيْنَ وَتَبَاعَدِ الْعَدَاوَةَ كُلَّهَا مِنْ بَنِيْ اٰدَمَ عَلَيْهِ السَّلَامُ مَنْ كَانَ حَيًّاوَّيَحِقَّ الْقَوْلُ عَلَى الْكَافِرِيْنَ اِنَّكَ عَلٰى كُلِّ شَيْءٍ قَدِيْرٌسُبْحَانَ رَبِّكَ رَبِّ الْعِزَّةِ عَمَّا يَصِفُوْنَ وَسَلَامٌ عَلَى الْمُرْسَلِيْنَ وَالْحَمْدُ لِلّٰهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِيْ

Allahumma dzis-sulthaanil ‘azhim wa dzil-mannil qadimi wa dzil-wajhil-kariim wa waliyyil-kalimati taammati wadda’awaatil mustajaabaati ‘aaqilil hasani wal-husaini min anfusil hakki ‘ainil qudrati wan-nazrina wa ‘ainil jinni wal insi wasy-syayaathin . Wa iy yakaadul ladziina kafaruu layzliquunaka bi abshaarihim lamma samii’udz-dzikra, wa aqualuna innahu lamajnun, wa maa huwa illa dzikrul lil-‘aalamiin, wa mustajabil-qur’anil-‘adzim, wa waritsa sulaiman daawuda ‘alaihis salaam, al-waduudu dzul ‘arsyil-majiid. Thawwil ‘umrii wa shahhih jasadii waqdhi haajatii wa aktsir amwali waulaadii wa habbibnii linnas ajma ‘iina wataba ‘adil’ada wata kullahaa mim banii aadama ‘alaihis salamu man kaana hayya wa yahiqqal-qaulu ‘alal kaafiriina innaka ‘alaa kulli syai’in qadiir .

It means:“O Allah, the Almighty, who has grace, who is the Substance of the Most High, who masters many perfect sentences and efficacious prayers, the guarantor of Al Hasan and Al Husain of the right soul, powerful views, and those who see from the view of the jinn, humans and demons. Indeed, those who disbelieve are those who plunge you into their eyes when you hear the Koran and they say, “Indeed, Muhammad is a madman. Al-Quran is only a warning for every ummah. O He who allows through the Al-Quran which is very great. Solomon and also David and He who is Most Merciful, as the Owner of the Noble Throne. So extend my life, make my body healthy, fulfill everything I need, and increase my wealth and children, make me a person who is spared from all the enmity of the children of adam who are still alive. Make sure the decree or punishment for those who disbelieve. For verily You are the Almighty over all things. Glory be to your Lord, that is, the One who has greatness, from whatever (they) depict, namely the disbelievers, and prosperity is abundant for the Apostles, and all praise be to Allah the owner

1. Prayers originating from the Al-Quran and hadiths can be read collectively (based on the agreement of the scholars). Except for Nakha’i and Thawus in the Hanafi school, some only allow prayers that originate from the Al-Quran.
2. Prayers originating from friends and among the salaf as-shalih are legally permissible to read except for the opinion of Nakha’I and Thawus.
3. While prayers that resemble ma’tsur prayers there are differences between scholars who allow and do not.
4. So, it can be concluded, in the five daily prayers you are allowed to read prayers that do not originate from the Al-Quran or hadith as long as they are based on the good goals of the world and the hereafter.

So, it can be concluded, in the five daily prayers you are allowed to read prayers that do not originate from the Al-Quran or hadith as long as they are based on the goal of good in this world and the hereafter.

How to Practice Nurbuat Prayer

In practicing the Nurbuat Prayer, there are special ways that can be done so that the Nurbuat Prayer is quickly answered. In this case, before reciting the prophetic prayer readings, you can first read a series of other sentences and prayers. Like reading Surah Al Fatihah, Surah Al Ikhlas and some recommended sentences or recitations. Here’s how to practice Nurbuat Prayer, namely:

1. Read the sentence “Ilaa hadhratin nabiyyil musthofa sholallahu ‘alaihi wassalam.”
2. Read Surah Al Fatihah once.
3. Read the sentence “Tsumma ila hadroti ikhwaanihii minal ambiya’i wal mursalin wal auliyai wasy syuhada wash shaalihiin wash shahaabti wattaabi’iina wal ulamaa’i ‘aamiliina wal mushannifiinal mukhlishiina wa jami’il angelanil muqorrobiina.”
4. Read Surah Al Fatihah once.
5. Read “Ila specially Sheikh Majdudin Al-Karmani” (Khodam Prayer Nurbuat).
6. Read Surah Al Fatihah once.
7. Reading “Ila especially Sheikh Abdul Qadir Jailani, Sheikh Qori, Sheikh Madi, Sheikh Samandari, Sheikh Ahmad Al Falatil.”
8. Read Surah Al Fatihah once.
9. Read Surah Al Ikhlas three times.
10. Read Surah Al Falaq three times.
11. Read Surah An Nas three times.
12. Read the blessings of the Prophet 12 times.
13. Just ended by reading the Noble Prayer

The Virtue of Reading Nurbuat Prayer

Nurbuat Prayer has several virtues in it which when done in everyday life, God willing, someone who practices it will immediately be able to feel it. This virtue can be in the form of having your wish fulfilled, having your sins forgiven, getting Allah’s protection, healing various kinds of diseases, and being able to meet the Prophet Muhammad SAW.

Below will be given some of the virtues of reading prophetic prayers which are read regularly.

1. Can meet the Prophet Muhammad if read 100 times before going to bed.
2. Can cure various kinds of diseases if read on coconut oil and then rubbed on the sick.
3. Accelerate the fulfillment of one’s wishes. Insyaallah it will be achieved if istiqomah practices it every day.
4. Can get God’s protection from jinns, magic, and other dangers.
5. Can save pest attacks if written placed on plants.
6. Get prosperity in the afterlife if you read it regularly every day.
7. Endeared by the Enemy (Opponent). If you have enemies in this life, God willing, they will be friends later.
8. Give protection to our homes from disturbances of magic, jinn and other dangers.
9. Facilitate the delivery process for women who will give birth. Therefore, it is recommended to read a lot of Nurbuat prayers before entering the birthing process.
10. Can heal disabled animals when read on the animal.
11. Can be forgiven sins when read at sunset.
12. Can reconcile people who are fighting. This prayer contains a request to grant peace to the descendants of Prophet Adam.
13. Gaining glory in the eyes of others in his life.
14. Extended life with full benefits in his life.
15. Make a bright face for people who read it istiqomah.
16. Guidance is given to a truth and shunned from anything that is false.
17. Make beasts tame. If you are in a condition where you encounter wild animals, read Nurbuat’s prayer to ask Allah’s help by taming these wild animals.
18. Far away from the nature of kufr.
19. Can cure sore eyes if read and then blow on the sore eye.
20. Can save pest attacks if written placed on plants.
21. If read every midnight, the angels descend from the sky around the reader and ask Allah for forgiveness.
22. If this prayer is read every Monday, then Allah will provide safety at any time, if read on Tuesday, then Allah will give strength to the body, and if you want to be healthy and fit and stay young, then read it every Sunday.
23. Whoever reads it every Saturday as much as 100x then all his intentions will be granted.
24. If this prayer is read every day, you will be avoided from the temptations of Satan and Allah will save you from the torments of hell.
25. Whoever reads this prayer 100 times in a holy state on Friday night in a quiet place, God willing, will meet the queen of jinn

Sinaumed’s can get more information about prophetic prayer by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best.

This is a discussion of prophetic prayer and its meaning. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Reference:

• https://www.teknokarta.com/1695/doa-nurbuat-asli-dan-artinya.html
• http://www.quran7m.com/searchResults/040060.html
• https://tafsirweb.com/8872-surat-al-mumin-ayat-60.html/
• https://en-gb.facebook.com/OFFICIAL.RMDL/photos/a.1942150659134003/1982427851772950/
• https://www.pesankiai.com/2022/05/doa-perlindungan-dari-disease.html/
• https://www.klikdokter.com/info-sehat/kesehatan-umum/untung-berdoa-untuk-kesehatan
• https://www.merdeka.com/jateng/doa-nurbuat-dan-keutamaannya-need-ditahui-kln.html
• https://kumparan.com/berita-terkini/bacaan-doa-nurbuat-asli-dalam-language-arab-latin-dan-artinya-1v2x6dgiZI3
• https://id.news.yahoo.com/8-benefits-berdoa-bagi-kesehatan-104036109.html

Order of human respiratory organs – “The Human Respiratory System is a network of organs and tissues that help us breathe. The main function of this system is to take oxygen into the body and remove carbon dioxide from the body. That is the meaning of the respiratory system which includes the human respiratory organs according to Byjus.

Sinaumed’s, do you know about the correct order of the human respiratory organs? Previously, let’s study the respiratory system first.

Respiratory system

The respiratory system is a network of organs that can all help us to breathe. This system includes the airways, lungs, and blood vessels. In fact, the muscles that move our lungs are also part of the respiratory system.
The parts of this system work together to circulate oxygen throughout the body and remove carbon dioxide.

Sequence of Human Respiratory Organs

The following is a list of the order of the human respiratory organs, starting with the nose. Listen carefully so you can understand it, Sinaumed’s!

1. Nose

Regarding the nose, humans have two outer nostrils which are divided by a framework of cartilaginous structures or septum. This structure separates the right nostril and the left nostril.

In the nose, there are tiny hair follicles that cover the lining of the cavities and serve as the body’s first line of defense against foreign pathogens. Not only that, the hair that is often referred to as nose hair also provides additional moisture for the air we breathe.

2. Pharynx

Next, the space in the nose opens into a wide hollow space called the pharynx. This channel which is also sometimes referred to as the pharynx is generally related to air and food. Its function is to prevent the entry of any food particles into our throats.

There is also an elastic cartilage called the epiglottis which functions as a transition between the larynx and the esophagus. Thus, air can pass through the larynx to the lungs and food leads to the esophagus to continue the digestive system.

3. Larynx

The cartilage mentioned above provides a framework for air to reach the larynx. The larynx itself is at the front of the neck and is in charge of helping our breathing as well as our vocals. For this reason, this section is also often referred to as the ballot box informally.
When we swallow food, a fold called the epiglottis folds above the throat and prevents food from entering the larynx.

4. Throat (Trachea)

The trachea or windpipe lies after the larynx and extends down into the neck. Its walls are composed of C-shaped rings of cartilage, which give the trachea its hardness and allow it to expand completely.

Further than it seems, the trachea extends past the neck to the sternum and divides into two bronchi, one for each lung.

5. Bronchus

The bronchi are the two halves that separate from the trachea and enter each lung. Bronchus is further divided into secondary and tertiary bronchioles. Furthermore, these sections branch into small air sacs called alveoli.

Alveoli are tiny, single-celled air sacs with thin walls. With it, we can carry out exchanges between oxygen and carbon dioxide molecules to enter or leave the bloodstream.

6. Bronchioles

Next, air arrives at the bronchioles which are branches of the bronchi. The bronchial tubes are smoother, the walls are thinner. There are two left bronchioles, and also three right bronchioles. These branches will later form even finer branches, such as vessels.

7. Alveoli

Alveoli are dead ends in the form of air bubbles. The walls are thin and only cell-thick, moist, and adjacent to blood capillaries. The function of the alveoli is as a respiratory surface which has a total area of ​​50x the surface area of ​​the body, about 100 square meters. Thus, the area is sufficient to carry out gas exchange throughout our body.

8. Lungs

So, we come to the lungs, which many consider the “final destination” of breathing. The lungs themselves are indeed the main organs of respiration in humans and vertebrate animals. Located on either side of the heart, in the chest cavity. The lung is anatomically a spongy organ whose surface area is estimated to be between 50 and 75 square meters.

This organ has the main function as a facilitator of gas exchange between air and gas. Interestingly, our right lung is larger and heavier than the left. The lungs are generally gray to pink in color, and they take up most of the space in our chest.

The lungs are also surrounded by a membrane (pleura). For each of the right and left lungs, they are separated by an area of ​​the mediastinum which contains:

• Great heart and vessels
• Throat
• Esophagus
• thymus gland
• Lymph gland

This one organ also has 3 parts called lobes. In the left lung, there are 2 lobes.

Sinaumed’s, here is a brief description of what happens when we inhale:

• Air enters the body through the nose or mouth.
• Then, air moves down the throat through the larynx and trachea.
• Air enters the lungs through tubes called mainstem bronchi.
• One mainstem bronchus leads to the right lung and one to the left lung
  1. In the lungs, the main trunk bronchi divide into smaller bronchi.
  2. The smaller bronchi divide into smaller tubes (bronchioles).
  3. Bronchioles end in tiny air sacs (alveoli) where the exchange of oxygen and carbon dioxide occurs.

After that, we then exhale carbon dioxide.

Trachea and Esophagus

Of course, there is a very distinct difference between the trachea or windpipe and the esophagus. However, there are still many who find it difficult to determine the difference. The trachea and esophagus are indeed two tubular structures found in the neck area of ​​the human body. They are located close to each other, but their functions are very different.

The trachea serves as the windpipe; closely related to human breathing. Meanwhile, the esophagus is the food channel. The following is a more detailed explanation of the two:

Esophagus

The esophagus is a hollow fibromuscular tube-like structure that connects the pharynx to the stomach. This organ is located at the back of the trachea and heart, and is about 25 centimeters long.

The esophagus passes through the diaphragm and the uppermost area of ​​the stomach. This organ is covered by a mucous membrane and is part of the digestive system, commonly referred to as the food pipe.

Trachea (Trachea)

The trachea is a wide, hollow, cartilaginous, tube-like organ located in the neck. As part of the respiratory system that connects the larynx and bronchi, the trachea is about 10-11 centimeters long.

Therapeutic Management of Diseases of the Respiratory System

 

 

Features of the Respiratory System

The human respiratory system has important features, as follows:

In all living cells in the human body, energy is produced by the breakdown of glucose molecules. Oxygen is inhaled and then transported to the various organs mentioned above and used in burning food particles at the cellular level in a series of chemical reactions. The glucose molecules obtained are also used to form ATP energy or adenosine triphosphate.

Functions of the Respiratory System

Not only the characteristics, we certainly know that the respiratory system must have certain functions so that it is available in our body. This is the function of the respiratory system!

Inhalation and Expiration

This is the main function we can surmise: it assists breathing also known as pulmonary ventilation. The respiratory system allows air to be inhaled through the nose and travels through the pharynx, larynx, trachea, etc. until it enters the lungs.

In fact, air is exhaled through the same path. When we inhale, our diaphragm will be pulled down and create a vacuum so that airflow can reach the lungs. Instead, the diaphragm will relax upwards and encourage our lungs to deflate when we exhale.

Gas Exchange between the Lungs and the Blood Stream

Oxygen and carbon dioxide enter and exit the lungs via millions of microscopic sacs of alveoli. The oxygen we breathe will diffuse into the capillaries of the lungs, bind to hemoglobin, and pump it into all blood streams. Meanwhile, carbon dioxide from the blood will diffuse into the alveoli and exhaled through our breathing.

Gas Exchange between the Blood Stream and Body Tissues

Oxygen is carried throughout the body from the lungs by blood. Blood also releases oxygen when it reaches the capillaries. Through the capillary walls, oxygen is distributed into the body’s tissues. Meanwhile, the carbon dioxide that is formed diffuses into the blood and is brought back to the lungs to be released.

Vocal Cord Vibration

The muscles in the larynx move the arytenoid cartilages when we speak. This cartilage will push the vocal cords together. When air passes over the vocal cords during breathing, the vocal cords vibrate and produce sound. That’s why we can make our voices heard.

olfaction

When air enters the nasal cavity during inhalation, some of the chemicals in the air bind to it and activate nervous system receptors on the cilia. Through the brain, signals are sent to the olfactory bulbs .

The Last Breath – The Last Breath

 

 

How Do We Breathe?

This is a detailed explanation regarding how we breathe, Sinaumed’s.

When you inhale air into your nose or mouth, this is where breathing begins. The air will move down the back of the throat and into the throat. They are also divided into two airways called bronchial tubes.

For the lungs to perform at their best, these airways must be open. They should be free of inflammation or swelling and extra mucus. As air passes through the lungs, it divides into smaller airways called bronchioles. Bronchioles end in tiny, balloon-like air sacs called alveoli. Interestingly, our bodies have around 600 million alveoli.

Alveoli are surrounded by a network of tiny blood vessels called capillaries. Here, oxygen from the inhaled air enters the blood.

After absorbing oxygen, blood flows to our heart. The heart then pumps it through the body to the cells of other existing tissues and organs. When cells use oxygen, they make carbon dioxide into the blood.

The blood then carries the carbon dioxide back to the lungs, where it is expelled from the body when we exhale.

How the Respiratory System Cleans the Air

There is an innate method belonging to the respiratory system that can prevent harmful things from entering our lungs. For example, hair on the nose that helps filter out large particles. These tiny hairs called cilia move like sweeps to keep our respiratory tract clear.

However, if you inhale harmful things like cigarette smoke, the cilia can stop working, Sinaumed’s. Because of that, cigarette smoke can cause health problems such as bronchitis.
Then, cells in the trachea and bronchial tubes also create mucus which keeps the airways moist and helps keep things like dust, bacteria and viruses, and allergens out of the lungs.

Affecting Conditions

There are various conditions that can affect the organs and tissues that make up the respiratory system. Several conditions develop due to irritation from things we breathe in the air, including viruses or bacteria that cause infections. Other conditions occur as a result of disease or advancing age.

Conditions that can cause inflammation (swelling, irritation and pain) or affect the respiratory system include:

• Allergies: Inhaling proteins, such as dust, mold, and pollen, can cause respiratory allergies in some people. This protein can cause inflammation in the airways.
• Asthma: A chronic (long-term) disorder, asthma causes inflammation of the airways which can make breathing difficult.
• Infection: Can cause pneumonia (pneumonia) or bronchitis (inflammation of the bronchial tubes). Generally, these infections include the flu or influenza, or a cold.
• Certain diseases: Disorders that can compromise the ability of the respiratory system to deliver oxygen throughout the body, such as lung cancer and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD).
• Aging: Lung capacity decreases with age.
• Damage: The respiratory system becomes damaged and can cause breathing problems.

Diseases of the Respiratory System

Common diseases of the respiratory system include:

• Asthma _ The airways narrow and create too much mucus.
• Bronchiectasis . Inflammation and infection make the bronchial walls thicker.
• COPD . A long-term condition that gets worse over time. These diseases include bronchitis and emphysema.
• Pneumonia . The infection causes inflammation in the alveoli. They may fill with fluid or pus.
• tuberculosis . This respiratory disease is caused by bacteria. The infection usually affects the lungs, but may also involve the kidneys, spine, or brain.
• Lung cancer . The cells in our lungs change and grow into tumors. This is often due to smoking or other chemicals we inhale.
• Cystic fibrosis . The disease is caused by a problem in a gene and gets worse over time. This causes a lung infection that doesn’t go away.
• Pleural effusion . Too much fluid builds up between the tissues that line the lungs and chest.
• Idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis . Lung tissue becomes scarred and unable to work as it should.
• Sarcoidosis . Small clumps of inflammatory cells called granulomas form, often in the lungs and lymph nodes.

Conclusion

It is important for us to be able to clear mucus, lungs and airways for respiratory health.

To maintain the health of the respiratory system, Sinaumed’s must:

• Avoid various pollutants that have the potential to damage the airways, such as cigarette smoke, chemicals, to radon (a radioactive gas that can cause cancer).
• Wear a mask if we are in a situation where we may be exposed to smoke, dust or various other types of pollutants for various reasons.
• Do not smoke.
• Eat a healthy diet with lots of fruits and vegetables and drink water to stay hydrated.
• Exercise regularly to keep your lungs healthy.
• Prevent infection with frequent hand washing and a yearly flu vaccine.

That’s what Sinaumed’s can do to maintain the health of the respiratory system. Thus the discussion about the order of the human respiratory organs to the function of the respiratory system. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

A few days before the fasting of Ramadan, usually Muslims will perform worship on the night of Nisfu Sya’ban. On this occasion, we will discuss more about Nisfu Sha’ban, starting from the understanding to the prayers of Nisfu Sha’ban. So, keep reading this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Nisfu Sha’ban

Sha’ban is the eighth month in the Hijri calendar or the month before Muslims perform the fast of Ramadan. In the middle of the month of Sha’ban, Muslims in Indonesia usually carry out the Nisfu Syaban night.

The month of Sha’ban is also interpreted as a month full of blessings and kindness. On the night of Nisfu Sha’ban, Allah SWT opens the widest door of mercy and forgiveness for Muslims.

In a hadith HR Al-Bukhari, said that the Prophet Muhammad SAW often perform sunnah fasting in the month of Sha’ban compared to other months.

Nisfu Sha’ban Fasting Intentions

The reading of the Sunnah fasting intention in the month of Sha’ban is:

نَوَيْتُ صَوْمَ غَدٍ عَنْ أَدَاءِ سُنَّةِ شَعْبَانَ لِلهِ تَعَالَى

Nawaitu shauma ghadin ‘an adai sunnati Sya’bana lillâhi ta’ala

Meaning:   “I intend to fast the Sunnah of Sya’ban tomorrow because of Allah SWT.”

The intention of fasting to make up the fast of Ramadan coincides with the Nisfu Sha’ban fast

As for the intention to make up Ramadan fasts or perform the Nisfu Shaban fast together with the debt of fasting for Ramadan last year:

نَوَيْتُ صَوْمَ غَدٍ عَنْ قَضَاءِ فَرْضِ شَهْرِ رَمَضَانَ لِلهِ تَعَالَى

Nawaitu shauma ghadin ‘an qadhā’I fardhi syahri Ramadhāna lillâhi ta’âlâ.

Meaning:   “I intend to make up the fasting month of Ramadan tomorrow because of Allah SWT.”

This in terms of fiqh is referred to as at-tasyri fin niyyah (combining intentions).

In the matter of merging intentions between fardhu and sunnah in one worship, Imam Suyuthi in his book al-Asybah wan Nadhair divides into four criteria, namely:

1. Legitimate both of which are fardhu and sunnah
2. Valid for fardhu worship only, not for sunnah worship
3. Valid for sunnah worship only, not for fardhu worship
4. Invalid both

Therefore, it is in the month of Sha’ban that Muslims are encouraged to increase sunnah worship and practice. Muslims look forward to the night of Nisfu Shaban, because according to some explanations, that night all prayers will be answered or granted.

The Nisfu Sha’ban night itself is celebrated once a year, more precisely in the middle of the month of Sha’ban or the 15th of the Islamic or Hijri calendar.

Nisfu Sha’ban prayer

Apart from that, the night of Nisfu Sha’ban is also one of the days that Muslims in Indonesia are looking forward to, usually on the night of Nisfu Sya’ban, Muslims will pray a special prayer to ask for forgiveness on that night.

The main purpose of this prayer is to get closer to Allah SWT. Because on the night of nisfu sya’ban the life notes will be replaced with new life notes.

Praying on the night of Nisfu Sha’ban is one of the practices that is highly recommended for Muslims, because the night of Nisfu Sha’ban is the time when prayers are answered.

Nisfu Sha’ban is the month in which the old charity book is closed and a new charity book is opened. So multiply begging for forgiveness by hoping that the charity notebook can be filled with goodness.

Here are some Nisfu Syaban prayers that are often read, namely:

اَللَّهُمَّ يَا ذَا الْمَنِّ وَ لا يَمُنُّ عَلَيْكَ يَا ذَا اْلجَلاَلِ وَ اْلاِكْرَامِ ياَ ذَا الطَّوْلِ وَ اْلاِنْعَامِ لاَ اِلهَ اِلاَّ اَنْتَ ظَهْرَ اللاَّجِيْنَ وَجَارَ الْمُسْتَجِيْرِيْنَ وَ اَمَانَ اْلخَائِفِيْنَ . اَللَّهُمَّ اِنْ كُنْتَ كَتَبْتَنِى عِنْدَكَ فِيْ اُمِّ اْلكِتَابِ شَقِيًّا اَوْ مَحْرُوْمًا اَوْ مَطْرُوْدًا اَوْ مُقْتَرًّا عَلَىَّ فِى الرِّزْقِ فَامْحُ اللَّهُمَّ بِفَضْلِكَ فِيْ اُمِّ اْلكِتَابِ شَقَاوَتِي وَ حِرْمَانِي وَ طَرْدِي وَ اِقْتَارَ رِزْقِي وَ اَثْبِتْنِىْ عِنْدَكَ فِي اُمِّ اْلكِتَابِ سَعِيْدًا مَرْزُوْقًا مُوَفَّقًا لِلْخَيْرَاتِ فَإِنَّكَ قُلْتَ وَ قَوْلُكَ اْلحَقُّ فِى كِتَابِكَ الْمُنْزَلِ عَلَى نَبِيِّكَ الْمُرْسَلِ يَمْحُو اللهُ مَا يَشَاءُ وَ يُثْبِتُ وَ عِنْدَهُ اُمُّ اْلكِتَابِ. اِلهِيْ بِالتَّجَلِّى اْلاَعْظَمِ فِي لَيْلَةِ النِّصْفِ مِنْ شَهْرِ شَعْبَانَ الْمُكَرَّمِ الَّتِيْ يُفْرَقُ فِيْهَا كُلُّ اَمْرٍ حَكِيْمٍ وَ يُبْرَمُ اِصْرِفْ عَنِّيْ مِنَ اْلبَلاَءِ مَا اَعْلَمُ وَ مَا لا اَعْلَمُ وَاَنْتَ عَلاَّمُ اْلغُيُوْبِ بِرَحْمَتِكَ يَا اَرْحَمَ الرَّاحِمِيْنَ وَصَلَّى اللهُ عَلَى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ وَعَلَى اَلِهِ وَ صَحْبِهِ وَ سَلَّمَ . اَمِيْنَ

Allahumma ya dzal manni wala yumannu ‘alaika, ya dzal jalali wal ikram, ya dzat thouli wal in’am, la ilaha illa anta zhahral lajin wa jaral mustajirin wa ma amanal khoifin. Allahumma in kunta katabtani ‘indaka fi ummil kitabi shaqiyyan aw mahruman aw muqtarran ‘alayya fir rizqi, fam allahumma fi ummil kitabi syaqowati wa hirmani waqtitara rizqi, timingbni ‘indaka sa’idan marzuqi muwaffaqan lil khairat. Fa innaka qulta wa qawlukal haqqu fi kitabil munzali ‘ala Rompii nabiyyikal mursal, “yamhullahu ma yasau wa yusbit, wa ‘Indahu ummul Kitab” wa shallallahu ‘ala sayyidina muhammad wa alaalihi wa shahbihi wa sallam, walhamdu lillahi rabbil ‘alamin.

It means:  “O my God who is the giver, you are not given. O God of greatness and glory. O God, giver of all wealth and all favors. There is no god but You, the strength of those who ask for help, the protection of those who seek refuge and the safe haven of those who are afraid. My Lord, if You record with Your side on the Tablet of Mahfuzh as a wretched person, unlucky, or a person who has limited sustenance, then erase in the Lauh Mahfuzh my accidents, bad luck, and narrowness of sustenance. Record me by Your side as a person who is lucky, generous in sustenance and taufiq to do good because You have said–while Your words are true–in Your book which was revealed through the words of Your messenger Messenger, ‘Allah removes and determines what He wills. At His side Lauhul Mahfuzh. ‘ May Allah send blessings on Sayyidina Muhammad SAW and his family and companions. Praise be to Allah SWT.”

In addition to reciting the prayer, Muslims are also advised to read Yasin’s letter three times during the Nisfu Syaban prayer.

The Practices of the Sunnah Night of Nisfu Sya’ban

1. Do lots of sunnah prayers

Sunnah prayer is a practice of worship that is usually performed on the night of Nisfu Shaban. Nisfu Shaban night is believed to be a glorious night where the forgiveness of human sins is forgiven by Allah SWT.

Running sunnah prayers on the night of Nisfu Sya’ban is highly recommended for Muslims, including the Hajat prayer, Tasbih Prayer and Tahajud Prayer. Nisfu Sya’ban itself is the midday of the month of Sha’ban which falls on the 15th of the month of Sha’ban on the Hijri calendar. The law of doing the Nisfu Sha’ban prayer is Sunnah, which means if you do it you get a reward and if you don’t do it you won’t get a sin or reward. The Sunnah Nisfu Sya’ban prayer can be performed by every Muslim, both men and women, in the middle of the month of Sha’ban or on the night of the 15th of the month of Sha’ban.

You can read the intention for the nisfu Shaban night prayer and the procedure for this in the discussion below. The following is the reading of the sunnah nisfu shaban prayer and the procedure for doing it, namely:

• Read intention

As for the intention of the nisfu sya’ban prayer, namely:
“Usholli sunnatan nisfu sya’ban rak’ataini lillahi ta’ala”

Meaning: “I pray the sunnat Nisfu Sya’ban two cycles because of Allah Ta’ala”

• Read the iftitah prayer followed by Al Fatiha and a short letter.
• bow
• Itidal
• prostrate
• Sit between two prostrations
• Stand up and do the second cycle.
• Repeat as usual.
• Sit tahiyat end
• Read greetings.

2. Read Yasin’s letter three times and Istighfar

The next practice recommended for Muslims is reading Surah Yasin verses 1-83 three times.

By reading Yasin’s letter three times on the night of Nisfu Sya’ban, Allah SWT will forgive all his sins. As in the hadith of Rasulullah SAW, namely:

God bless you

Meaning: “Whoever reads Yasin on Friday days and nights hoping to please Allah, his sins will be forgiven” (HR Asbahani).

The details of reading Yasin’s letter 3x are as follows:

• The first reading of Yasin’s Letter is intended to be given a long life along with Taufik to obey Allah.
• The reading of the second Yasin Letter is intended to guard against reinforcements and disasters and to extend sustenance.
• Reading Yasin’s last letter is intended to be given a rich heart and die in a state of husnul khotimah.

Istighfar and dhikr to Allah. Can be done by reading:

Istighfar 100x

اَسْتَغْفِرُ اللهَ الْعَظِيْم

Astaghfirullahal ‘adzim

Meaning: “I beg forgiveness from Allah the Most Great.”

Istighfar is one way to ask forgiveness from Allah SWT. Because, as human beings, of course we are not free from mistakes and sins.

Allah SWT always opens the door of forgiveness to anyone. Therefore, asking for forgiveness (istighfar) is highly recommended especially on the night of Nisfu Sha’ban.

3. Read the Creed and Sholawat as much as possible

Amen

“Asyhadu an laa ilaaha illallaahu, wa asyhadu anna muhammadar Rasulullah”

Meaning: “I testify that there is no god but Allah. And I bear witness that the Prophet Muhammad is the messenger of Allah.”

These two sentences are very good to read anytime and anywhere, especially on the night of Nisfu Sya’ban. The two sentences of the shahada are noble sentences and are very well read anytime and anywhere, especially on the night of Nisfu Sha’ban.

Here are some collections of the prophet’s prayers that Muslims can chant, namely:

a. Sholawat Khawwash

صلى الله علی محمد

Shallallaahu ‘alaa Muhammadin

Meaning: “May Allah bestow His mercy on the Prophet Muhammad.”

b. Sholawat Ta’zhimul Qiyam

O Allah

Allaahumma shalli ‘alaa Muhammadin wa ‘alaa aalihi wa sallim

Meaning: “O Allah, bestow peace and safety on the Prophet Muhammad and his family.”

c. Sholawat Bani Hasyim

???

Allaahumma shalli ‘alaan-nabiyul Haasyimiyyi Muhammadin wa ‘alaa aalihi wa sallim tasliman.

Meaning: “O Allah, give mercy and greetings to a prophet of the Hasyim nobles, namely Muhammad and his family, may you remain safe and prosperous.”

d. Sholawat Adrikiyyah / Mukhotob

اَللّٰهُمَّ صَلِّ وَسَلِّمْ عَلَى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّave

Ash-shalaatu wassalaamu ‘alaika yaa Sayyidii yaa Rasulullah qad dhaaqats hiilatii adriknii

Meaning: “Grace and safety may remain upon you, O our prince, O Messenger of Allah, my efforts are exhausted, I hope you are willing to help me.”

e. Sholawat Al-Fatih

اللَّهُمَّ صَلِّ وَسَلِّمْ وَبَارِكْ عَلَى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ الفَاتِحِ لِمَا أُغْلِقَ وَالخَاتِمِ لِمَا سَبَقَ وَالنَّاصِرِ الحَقَّ بِالحَقِّ وَالهَادِي اِلَى صِرَاطٍ مُسْتَقِيْمٍ. Peace be upon you

Allaahumma shalli wa sallim wa baarik ‘alaa sayyidinaa Muhammadinil faatihi limaa ughliqa, wal khotimi lima sabaqo wan naashirul haqqa bilhaqqi, wal haadii ilaa shiraathikal mustaqiim, shallallahu ‘alaihi wa ‘alaa aalihi wa ash haabihi haqqa qadrihi wa miqdaarihil ‘adziimi

Meaning: “O Allah, pour out reverential mercy, peace and blessings on our master, the Prophet Muhammad, as the opener of something that was locked (closed) and the closing of something (the messengers) before. He is the helper of truth with truth and a guide to Your straight path. May Allah bestow (give) blessings on the Prophet Muhammad, his family, and his companions with the power and rules of Allah, the Most Great.”

f. Sholawat Munjiyat

اَللّٰهُمَّ صَلِّ عَلٰى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ صَلاَةٌ تُنْجِيْنَا بِهَا مِنْ جَمِيْعِ الْاَهْوَالِ وَالْاٰفَاتِ وَتَقْضِيْ لَنَابِهَاجَمِيعَ الْحَاجَاتِ وَتُطَهِّرُنَابِهَا مِنْ جَمِيْعِ السَيِّئَاتِ وَتَرْفَعُنَابِهَا عِنْدَكَ اَعْلَى الدَّرَجَاتِ وَتُبَلِّغُنَابِهَا اَقْصَى الْغَايَاتِ مِنْ جَمِيْعِ الْخَيْرَاتِ فِى الْحَيَاةِ وَبَعْدَ الْمَمَاتِ

Allahumma sholli ‘alaa sayyidinaa Muhammadin sholaatan tunjiinaa bihaa min jami’il-ahwaali wal-aafaati wa taqdhii lanaa bihaa jamiil-hajati wa tuthahirunaa bihaa min jami’il-sayyi’aati wa tarfa’unaa bihaa ‘indaka a’lad-darajaati wa tuballighuna bihaa aqshal-gaayaati min jami’il-khoiroti fil-hayati wa ba’dal-mamati

Meaning: “O Allah, bestow mercy on our master the Prophet Muhammad SAW through which You will save us from all frightening and dangerous situations, with that grace You will bring all our needs and cleanse all our badness, elevate us to the highest degree, convey we are at the peak of the goal, of all the good in life and after death.”

g. Sholawat Nariyah

اللَّهُمَّ صَلِّ صَلاَةً كَامِلَةً وَسَلِّمْ سَلاَمًا تَامًّا عَلىَ سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ الَّذِيْ تُنْحَلُ بِهَ الْعُقَدُ وَتَنْفَرِجُ بِهِ الْكُرَبُ وَتُقْضَى بِهِ الْحَوَائِجُ

وَتُنَالُ بِهِ الرَّغَائِبُ وَحُسْنُ الْخَوَاتِيْمِ وَيُسْتَسْقَى الْغَمَامُ بِوَجْهِهِ الْكَرِيْمِ وَعَلىَ آلِهِ وَصَحْبِهِ عَدَدَ كُلِّ مَعْلُوْمٍ لَكَ

Alloohumma sholi sholaatan kaamilatan wasallim salaaman taamman ‘alaa sayyidina muhammadinil ladzii tanhallu bihil ‘uqodu wa tanfariju bihil kurobu wa tuqdhoo bihil hawa-iju

Wa tunalu bihir-roghoib wa husnul khowatimi wayustasqol ghomaamu bi wajhihil kariimi wa ‘alaa aalihii wa shohbihi fii kulli lamhatin wa breathaly bi ‘adadi kulli let me know

Meaning: “O Allah, bestow mercy and perfect greetings on our lord the Prophet Muhammad SAW. May all kinds of thorns be released from all difficulties, fulfill all kinds of needs, and achieve all kinds of wishes and husnul khotimah. Poured rain (grace) with his personal noble blessing. May the blessings and perfect greetings also continue to pour out on his family and friends, every blink of an eye and every breath you take, as many as you know.”

h. Sholawat Tibil Qulub

صَلِّ عَلَى سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ طِبِّ الْقُلُوْبِ وَدَوَائِهَا وَعَافِيَةِ الأَبْدَانِ وَشِفَائِهَا وَنُوْرِ الأَبْصَارِ وَضِيَائِهَا وَعَلٰى آَلِهِ وَصَحْبِهِ وَبَارِكْ وَسَلِّمْ

Allâhumma shalli ‘alâ Sayyidinâ Muhammadin thibbil qulûbi wa dawâ-ihâ wa ‘âfiyatil abdâni wa syifâ-ihâ wa nûril abshâri wa dliyâ-ihaa wa ‘alâ âlihî wa shahbihî wa sallim

Meaning: ” O Allah, give mercy to our king, the Prophet Muhammad, the healer of the heart and medicine, give health to the body and treat it, be the light of the eyes of the heart and its light, also to his family and friends, and may You provide safety.”

Thus the discussion about Nisfu Sha’ban and also the prayer of Nisfu Sha’ban. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you. If you want to find a book about fasting or prayer, you can get it at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Ngaben Ceremony – Sinaumed’s have you ever heard of the term cremation? This term refers to burning someone who has died to ashes. The ashes of people who have died are usually thrown into the sea. In addition, there is also the possibility that the ashes were placed in a small urn and kept by those closest to them.

This cremation process can be said to be quite common in various countries, be it in Asia, Europe, Africa, to America. There are various reasons behind someone being cremated, ranging from religious reasons, reasons for ease of process, to even aesthetic reasons.

Even so, cremation is not something that is commonly found in Indonesian society. The majority of people in Indonesia prefer to bury their dead in the ground compared to burning the corpse to ashes.

Even so, there is one location that is famous for cremation, to the extent that they hold a separate ceremony to carry out the process. This location is the island of Bali, and the ceremony they perform is called the Ngaben Ceremony.

Get to know the Ngaben Ceremony

The Ngaben ceremony may already be a familiar term for Sinaumed’s. Many people who do not come from Bali Island but know about the existence of the Ngaben Ceremony because it is quite unique and not commonly found in various regions in Indonesia. This topic is also included in Social Sciences (IPS) subject matter at school.

Even so, many people still think that the Ngaben Ceremony is a process of cremating the dead which is carried out on a large scale. However, the reality is far from such thoughts. The Ngaben ceremony is more than just burning a corpse.

Basically, the Ngaben Ceremony is a ritual that is believed by the people of the Island of the Gods to return the spirits of people who have died back to their natural state more quickly than ordinary burial through the ground.

Based on etymology, the word ” Ngaben ” itself is said to have come from the word ” Ngabu ” which can be interpreted as “turning to ashes”. This is of course in accordance with the basic principles of the Ngaben Ceremony, where a person’s corpse will be burned until nothing remains from his body and will turn to ashes.

The people of the island of Bali, where the majority are Hindus, believe that there are 5 components to make up the human body. These 5 components are also known as the “Panca Maha Bhuta” or in modern terms they are better known as the “classical elements”.

The five components of Panca Maha Bhuta are mother or solid, apah or liquid, tea or hot matter, wind or wind, and akasa or empty space. If these five components become one, they will form the human body which will later be filled by a spirit or referred to as ” Atma ” in Hindu belief.

When someone dies, the Atma that one has will still be stored in one’s body. This Ngaben ceremony is held by the community with the aim of freeing the Atma who cannot leave their bodies, so they can return to the Almighty.

After that, Atma, who has returned to the Almighty, is believed by Hindus to be reincarnated someday. Not a few family members or relatives of people who have died hope that they can meet this figure again in the next life.

Hinduism really teaches many things related to life and spiritualism for its adherents. There is nothing wrong if people with different religious backgrounds want to learn about the beliefs of Hinduism, because this religion does teach a lot of good things. The book “ From Javanese Shivaism to Balinese Hinduism ” can be reading material for Sinaumed’s who are interested in this topic.

 

 

Types of Ngaben Ceremonies

And it should also be noted that the Ngaben Ceremony itself has several different types. This difference is based on several things, starting from the age of the person who died or the situation of the person who has died. These differences will later affect the procedures for the Ngaben Ceremony.

At least, there are 5 types of Ngaben Ceremonies that Sinaumed’s can learn. In this short session, we will discuss what are the 5 Ngaben ceremonies that are usually performed by the people of the Island of the Gods, and when they will carry out this type of ceremony.

Ngaben Sawa Wedana

The first term Ngaben Ceremony may be the most common term compared to other terms. This is because Ngaben Sawa Wedana is a type of Ngaben Ceremony where someone who will be cremated will still have a physical body. Until the Ngaben Ceremony begins, the body will be endeavored so that it does not decompose.

Ngaben Asti Wedana

Unlike the previous Ngaben Sawa Wedana, Ngaben Asti Wedana is a type of Ngaben Ceremony which is carried out after the body is buried. Usually, the bodies that will be cremated are only the bones that remain after being excavated from the grave where he is.

Private

Private means the Ngaben Ceremony which is carried out without any bodies to be cremated. This is not uncommon, bearing in mind that there have been a number of incidents where bodies could disappear or not be found, such as a plane crash or a terrorist incident. This corpse will later be replaced in the form of a painting or photo of the corpse with sandalwood replica of the corpse.

gawking

Ngelungah is the first type of Ngaben ceremony based on a person’s age category. In Ngelungah, the Ngaben Ceremony is held for children who have not lost their teeth or changed their baby teeth. With this, it can be concluded that the bodies of children to be cremated are usually around the age of 5-6 years.

Warak Kruron

The last type of Ngaben Ceremony that we will discuss is Warak Kruron. If Ngelungah above will cremate children aged around 5-6 years, Warak Kruron will cremate children aged 3-12 months, or fall into the baby category.

 

 

Ngaben Ceremony Procedures

Sinaumed’s needs to know that the Ngaben Ceremony takes a lot of preparation and takes quite a long time. People who want to perform the Ngaben Ceremony for their closest people must prepare various things for this ritual.

In addition, the cost of the Ngaben ceremony cannot be said to be cheap, so only certain groups of people can carry out this ritual. However, of course there are many Hindus in Bali who want to try to carry out the Ngaben Ceremony regardless of the cost.

So that Sinaumed’s can find out the reasons behind the length of the Ngaben Ceremony, we will study together the procedures for the Ngaben Ceremony. At least, there are 10 steps or procedures that Sinaumed’s needs to know about the Ngaben Ceremony.

The 10 series of the Ngaben Ceremony are Ngulapin, Nyiramin or Ngemandusin, Ngajum Kajang, Ngaskara, Mameras, Papegatan, Pakiriman Ngutang, Ngeseng, Nganyud, and finally Mangelud or Mangoras. A more detailed explanation will be presented below as follows.

do it

Ngulapin is the first step in the procedure for the Ngaben Ceremony, in which someone summons the Atma or the spirit of the corpse that has died. Ngulapin can be done in various locations according to needs, and has different procedures according to family traditions and beliefs.

Watering or Manduring

Next, the body will be washed accompanied by various symbols such as jasmine flowers in the nostrils, broken glass above the eyebrows and so on. This process is called nyiramin or ngemandusin and aims to reincarnate from a corpse that is born in good physical condition without any defects.

Ngajum Kajang

In this procedure, there will be a white paper, or also known as “kajang”, which will be written in Hindu script. The family and relatives of the person who died will later press this paper or kajang 3 times, indicating that they are ready to let the body go.

Ngaskara

Ngaskara means “purification of the spirit”. That is, the spirit of the person who has died will be purified according to the beliefs of each organizer of the Ngaben Ceremony. Ngaskara is done so that later the spirit or Atma can return to the Almighty and one day be reunited with his family and relatives.

Mameras

The mameras procedure will only be carried out if the deceased person already has grandchildren. Mameras itself comes from the word “peras” which in belief there can be interpreted as “success”, “successful”, or “finished”. The grandson of the deceased is expected to lead this person to the right path.

Papegatan

Papegatan has the root word pegat, which means “to break up”. In the papegatan procedure, it is a sign that family and relatives have accepted the departure of the deceased. Papegatan is usually accompanied by offerings as a catalyst, and aims so that family and relatives do not prevent the spirit from returning to the Almighty because of their lack of sincerity in releasing the body.

Accounts Payable

After Papegatan, the next process is named Pakiman Ngutang, namely sending the body to the grave. This procedure will be carried out quite lively, where the corpse will be carried in a coffin and accompanied by Balinese gamelan music. The coffin will also be rotated 3 times in a number of locations as a farewell symbol.

It sucks

After all of the above procedures have been carried out, it is time for family members and relatives to do ngeseng, which is to burn the bodies of those who have died. Ngeseng himself is led by a religious leader or priest, and later the ashes and bones left over from this person are collected, crushed, and put into coconuts.

sleep

Nganyud is the term used in which family members and relatives of the deceased will wash the ashes of the deceased into the sea or river. Nganyud is done with the aim that the dirt or impurity of the corpse can be “washed away” or lost from this world, and go to another realm.

Mangelud or Mangoras

Usually, 12 days after a person’s death, a procedure called mangelud or mangoras will be carried out, in which the family will purify and clean their home environment which may still be filled with sadness and grief after the death of a family member.

Other Bali Island Traditional Ceremonies

It cannot be denied that the Ngaben Ceremony is the most famous traditional ceremony on the Island of the Gods. As previously discussed, the uniqueness of the Ngaben Ceremony attracts the attention of many people so they want to learn more about this traditional ceremony.

Even so, the island of Bali is not an island that is limited to only having one traditional ceremony. Apart from the Ngaben Ceremony, there are many other types of traditional ceremonies that the people of Bali do when they encounter a special event.

As a closing session, we will discuss several other traditional ceremonies that Sinaumed’s can find on the island of Bali. The meaning of this traditional ceremony will be explained and when this traditional ceremony will be carried out. Check out the following discussion.

Galungan day

Even though it is named as a feast instead of a ceremony, Galungan Day can be categorized as one of the traditional ceremonies which is usually carried out every 210 days or around 6-7 months, to celebrate the victory of “Dharma” or “truth” against ” Adharma ” or “evil.” ”.

There are several procedures that are carried out by the people of the island of Bali when they are celebrating Galungan Day, starting from spreading offerings, cleaning themselves, to doing silence or doing nothing. The climax is when the people of Bali Island return to their hometowns to pray there.

The meaning of Galungan Day is to unite spiritual strength so that one can obtain a clear mind and conviction. With a spiritual union and a clear mind is a form of dharma within.

Saraswati Day

Apart from Galungan Day above, the people of the Island of the Gods also celebrate another holiday called Hari Raya Saraswati, where they celebrate the day of the descent of knowledge by Dewi Saraswati, who is the Goddess of Science and Arts.

Saraswati Day is also celebrated every 6-7 months like Galungan Day. There are several traditional rituals and ceremonies that are carried out as a symbol of gratitude for the transmission of science and art into human life. There are also procedures that must be followed by local people so as not to get sanctions or karma.

The meaning of Hari Raya Saraswati is to give thanks to God Almighty by focusing on the aspects of Dewi Saraswati for the gift of knowledge that has been given to us all. That way, they will be free from ignorance and so that they will be given guidance towards eternal peace and also perfect enlightenment.

Melati Ceremony

Sinaumed’s must have known about Nyepi Day. However, before this Nyepi Day takes place, there is a ceremony that aims to welcome this annual holiday. And the name of this ceremony is the Melasti Ceremony.

The Melasti ceremony is usually performed on the beach, and aims to purify oneself before Nyepi Day arrives. Hindus on the island of Bali usually pray, clean the temples around there, and purify the village or place where they live using water, which is a symbol of cleansing and purity.

After reading this far, Sinaumed’s might have been able to conclude that Bali Island is an island that is rich in history, customs and culture. Apart from the traditional ceremonies above, there are many other traditional ceremonies and other forms of culture on the Island of the Gods.

It’s only natural if you find lots of tourists, both foreign tourists and local tourists visiting the island of Bali. Apart from having a vacation and enjoying the natural surroundings, they also want to learn about the customs and culture of this island. Sinaumed’s can also learn about this topic without having to visit Bali in person by reading the book “Invulnerability: Dialogical Construction of Balinese Identity”.

Syaja’ah is – As Muslims, of course we know that Islam teaches its people about various kinds of good character or character or warnings about bad character. Among them is by emulating and studying the qualities taught by Rasulullah SAW, one of which is the syaja’ah attitude.

Then, what exactly is this characteristic of syaja’ah and what are the benefits for Muslims who practice this characteristic in their daily lives?

So, syaja’ah is a noble character that teaches every Muslim to dare to act based on truth. Every Muslim should have a noble character called syaja’ah. What’s more, this one trait is related to honesty.

Syaja’ah is the ability to subdue the soul so that it is always strong, steadfast, and continues to move forward even when faced with enemies, life’s problems, or calamities. That way, people who have syaja’ah souls will always use their common sense in controlling their desires so they don’t act as they please.

Islam itself commands its followers not to be cowards or cowards. This is because these two things can lead to failure and also defeat.

Then, one of the characteristics taught by Islam is brave or syaja’ah. This syaja’ah word also has several other meanings, such as strength, courage, gallantry, perseverance, strength of heart, patience, calm, and also self-control. Meanwhile, in terms of terminology, the word syaja’ah means determination and also the courage to keep moving forward to face various problems in life, from enemies to calamities.

Syaja’ah Is

According to a book entitled Islamic Religious Education and Class XI Characteristics , it explains that syaja’ah also has the meaning of being brave in defending the truth and daring to act while on the right path.

So, we can conclude that this courage must be based on truth according to Islamic law and not take sides with wrong things. The opposite of syaja’ah is al jubn which means coward.

People who have this cowardly nature usually do not have a strong commitment to put forward the truth. Their attitude is very dependent on their desires. A coward himself will soften and betray the truth if practicing the truth will lead him to harm himself. For example, they are afraid of human reproach, they are afraid of losing the world’s treasures, and they are also afraid of facing the risks of a struggle.

Therefore, this cowardly attitude was actually closer to defeat. People who have a cowardly attitude tend to be more prone to humiliation and failure. He will feel more afraid of humans than afraid of Allah SWT.

Instead, syaja’ah here can be a way to achieve victory in faith. A Muslim should not be afraid of carrying out religious duties if he wants to achieve glory. Our hearts must be guided by faith, so that there will be no fear within.

Allah SWT has ordered his servant to dare to do something because of the truth. Allah SWT says in the Quran, which means:

“Don’t be weak, and don’t (also) be sad, even though you are the people of the highest (degree), if you are believers.” (QS Ali Imran / 3: 139)

Types of Syaja’ah

The nature of syaja’ah itself is divided into two types, namely syaja’ah harbiyah and syaja’ah nafsiyah. The following is a full explanation:

1. Syaja’ah Harbiyah

Syaja’ah harbiyah is the courage to fight evil that is visible or invisible to the eye or courage to fight in the way of Allah SWT. For example, courage in facing enemies in war to uphold Allah’s Religion. This courage has been explained in the Al-Quran, in Surah Al-Anfal verses 15-16 to be precise. Allah SWT says, which means:

“O you who believe! If you meet unbelievers who will attack you, then do not turn your back to them (backward). And whoever retreats at that time, unless he turns to (tactics) war or wants to join himself with other troops, then indeed, that person returns with the wrath of Allah, and his place is Hell Hell, the worst place to return to.”

2. Syaja’ah Nafsiyah

Meanwhile, syaja’ah nafsiyah is courage in upholding the truth and also facing danger or suffering. For example, the courage to say the right things, control the passions of anger, and admit mistakes. Islam really dislikes people who are cowardly, weak, and also cowardly. People who are weak or cowardly generally do not dare to defend their lives, so they are very easy to despair.

These fears include fear of being ostracized in their environment, fear of having different attitudes from many people, and fear of defending truth and justice.

Syaja’ah is courage based on truth, carried out with full consideration and calculation to hope for the pleasure of Allah SWT. Courage or syaja’ah is the way to achieve a victory in faith.

There should be no fear and fear for Muslims when carrying out their duties if they want to achieve victory. The spirit of faith that is within will always guide you so that you are not afraid and afraid in the slightest.

Example of Syaja’ah

Of the two types of syaja’ah characteristics that have been described above, syaja’ah can be implemented into several forms of syaja’ah examples, including:

1. Quwwatul Ihtimal

Quwwatul ihtimal is great endurance. Where someone is proven to have syaja’ah properties when they are able to be patient and ready to face suffering, difficulties, dangers, or anything else when fighting in the way of Allah SWT. The story of the struggle of the prophets and also their companions in Makkah illustrates this.

Notice how they persist even in a stressful situation. Until some of them had to die martyrs, like for example Tasi and Sumayyah, some others experienced torture, for example Bilal and Amr bin Yasir, and some of them had to be willing to emigrate from their homeland to Habasyah or Ethiopia in order to maintain their faith and develop da’wah.

2. Ash-Sarahah Fil Haq

As-Sarahah Fil Haq is a frank attitude in truth. Where someone who has this trait is braver to be frank in the truth becomes one of the other implementations of syaja’ah or brave nature.

Rasulullah SAW said: “Tell the truth, even if it is bitter” (HR. Imam Baihaqi). Candor in conveying the truth is an indication of courage. Even speaking the truth in front of unjust rulers was called by Rasulullah Shallallahu Alaihi Wa Sallam as the most afdhal (main) jihad, and those who were killed because of it were called martyrs.

“The leader of the martyrs was Hamzah bin Abdul Muttalib and the person who stood before the unjust ruler and he ordered him (to do good) and forbade him (to do evil), then the leader killed him.” (Narrated by Imam Al Hakim).

3. Kitmanu As-Sirri

Kitmanu As-Sirri means holding secrets. In holding a secret, it certainly requires courage in us. What’s more, the information we hold is indicated to be dangerous if there is a leak. By keeping secrets, someone also maintains the trust that has been given by others.

Keeping secrets, especially in the context of struggle and preaching is something that is hard and carries a high risk. The disclosure of a secret can be very fatal. Therefore, readiness to hold secrets is an indication of shaja’ah for a Muslim.

Among the Prophet’s own companions who are believed to hold secrets are not many. Among them is Hudzaifah Ibnul Yaman RA, namely a friend of the Prophet known as Shahibus Sirri or secret holder.

4. Al-I’tirafu Bil Khatha’i

Al-I’tirafu Bil Khatha’i means admitting mistakes. People who are ready and willing to admit their mistakes are one of the characteristics of people who have syaja’ah or courageous traits. As we know that admitting mistakes is not easy.

Sometimes, we are afraid of being ostracized, afraid of being hated by others, or worried about what other people will think because of the mistakes we have made. In fact, admitting one’s own mistakes is very profitable. Because they can see mistakes in themselves and immediately fix them.

5. Al-Inshafu Min Adz-Dzati

Al-Inshafu Min Adz-Dzati means being objective to yourself. People who have syaja’ah traits will judge themselves objectively and also believe that they have strengths and weaknesses.

6. Milku An-Nafsi Inda Al-Ghadhabi

Milku An-Nafsi Inda Al-Ghadhabi means self control when angry. One of the characteristics of people who have syaja’ah traits is having toughness in fighting lust and also anger. Even in an emotional state, they will still be able to think clearly.

Application of Syaja’ah in Islam

The application of syaja’ah in Islam has various forms. Syaja’ah here can be practiced in accordance with the profession played by every Muslim. The following are some examples of the application of syaja’ah in everyday life, including:

• Have great endurance in the face of difficulties, danger, suffering, to torture, as long as they are in the way of Allah SWT.
• Be honest and consistent in conveying the truth.
• Holding a secret that has been informed, especially in kindness.
• Don’t be ashamed to admit your own mistakes.
• Be objective with yourself.
• Can control yourself when angry.

Relation Syaja’ah with Honesty

Syaja’ah turns out to be related to honesty or honesty. People who dare to carry out noble duties always act on the basis of honesty. At least, there are three reasons for the relationship between syaja’ah and honesty, including:

1. People who have syaja’ah souls will be more consistent in voicing the truth. His words and actions are not accompanied by elements of lies. In fact, he dared to speak the truth, even if it was done in front of the authorities and a coward would not dare to act like that.
2. People who have syaja’ah souls will dare to admit their mistakes. They will not deny the fact that they have done many wrong things. In addition, they also reconcile by apologizing and trying hard not to repeat their mistakes.
3. People who have syaja’ah souls are always happy to do good. It is human nature to like honesty and hate lies.

Forms of Courage

Courage can not only be shown in war, but also in various aspects of life. As mentioned in the Al-Quran and Sunnah, namely:

1. Courage of Jihad in the Way of Allah SWT

As Muslims, we must have the courage to go forward to fight in defense of the truth until we win or die as martyrs. This has been stated in Surah Al-Anfal verses 1 15 to 16, which means:

“O you who believe, when you meet disbelievers who are attacking you, then do not turn your back on them. Whoever turns his back on them at that time (retreats), unless he turns to (tactic) war or wants to join forces with other troops, then indeed that person will return with the wrath of Allah, and his place is the Hell of Jahannam. And so bad their back place”.

The Prophet also gave an example of this in the Battle of Badr, namely with an army of 300 people who dared to face an opponent with three times the number of cockroaches, which is about 1000 people and it turns out that the Prophet and his companions managed to achieve victory.

2. Courage in Stating the Truth

In this regard, the Prophet Muhammad SAW once said:

“The most afdal jihad is fighting for justice before an unjust ruler.” (Narrated by Abu Dawud and Tirmidhi)

3. Courage to Control Yourself from Emotions

This one has been explained in the discussion above.

Source of Courage

The following are several factors that cause a person to have courage, including:

1. Fear of Allah SWT

As long as someone is still convinced that what he is doing is based on the commands of Allah SWT, then that person has an attitude of not being afraid of anyone, except Allah SWT. If something makes him feel afraid, then he must believe that Allah SWT is the best helper and protector.

“Sufficient is Allah who is our Helper, and Allah is the best Protector”. (QS. Ali-Imran: 173)

2. Loves the Hereafter More Than the World and Everything in It

We need to understand that this world is not the final destination, but only as a bridge to the hereafter. A Muslim will not hesitate to leave the world, as long as he gets true happiness in the hereafter.

3. Not Afraid of Death

When death comes, no one can prevent or run away from it. Death is a certainty and everyone who lives will surely die. A Muslim will not be afraid of death, let alone martyrdom.

“Wherever you are, death will find you, even if you are in a strong and high fortress …”. (QS. An-Nisa: 78)

4. No Doubt

One that causes fear in oneself is a feeling of doubt. If someone has doubts about the rightness of what they are doing, surely they will be at risk. However, if they are full of faith, courage will emerge. Rasulullah SAW himself once taught.

“Leave what doubts you, towards what does not doubt you.” (HR. Tirmidhi and Nasa’i)

5. Not Prioritizing Material Strength

Material strength is indeed needed in the struggle, but material is not everything, Allah is the one who determines everything. So, never put material strength first.

6. Trust and believe in the help of Allah SWT

People who fight for the truth will never feel afraid, because after trying hard, they will put their trust and ask Allah SWT for help.

This is an explanation of what syaja’ah is and some examples of its application in everyday life. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about other Islamic religious knowledge, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Umm

source:

• https://www.risahislam.com/2022/10/pengertian-syajaah-tipe-example.html
• https://tirto.id/mengenal-kind-kind-syajaah-dan-keterkainya-dengan-kejuangan-gws6
• https://www.muslimterkini.com/dinding/pr-902050102/materi-syajaah-class-11-pengertian-exemplary-until-makalah-complete

Yaumul Milad – Every human being born in this world must have a birthday. Therefore, there are many people who will give greetings to others when the birthday arrives or you can also get birthday greetings from friends, relatives or family.

In Islam, happy birthday is also known as Yaumul Milad. Then, what is meant by Yaumul Milad? On this occasion, we will learn together about the meaning of Yaumul Milad and also examples of saying Yaumul Milad. For more details, see this article till the end, Sinaumed’s.

Meaning of Milad and How to Use it

The word Yaumul Milad consists of two words, namely yaumul and milad. The term yaumul comes from the word yaum which means ‘day’.

The word or term milad may already be familiar to the general public, especially those who are Muslim. This is because the word milad often appears on various social media to daily conversations or even at certain moments. Even though it is a fairly popular word, the fact is that there are still many people who do not know what milad actually means.

Then, if the two words are combined, it can be interpreted that yaumul milad is the day of birth. This one phrase is usually used to give greetings to those who are having a birthday.

Yaumul Milad greeting is only used when very happy, getting older, and on the day of his birth into the world in good health and safety. The greeting yaumul milad is very popular and is widely used by Muslims in Indonesia when someone has a birthday.

The word milad actually comes from Arabic. But apparently, this word has been absorbed into Indonesian, so we can find the meaning of milad today in the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI. According to KBBI online , the meaning of milad is the time of birth or day of birth. Therefore, it is not surprising that the word milad often appears in birthday greetings among Muslims.

Sometimes as a congratulation, the word milad is often preceded by another word such as yaumul, so that it becomes yaumul milad. Thus, the meaning of the word milad in the expression yaumul milad can be said to be “happy birthday”. So, the meaning of yaumul milad is the same as saying ‘happy birthday’ or ‘ happy birthday ‘.

Apart from being preceded by the word yaumul, the word milad as a congratulation is also often accompanied by the expression barakallah , barakallah fii umrik , and so on. Therefore, in congratulation, the meaning of milad or yaumul milad is not only a day of birth, but a congratulation that is full of meaning and prayer.

How to Answer Happy Birthday Greetings

As explained above, the meaning of milad can mean happy birthday. It is appropriate to receive congratulations and prayers in general, when we receive Yaumul Milad or Happy Birthday greetings, we should respond to these greetings. This is because in Islam, repaying kindness with kindness is a must.

The meaning of milad in yaumul milad is often accompanied by good prayers, so we can respond to these words with good prayers too. One of the expressions or sayings that can be used to answer yaumul milad is Jazakallahu khairan which means, is “May Allah reward you with your kindness”.

Ruling on Saying Yaumul Milad or Happy Birthday

How is the law saying Yaumul Milad? The law of saying happy birthday in Islam is permissible or permissible. Saying happy birthday is permissible in Islam but there is no reward or sin.

Giving happy milad or happy birthday in Islam is permissible or permissible. Mubah is an act that tends to be recommended, but there is no guarantee of reward.

The law was taken based on the book Al-Iqna’ fi Halli Alfazhi Abi Syuja, by Asy-Syarbini (page 162). It contained an explanation that Hafidz Al-Mundziri had given an answer regarding congratulations on Eid and a happy birthday.

“He said, so far the scholars have differed on this matter, but in his opinion, tahniah (congratulations) is permissible, aka not sunnah and not bid’ah either.” (Kitab Al-Iqna’ fi Halli Alfazhi Abi Syuja, p. 162)

He also quoted from one of the hadiths of Rasulullah SAW which was narrated by Imam Bukhari. The hadith tells about one of his friends, namely Ka’ab bin Malik who was given a punishment for his mistakes in not participating in the tabuk war.

And after the sentence was over, one of his friends, Abu Talhah bin Ubaidillah, congratulated Ka’ab bin Malik on receiving his repentance. So, in wishing you a happy birthday or celebrating it, as long as there is no evil or things that are prohibited in Islam. Then the law is mubah or permissible.

The meaning of the law of mubah itself is, “something that if done is okay (will not get reward or sin), and if left is also okay (will not get reward or sin).”

Likewise with saying yaumul milad. Some opinions say that saying yaumul milad is mubah (permissible).

With the condition that there is no element of harm or badness in it, whether it’s in the pronunciation or the intention in saying it.

If you don’t do it, there is no reward or sin. Mubah law is often applied to mundane cases. All human actions basically depend on his intentions. It is the intention that will determine the value of the action. As long as it does not conflict with Islamic law, all matters are appropriate, including wishing a happy birthday.

Laws of Celebrating Birthdays

How is it legal to celebrate birthdays? In Islam itself there is actually no specific law in doing this, even in celebrating birthdays some opinions say that the law is permissible. As long as it is not mixed with things that are prohibited in Islam.

In celebrating a birthday, it would be nice to celebrate it with family or closest relatives. This is because nowadays, most people celebrating birthdays are always filled with something that is prohibited in Islam.

For example, filled with drinking, mixing of the opposite sex, displaying bad statues or pictures as decorations, playing music, and other bad things. So, it can be said that celebrating birthdays is filled with bad things, so the law becomes unlawful.

However, in celebrating a birthday, it would be nice if it was filled with good things. For example, increasing sunnah prayers, increasing dhikr readings, or carrying out sunnah fasts as was done by Rasulullah SAW.

As explained in a hadith as follows:

From Abu Qatadah Al Ansari radhiyallahu anhu. Rasulullah shallallahu alaihi wa sallam was once asked about fasting on Mondays, then he replied:

ذَاكَ يَوْمٌ وُلِدْتُ فِيهِ وَيَوْمٌ بُعِثْتُ أَوْ أُنْزِلَ عَلَىَّ فِيهِ

Meaning: “That day is the day I was born, the day I was sent or the revelation was sent down for me.” (HR. Muslim no. 1162)

Reading sentences or sayings of yaumul milad to someone, are usually always accompanied by other prayers. For example, like, yaumul milad , barakallahu fii umrik or which means “happy birthday, may Allah always bless you over your age.”

Quoted in a book entitled “Imitating the Prophet in a Day” by Sheikh Abdullah Ju’aitsan. He wrote in the book that prayer is one type of kindness. Including giving prayers or praying for goodness to our own brothers and sisters.

According to him, by praying for good for our own brothers, it means we have done good for ourselves. This is because the prayers we offer to others are one of the reasons our prayers are answered.

Examples of Milad Greetings in Arabic

Currently, giving birthday greetings or milad in Arabic has become quite commonplace. Not only beautiful, birthday greetings in Arabic with the meaning of milad also often feel more meaningful. This is because the congratulations feel united with identical sentences of prayer and thanksgiving delivered in Arabic.

However, sometimes there are some Muslims who don’t know how to give birthday wishes in Arabic. The following are some references to birthday greetings in Arabic with the meaning of milad.

1. “Eid milad sa’eid.” (Happy birthday!)
2. “Eid milad sa’eid lak!” (Happy birthday to you!)
3. “Istamti’ bi heidi miladik!” (Enjoy your birthday.)
4. “Drunk alpha crashed, Yaum Miladik crashed!” (Bless a thousand blessings, your birthday is a blessing!)
5. “Miladuk(ka) saidah, barakallah fii umrik.” (Hopefully in the rest of your life you will always be blessed in this world and in the hereafter.)
6. “Yaumul milad, barakallah fii umrik.” (Happy birthday, may Allah bestow blessings on increasing your age.)

Those are some birthday wishes in Arabic. After knowing it, are you going to wish your friend a happy birthday in Arabic?

Examples of Birthday Greetings in Indonesian

Apart from saying in Arabic, the meaning of milad is also quite often found in Indonesian birthday greetings. Combining Arabic words in Indonesian birthday greetings gives a unique and interesting impression.

Those of you who don’t have references for birthday wishes in Arabic and Indonesian don’t need to worry. The following are some references to Indonesian birthday greetings with the word milad.

1. “Barakallahu fii umrik, hopefully at your age you will be blessed by Allah SWT. Milad Mubarak.”
2. “Miladuki sa’idy. May Allah always bestow blessings on the rest of the age that He has given, hopefully you can become someone that heaven misses. Amen.”
3. “Milad mubarak, Barakallah fii umrik, I hope you are always healthy and given abundant sustenance.”
4. “Milad mubarak, barakallah fii umrik. On this special day of yours, I hope you are always healthy and given abundant sustenance.”
5. “Miladuki sa’idy my friend. May Allah always bestow blessings on the rest of the life He gives. Amen.”
6. “Happy birthday, honey. Allah SWT is truly amazing to have sent such an amazing couple like you to us. I pray that this special day is filled with beautiful and happy moments for you.”
7. “Yaumul milad my friend. May you always be in goodness. Happy happy on your birthday. Every year, you are my closest friend, my best friend, and the most precious person.”
8. “Yaumul milad. Hopefully you can become a more pious person and may you always be given abundant sustenance and safety in this world and the hereafter.”
9. “Yaumul milad, the mother of my children. The world is happy with the most precious human, happy birthday. Hopefully you are always protected by Allah in goodness.
10. Eid milad my best friend, you are one year older now, and I can only pray for you. May Allah give you health, abundant sustenance and success, and long life. Amen.
11. Miladuki sa’idy. May Allah always bestow blessings on the rest of the age that He has given. Hopefully it can be the woman that heaven misses. Amen.
12. Met milad, barakallahu fii umrik, may his goals be achieved, always in the grace of Allah.
13. Milad mubarak, Barakallah fii umrik, I hope you are always healthy and given abundant sustenance. Amen.
14. Happy birthday, may you be blessed throughout your life, the more you learn, the more useful it will be for others.
15. Miladuki sa’idy my wife. May Allah always bestow blessings on the rest of the age that He gives, hopefully you can become a woman who is longed for by heaven and become a wife and mother who is always blessed with happiness. Amen.
16. Yaumul milad, barakallahu fii umrik “happy birthday, may Allah always bless you over your age.
17. Happy birthday to you, brother. Hopefully the more your mind is broadened, the cleaner your heart will be, hopefully the body will be more agile in doing good.
18. Milad mubarak! May you always get blessings, fortune continues to flow, and may everything you aspire to be achieved.
19. Happy birthday! May Allah SWT accept all your heartfelt wishes and prayers today. Barakallah fii umrik.
20. Barakallah fii umrik my son, yaumul milad dear. Hopefully the dreams that you have built can be achieved properly. Mama and Papa’s prayers will always accompany every step of your life.
21. Happy birthday, barakallah fii umrik. May Allah always give you happiness and success.
22. Barakallah fii umrik for my dearest woman, hopefully whatever you wish for will come true soon.
23. The repetition of birthdays is a form of gratitude to Allah SWT, hopefully more istiqomah in the way of Allah.
24. Barakallah fii umrik yes. May Allah SWT always provide convenience in all matters of this world and the affairs of the hereafter.
25. Miladuki saidah, barakallahu fii umrik, may the rest of your life be blessed until the world ends.

As previously explained, saying Yaumul Milad is legally permissible. Even so, you still have to say it in moderation or not too much. That way, you can get a good reply from the recipient of the greeting.

In addition, celebrating birthdays cannot be done with sinful acts, such as drinking alcohol, being close to the opposite sex, and so on. That way, the birthday event will be accompanied by good and useful prayers for the life of the birthday.

Thus the discussion about Yaumul Milad and its examples. After knowing the examples of Yaumul Milad’s sayings , to whom will you give these sayings?

Sinaumed’s can get more information about yaumul milad or birthdays by reading books available at sinaumedia.com. As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Also read:

Understanding the Meaning of the Term Infallible in Islam – The prophets and messengers are chosen human beings sent by Allah SWT to improve mankind. They are educators, preachers, mentors, as well as role models of goodness. One of them is the Prophet Muhammad. He is an example of insân kâmil (perfect human), whose every word and deed he always tries to follow and becomes uswah in life.

Muhammad is also the last prophet who brought treatises to all people, whose arrival was as basyîr (herald of good news) and nadzîr (warning). As the recipient of the revelation (of the Qur’an), he was also the first commentator to explain the meaning of the verses of the Qur’an through his sunnah or hadith.

Much literature discusses Muhammad’s noble morals which was born as a result of admiration for him, both in terms of physical and non-physical. Not only from Muslims, there are also non-Muslims who are amazed by his nobility.

For example, Michael Hart placed it first in his book entitled The Hundred Most Influential World Figures in History . This does not mean denying that some people hate him by saying negative things and slandering him. This treatment had occurred since Muhammad was still alive.

The advantages that Allah SWT gave to Muhammad turned out to have a very big reason and purpose. The Al-Qur’an which was revealed to him is a gift as well as a very big and heavy mandate for him to receive. Al-Qur’an is the greatest miracle given to him in addition to other miracles.

The book expressly contains laws of life that cover all aspects of life. The Qur’an was revealed in Arabic, not everyone can understand it well, including the Arabs themselves. This is where Muhammad plays a role. Allah SWT gave him the legitimacy to interpret the verses of the Qur’an under the direct guidance and instructions of Him, which ─ are called hadith or sunnah.

Infallible as One of the Characteristics of the Prophet

Being a prophet means being a preacher. One of the success factors of a preacher is his attitude and behavior. Being a prophet and apostle like Muhammad is indeed required to have noble morals and be protected from mistakes and sins (infallible). This will affect the course of his prophetic mission.

It is impossible for a preacher to want to follow him if he does the opposite of what he calls for, and it is also not appropriate for someone who invites goodness to commit acts of sin and disobedience. Moral nobility is one of the factors that determine the success of one’s da’wah.

Allah SWT mentions many verses that praise Muhammad’s noble morals in the Qur’an. Apart from that, Allah SWT also enshrined several verses that seemed to be inconsistent with being revealed to rebuke some of Muhammad’s attitudes, which are called verses ‘ itâb (reproach).

When responding to this, there are many different opinions from various groups, especially among the Islamic theologians and commentators. This difference may be caused by differences in intellectuality and schools of thought, especially the schools of Islamic sciences, as well as attitudes in positioning the Qur’an and Muhammad.

In the study of Islamic theology, on the one hand, Allah SWT sent Muhammad by including infallible characteristics for him in addition to the characteristics of siddîq , amânah , tablîgh , and fathânah . The infallible nature determines the other four characteristics. Because of his infallibility, Muhammad was able to become a person who was able to act correctly and honestly, could be trusted, was able to convey the message of Allah SWT without revising, adding or subtracting it, and was an intelligent person.

Infallibility is a necessity for a prophet in addition to other characteristics. Muhammad ‘Âlî al-Sâbûnî mentions that the prophets have six characteristics, including infallible. These characteristics are siddîq (true or honest), amânah (trustworthy), tablîgh (delivering treatises), fathânah (intelligent), al-salâmah min al-‘uyub al-munaffirah (free from disgusting defects), and ‘ ismah (free from sin). The first four characteristics show that the prophets and messengers are infallible.

Meaning of Max

Infallible is one of the characteristics possessed by the prophets and messengers of Allah SWT. According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), infallible means divided, separated, divorced and released, while in terms it means free from all sins.

Imam Muhammad Shirazi (2002) defines infallible as meaning free from sin and error. In terms, infallible means holy from committing sins or preserved from committing sins, mistakes, and mistakes.

Sriwahyuni ​​(2017) in her research entitled The Infallibility of the Prophet: A Study of the Verses of ‘Itâb against the Prophet Muhammad Saw describes if infallible in terms of the roots of the words that form it come from the word ashoma or ashama , which also has roots in the word Ish-mah which means “to care for”.

The word infallible in the Qur’an is mentioned 13 times in various forms, but all of them contain one meaning, namely restraint. In short, ma’sûm means a person who is cared for, while ismah is maintenance or protection.

According to the term, ma’sûm means holy from sinning or preserved from committing sins, mistakes, and mistakes. In the Encyclopedia of Islamic Aqidah (2003) it is stated that ‘ ismah in the theological context means God’s protection of His prophets, so that they are ma’sûm , ie spared and protected from sinful acts.

Syeikh Ja’far al-Shubhani (1991) in his book entitled ‘Ishmah: Preservation of the Prophet from Sin states that the word ‘ismah which is true has one root that shows the meaning of ٌ إِمْسَاك: refrain, ٌ مَنْع: prevent, and ٌ مُلاَزَ مَة:: stipulation/don’t leave. All of these contain one meaning, namely ٌ عِصْمَة, which means Allah SWT cares for His servant from the bad things that will happen to him and the servant holds fast to Allah SWT, thus he is prevented and protected.

If based on the above understanding, when it is said ً عَصَمْت ُ فُلاَنا , it means “I take care of so and so”, that is, I provide something for him, he clings to something that is obtained in his hand, he takes refuge and holds on to it.

The word وَٱعْتَصِمُوا۟ بِحَبْلِ ٱللَّهِ in Surah Ali-Imran verse 103 means to hold fast and maintain it with all your might. As for the word فَٱسْتَعْصَمَ in Surah Yusuf verse 32 contains the meaning of preventing and holding back.

If the definitions above are compared to one another, the meaning of infallibility in general is not much different. It’s just that, in essence, there are differences between certain groups in determining who is considered infallible , for example between Sunni and Shi’a.

The concept of infallibility among Sunnis only applies to the prophets and messengers, so what is meant by ‘ismah according to this group is Allah SWT’s maintenance of His prophets and messengers from committing sins and immorality, as well as from evils and things that prohibited. Infallible is essential inherent in the prophets and apostles that distinguishes them from humans in general. ‘

Ismah is a great blessing that is reserved by Allah SWT for the prophets only, so that by doing so they are saved from all kinds of sins and immorality, both big and small, and are saved from violating the commands of Allah SWT, unlike other people.

In this case ‘ismah is not something that can be achieved by everyone, even through certain efforts. It’s just a gift from Allah SWT. This is certainly different from what is believed by the Shia community. They argue that infallibility is not only attributed to the prophets and messengers, but also to the Shi’a imams.

The concept of ‘Ismah or Ma’sûm

The concept of ‘ ismah or ma’sûm is a concept that is only discussed in Islam. Sriwahyuni ​​(2017) argues that Jewish theologians do not need to discuss this theme because they think that their prophets committed many sins.

Likewise with the Christians, even though they purified the Messiah from all disgrace and disgrace, their purification was not based on the ability of scientific analogy that the Messiah was a human who was sent to teach humans and save them. According to them, he is a physical God. Therefore, they also don’t need to discuss it because ‘ ismah is a human problem, not God’s problem.

The prophets and apostles are chosen people sent by Allah SWT to improve mankind. They are educators, preachers, mentors, as well as role models of goodness. As educators, it is fitting that this infallible nature is inherent in them in order to carry out the da’wah mission carried out by them.

His position as a prophet or apostle is required to be an example in all things. Allah SWT is here to show the location of one of His generosity to His prophets and messengers. He ordered to convey His message, but He also provided them with ‘ ismah .

Based on the statement above, it can be specified that a prophet or apostle must be infallible. This is because in order to be an example for mankind and so that everything that is revealed does not escape one bit, either due to forgetfulness or dishonesty.

Some scholars argue that ‘ ismah occurs before and after being appointed as a prophet. This is because a person’s life journey (even though he has not yet become a prophet) has an influence on the development of his da’wah in the period after being appointed as a prophet.

Therefore, every prophet is obliged to live a good life and have a clean soul, so that there are no psychological stumbling blocks in carrying out his treatises and preaching. The argument used is Surah Shâd verse 47.

” And verily they are with Us indeed among the best chosen ones .”

According to al-Sâbûnî (1992) in Defending the Prophet, Allah SWT has guarded His prophet since childhood. He protected him from all kinds of ignorant behavior in his childhood and youth until he was appointed as a prophet. In this way, the infallibility is also perfect by being given the task of carrying out the treatise.

There are also those who argue that infallibility occurs after prophethood, both from big and small sins, because humans are not ordered to follow them before being appointed as prophets. Before that, they were like ordinary humans. However, they did not fall into sin.

The concept of ‘ ismah according to Taqiyyuddin al-Nabhani (2003) in al-Syakhsiyyah al-Islamiyyah Juz 1 is no different from other scholars, namely in the form of Allah SWT’s maintenance of His prophets from sins. It’s just that the infallibility of prophets and messengers only occurred after they were appointed as prophets and messengers along with the revelations conveyed to them.

As for before the prophetic and apostolic period—in a reasonable way—they may do things that are permissible for all human beings, because infallibility is only for prophethood and apostolate.

Regarding major or minor sins that are infallible, al-Nabhani said that regarding matters that are definitely ordered to be done and ordered to be abandoned—meaning that includes all things that are obligatory and unlawful—they are all infallible. Apart from these things, such as those that are makruh, mandûb , and khilâfatulula , they are not infallible because that does not conflict with prophethood and apostleship. It is not classified as immoral.

Mandûb is anything that if done will get a reward, but if left does not get punishment. Sunnah itself is something that Muhammad did regularly, while mustahab is something that Muhammad did once or twice, such as Duha prayers and doing treatment with cupping. The meaning of khilâfatul bala is doing something good, but there are other things that are better and more appropriate to do (offending more important ones).

Ibn Taimiyyah also contributed his thoughts on the concept of infallibility. According to him, the prophets were infallible only with regard to their duties of conveying revelations (tablîg) from Allah SWT alone, while outside of this duty the prophets as ordinary people could make mistakes.

An example is the violation of the Prophet David As, the negligence of the Prophet Yunus As, and also the negligence of Muhammad Saw, all of which are contained in the Qur’an. It’s just that, when they made a mistake or mistake, the prophets immediately realized it and did repentance nasuha (sincere repentance). It is precisely repentance that enhances the prophethood and humanity of these prophets. In addition, if they made a mistake or were mistaken, the prophets immediately received a warning or reprimand from Allah SWT.

Regarding a person who is considered infallible, most Sunni scholars believe that ‘ismah is only reserved for prophets and messengers. There is no one but them, because every ordinary human being is always the target of making mistakes and sins.

In contrast to the beliefs contained in the Shi’a group, ‘ ismah does not only apply to the prophets and apostles, but also to their imams and wâsî (recipients of wills). The argument used as proof is Surah Al-Ahzab verse 33.

“And you should stay in your house and do not decorate and behave like the ignorant people who used to be and establish prayers, pay zakat and obey Allah SWT and His Messenger. Indeed, Allah SWT intends to remove sins from you, O Ahlul bait and cleanse you as clean as possible .

Al-‘Allâmah al-Sayyid Muhammad Husein al-Thabathaba`i in Al-Mîzân fî Tafsîr al-Qur’ân Volume 16 interprets the verse by saying as follows.

“ Indeed, Allah SWT always gives you the gift of ‘ismah, by getting rid of false beliefs and the effects of bad deeds from you, O ahlul bait. And Allah SWT wills something that can eliminate bad influences, that is ‘ismah “.

This opinion is very different from the opinion of Muslims in general who believe that humans other than prophets must have made mistakes and sins.

Well, that’s a brief explanation of the term infallible in Islam: The meaning and concept explanation . The following are recommendations for books from sinaumedia that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about Islam so they can fully understand it. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

• Names of Hell in Islam
• Names of Heaven and Descriptions of Heaven
• Definition of Faith in Language and Terms and Levels
• The Difference between Sugra and Kubra Doomsday, What’s the Difference?
• The difference between Qada and Qadar along with examples

Prestige is one of those vices that is very difficult to deal with. Often times a sense of prestige will make someone more arrogant, arrogant and even disliked by many people.

Prestige can also exist in a person and can occur because it is influenced by inborn traits due to parental upbringing or indeed caused by the environment in which he is in everyday. Having a sense of prestige is often seen as a form of increasing self-esteem and social status.

In fact, in everyday life, the presence of prestige is not only detrimental to oneself but can also harm others. People who have a sense of prestige will find it difficult to mingle with other people because they already have personal standards shown by an attitude.

If you think prestige can increase self-esteem, then that’s wrong. Precisely that attitude can make other people not appreciate you. Therefore, it is better to have a humble attitude, so that we can get along with anyone. Living with prestige is also very troublesome and even detrimental.

Well, to be clearer about all things related to prestige. You can read the reviews in this article, Sinaumed’s

The Reason Why Prestige Is So Harmful

As previously explained, prestige is a trait that is detrimental and even somewhat troublesome. Instead of increasing self-esteem, it results in being hated by many people. So, maybe you don’t know what are the reasons that pride can be so detrimental? Here is a full explanation.

1. Self-Development Will Feel So Hard to Do

The first reason that pride can cause great harm to yourself is because when you have pride it will cause difficulties in the process of self-development.

This is none other than because prestige will form the mindset that you yourself already have intelligence above all else, so you no longer need new learning in any case.

Apart from that, you will also have the thought that what you have obtained is indeed greater than that of other people. This will make you not want to develop yourself in new things.

Even though in fact you can still have the opportunity to grow to be even better. However, because of this prestige nature, it makes it more difficult for you to develop yourself.

2. It’s hard to appreciate every existing process

When you have prestige in life, then indirectly you will not be able to go through the process that is happening so deliciously. In fact, you will feel so tormented in carrying out every process that exists.

This is none other than because you have the mindset that what you are doing right now is not the best thing for you. Not only that, because the nature of prestige will make you feel that you can get something more than carrying out the process that is currently being undertaken.

When this happens, it is no longer a pleasure to go through the process of giving birth to being forced to compromise with circumstances just because of your self-esteem.

However, if you decide to lower your current standard of living and be able to enjoy the process that is being lived, then chances are that you will be able to appreciate it more as a part of life to be more in the life to come. Besides that, you also have to realize that everything in life requires a process.

3. Having Shallow Thinking

The existence of a sense of prestige in your life will also affect your personal mindset. The reason is, the nature of prestige can make you someone who is unrealistic and always thinks that the best standard is according to what you are thinking.

This means that you will always be unable to work together and build good relationships with many people at once. Even though it’s not certain if what you think is the best for others.

Therefore, it is very important for you to be individuals with an open mindset so that you can stay away from having an attitude of prestige in this life.

4. Extremely Self-Torturing

In this life, there are many things that are so simple and can give happiness if you don’t maintain a sense of prestige. Life is not so difficult, but a sense of pride that makes everything difficult.

Life is not expensive, but a sense of prestige that makes everything look expensive. Believe it or not, actually the sense of prestige embedded in your life will be able to elevate yourself from within.

In fact, maybe without realizing it, during this journey of life, you have underestimated the good things just because of a sense of prestige. If you have this, then the one who will lose is yourself.

You will always make things difficult for yourself with such a high standard of living. When a situation cannot match what you want, then you feel that you will not have a sense of happiness.

5. Thirst for Recognition

Realize it or not, a sense of prestige will make you someone who is hungry for recognition. Let’s look at the activities of many people on social media where initially social media was used to facilitate communication and sharing. However, nowadays the existence of social media seems to be an arena to show oneself, so that we can get recognition according to what we want.

In fact, it’s not uncommon for many people to start willing to maintain prestige on social media to do things that are beyond their capabilities. It will not give good happiness and is just fake happiness.

The existence of this false happiness can provoke envy and envy for others. If you have this, the losers will not be yourself but other people.

So, those are some reasons why having traits or a sense of prestige in life can be very detrimental to yourself and others.

Characteristics of People Who Prioritize a Sense of Prestige

Prestige can be interpreted as self-esteem or a dignity of an individual. Therefore, we also need something called prestige, because without prestige, a person can feel inferior to the point that other people also look down on us.

Even so, when we place too much importance on prestige, this instead of having a positive impact can actually have a negative impact. For example, getting the impression of being an arrogant individual who is shunned by others.

However, sometimes those who always have a high sense of prestige are not aware of this. So, to make it easier for you to find out the characteristics of people who are more concerned with a sense of prestige, here is a complete explanation.

1. Don’t Care About Younger People

Those who have too high a sense of prestige will usually not give respect to younger people, especially small children. This is none other than because he always thinks that he is the one who should be respected, not the other way around.

Therefore, when he got advice from a much easier one, he usually wouldn’t accept it. In fact, this can happen when he realizes that the suggestion is indeed better than what he thinks.

In fact, not all who have a young age have a condition of lack of experience or lack of wisdom. Sometimes, they have a much wiser point of view than us who have a more mature age. In this case, mutual respect is the key to being able to have good relations with others.

2. Having no respect for those of low rank

Although people with high prestige don’t mind forming partnerships with those with lower status, that doesn’t necessarily mean that they can show respect to those colleagues.

Giving respect to others means assuming other people have the same position as ourselves. This is so natural because we as human beings have the same position in the eyes of God. Therefore, differences in position in the world of career or the economy does not mean it is a barrier to making friends.

3. Having the Desire to Appear Perfect Until Reluctant to Do Good

Paying attention to appearance is not wrong or even something that should be considered. But will you keep trying to always look perfect in the eyes of other people so that you are reluctant to do good? If so, that’s a sign that the sense of prestige in you is still too big.

The reason is, in the journey of life there will be a condition that requires us to appear imperfect or even in an ugly condition. However, if it is necessary for a good deed, there should be no problem.

For example, when you have to be willing to get dirty when you are going to save a kitten trapped in a ditch. If that’s the case, are you still reluctant to save the kitten because you don’t want to be called ugly? Try asking yourself.

4. Always Anti Looks Failed

Those who are too proud, usually will always try to hide their failures in public. In fact, not infrequently he will cover up failure with various kinds of imagery as if he has had success. When in fact he was too proud to admit if he had failed.

In this case, it doesn’t mean you have to always spread about failure in front of other people. However, you also have to know that failure is a part of life. Therefore, when other people know that in your life journey there has been a failure, of course it is not a big problem. As long as you note that you are also able to respond to every failure correctly,

5. Reluctant to Admit Mistakes

Those who have high enough prestige usually do not want to admit mistakes even accompanied by not wanting to express apologies. The existence of this attitude is one of the triggers for the cause of the destruction of a relationship.

Be it friendship, romance or family relationships. Therefore, one way to improve a relationship is to admit mistakes and get rid of self-esteem.

Those are some of the characteristics of people who have high prestige in themselves. So, are there any of the above characteristics in you?

Easy Tips to Overcome Excessive Prestige

A sense of pride if in the right dose can provide many benefits to us. Besides being able to increase self-confidence, prestige can also build strength and a certain identity within oneself.

However, some people often have a sense of prestige with excessive doses. Where excessive prestige is formed only to protect one’s own weaknesses and shortcomings.

Not infrequently there are people who have such a high sense of prestige that they are willing to lie as if they have something. In reality, however, this does not exist. This is done solely so that he can always be seen as better than others.

If this condition is left unchecked, then too high prestige will be able to cause big losses to oneself. Well, to be able to avoid excessive prestige. Here are some tips that you can apply.

1. Remain Yourself

One of the characteristics of people with high prestige is that they don’t hesitate to lie to themselves. For example lying about price, status to the achievements it has. A sense of pride will make you always want to be in a position that is more than others. In addition, a sense of pride will also make a person forget how to thank God.

Not infrequently they often force themselves to follow or imitate other people, even though they don’t necessarily have the same thoughts as themselves. This is nothing but done so that he looks more or just to cover up any deficiencies that he has.

Well, one way to overcome a sense of prestige that is too high is to remain yourself. Being yourself and always being grateful for what you have can have a positive impact on life, especially for personal mental health.

2. Stop Comparing Yourself With Others

The existence of a sense of pride can make a person feel inadequate and always see what others have. An example is when you always compare your personal achievements and achievements with those of other people. This will make you feel dissatisfied.

Even though the self-esteem of every individual in this world has a subjective nature and cannot be compared with one another. Even though it’s trivial, people often forget this with a sense of too much prestige.

If it’s like this, then the best way to overcome excessive pride is to always be grateful and also not to compare what you have personally and what other people have.

3. Avoid Stubborn Attitude

The next way to overcome excessive pride is to avoid stubbornness. People who have stubborn traits often believe that their personal opinion is always the most correct and does not hesitate to reject the opinions and views of other people.

It can also make it difficult for someone to accept criticism. Meanwhile, the way to avoid this trait is to learn to understand and listen to other people. Besides that, being open-minded is also one way.

4. Don’t hesitate to say thank you and sorry

Some people who have excessive prestige will see that saying sorry is a weakness. Even though saying sorry can teach you to be humble.

Therefore, when you make a mistake, don’t hesitate to sincerely apologize and not repeat the mistake at a later time.

This also applies when you get help from other people to always say thank you. Saying thank you for what others have given you is one form of appreciating them.

Well, that’s a review about pride. It would be better, if we as humans have a sense of prestige according to the measure without anything excessive. Because something in excess is not good. Hopefully all the discussion above can make Sinaumed’s overcome the sense of prestige that is in himself.

If you want to find books about being a good person, you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Gomawo means – Language is one of the media to unite one person with another. Of course, we know that English is an international language that is often used as an auxiliary medium for communication between one person from a country when meeting other people who do not come from the same country.

This is because every country always has a national language that only local residents understand. One of them is Korea, which makes Korean (한국어/조선말) its official language.

Actually, the meaning that is pronounced is the same as in Indonesian, there are words sorry, please, thank you and so on, but it is pronounced in Korean. For those of you who often watch Korean drama series, of course you are also familiar with various kinds of vocabulary from that country.

One of them is the word Gomawo which in fact is often uttered as a form of expression of gratitude to someone. So, in this article, we will discuss the meaning of the word Gomawo and other Korean vocabulary that you may have heard of but don’t know what it means.

Meaning of the word Gomawo

Maybe not many people know the meaning of the word Gomawo. Even so, for Korean drama lovers, Gomawo’s vocabulary is indeed familiar. This is because the Gomawo vocabulary is often spoken by Korean drama actors.

It’s no wonder that in Indonesia, many young people often use Gomawo’s vocabulary in their daily lives. This cannot be separated from the worldwide popularity of Korean dramas.

In fact, the use of the Korean language is quite familiar to everyone’s ears, even outside the country like Indonesia. Gomawo means thank you in Indonesian.

Gomawo is an expression of thanks that is usually used when conditions are not normal or when speaking casually in Korean. Gomawo means a thank you that will be conveyed to peers or people of the same age.

If you use Gomawo vocabulary to strangers or to older people, then this action will be considered impolite in Korea.

In essence, Gomawo means giving thanks in an informal or casual way. Not only using Gomawo vocabulary, but there are also other expressions of gratitude in Korean.

For example, like Kamsahamnida and Gomapseumnida, it can also be used as an expression of gratitude to other people.

Some Expressions of Thanks in Korean

As previously explained, the Gomawo vocabulary means informal thanks and is usually used to peers. Therefore, if you really want to know more about saying thank you in Korean.

Of course, you must know what types of vocabulary words to say thank you besides Gomawo. If Gomawo is usually used informally, there will be an expression of thanks in the formal sense.

So, below is an explanation regarding some thank-you notes in Korean.

1. Gomawoyo

Apart from Gomawo, it turns out that there is also Gomawoyo vocabulary which can also be used as another form of thank you. Where Gomawoyo is a thank you used informally.

Of course, Gomawoyo’s vocabulary can be used for people you just met or those who are younger. But compared to Gomawo, Gomawoyo is known to be more polite.

2. Kamsahae and Kamsahaeyo

Kamsahae and Kamsahaeyo are types of thank you words in Korean. Kamsahaeyo itself is a thank you that can be used when in a relaxed atmosphere.

As for Kamsahaeyo, it is a kind of word of thanks that is more polite than Kamsahae. Even so, in practice, Kamsahae and Kamsahaeyo are still classified as informal or relaxed. The politeness level of Kamsahae and Kamsahaeyo is still the same as that of Gamawoyo.

3. Kamsahamnida

If Gomawo means as a thank you but in an informal condition or relaxed atmosphere. Of course, in Korean there are also words of thanks in a more polite form for formal situations.

One of them is Kamsahamnida which is an expression of the word thank you in Korean but for more formal conditions. Kamsahamnida itself is usually used for older people, superiors, or seniors.

Besides that, the pronunciation of Kamsahamnida can also be addressed to people who are just known or to people who are respected. Saying thank you with the Kamsahamnida vocabulary is indeed the most commonly used in Korea.

4. Gomapseumnida

Next is Gomapseumnida which is also a form of thanks in a formal setting. Usually the use of Gomapseumnida’s vocabulary is in official situations or for parents who are older.

So, those are some types of thank you words in Korean. Of course, you also know that apart from Gomapseumnida, there are other types of words of thanks. In addition, each vocabulary word of thanks has its own level of politeness.

Therefore, knowing the types of thank you vocabulary above will make it easier for you to use them.

Answers to Thank You in Korean

After knowing several types of vocabulary words of thanks. Next, we will learn about some thank-you answers in Korean. Of course, we know that a thank you is always synonymous with an answer.

So this also applies to Korean, where every word of thanks always has its own answer. So that you understand even more, here is a review of several types of thank-you answers in Korean.

1. Byeolmalseumeulyo

Byeolmalseumeulyo is a type of answer vocabulary for saying thank you in Korean that you can use. Where for the meaning of Byeolmalseumeulyo is you are welcome or thank you again.

2. Kwenchanseumnida or Kwenchanayo

Kwenchanseumnida or Kwenchanayo is the next word that can be used as an answer for saying thank you in Korean. Kwenchanseumnida or Kwenchanayo itself means it’s okay.

Actually, when viewed from its function, the existence of Kwenchanseumnida or Kwenchanayo does have more than one function. And one of the functions of Kwenchanseumnida or Kwenchanayo is to respond to thanks expressed by others.

3. Ne or Eung

Ne or Eung can be a choice of vocabulary answers for saying thank you in Korean. Ne or Eung itself means the word “yes”. In addition, the Ne vocabulary has a more polite level in response to expressions of gratitude compared to the word Eung. Of all the types of thank you answers, Ne or Eung is the shortest.

4. Chonmaneyo

You can also choose Chonmaneyo as an answer to say thank you in Korean. Chonmaneyo itself means thank you again. Usually the use of Chonmaneyo vocabulary is mostly expressed in writing and it is rarely expressed verbally in an existing conversation.

So that’s a review of several types of vocabulary answers for expressions of gratitude that you can use. Of course, you can choose the expression according to your needs. By knowing what types of vocabulary answers to expressions of thanks are, of course, you are increasingly able to provide answers to expressions of gratitude given by other people.

Some Sorry Words In Korean

Apart from the word thank you, in Korean there is also a vocabulary for saying sorry that someone can say. As with the vocabulary of thank you, there are several types of expressions of the word sorry.

Each type of word sorry in Korean always has its own function. So, so that you can better understand what types of apologies are, here is a complete explanation.

미안합니다 (Mianhamnida)

미안합니다 (Mianhamnida) is a form of apology in Korean. Where 미안합니다 (Mianhamnida) will be used formally. 미안합니다 (Mianhamnida) can be addressed to someone who is respected or to parents. Even so, not infrequently the expression 미안합니다 (Mianhamnida) is used to show sincerity when saying sorry.

미안해요 (Mianhaeyo)

Next, there is 미안해요 (Mianhaeyo) which can also be used as an apology for other people. In addition, 미안해요 (Mianhaeyo) is another form of 미안합니다 (Mianhamnida) which can also be used in formal situations.

However, the use of 미안해 (Mianhae) is more pronounced for people you are not familiar with or don’t know. For example, when you run into a stranger while walking, now at that time you can use 미안해 (Mianhae) as an apology.

미안해 (Mianhae)

미안해 (Mianhae) is a type of apology vocabulary in Korean that you can use in informal situations. Where Mianhae will only be used on people who are the same age as you or with people who are younger. As a side note, never try to use the word Mianhae on someone who is more senior than you. This is because it is considered impolite.

미안하다 (Mianhada) / 미안 (Mian)

미안하다 (Mianhada) / 미안 (Mian) is a type of apology word in Korean that has a more personal nature when compared to the vocabulary 미안해 (Mianhae). Besides that, the use of 미안하다 (Mianhada) / 미안 (Mian) will usually be addressed to your partner or to someone who is really familiar with you. However, certain circumstances will make using 미안하다 (Mianhada) / 미안 (Mian) not as sincere as it may seem.

죄송합니다 (Jwesonghamnida)

죄송합니다 (Jwesonghamnida) is a type of greeting in Korean with a very polite level. Where you can use the vocabulary 죄송합니다 (Jwesonghamnida) for respected people. In addition, the use of 죄송합니다 (Jwesonghamnida) can also be used as a form of respect in Korean.

죄송해요 (Jwesonghaeyo)

The existence of the 죄송해요 (Jwesonghaeyo) vocabulary will have the same level of politeness as the 미안해요 (Mianhaeyo) vocabulary. However, most of the uses of 죄송해요 (Jwesonghaeyo) are found more in casual conversations such as conversations conducted by co-workers.

잠시만요 (Jamsimanyo)

Actually, 잠시만요 (Jamsimanyo) is a Korean phrase that means wait a minute. You can also use 잠시만요 (Jamsimanyo) in certain situations such as when taking orders. Of course, this condition will be better if you use 잠시만요 (Jamsimanyo) compared to saying sorry.

실례합니다 (Silyehamnida)

실례합니다 (Silyehamnida) is a Korean word that means excuse me. Usually the use of 실례합니다 (Silyehamnida) will be used in certain conditions. For example, when you want to ask other people but feel shy. So, in this situation, you can use the vocabulary 실례합니다 (Silyehamnida) as a pronoun for saying sorry for bothering them.

So, those are some types of apology words that you can learn. From the explanation above, of course you know that every word sorry in Korean always has its own function. Therefore you can try to use one of the types of words above according to the situation that is happening.

Several Types of Greetings Asking for Help in Korean

Previously, we explained some words of thanks and sorry in Korean. So, in order to make your mastery of Korean more complete, then next is an explanation of several types of words for help in Korean.

The following is an explanation of several types of words for help in Korean.

도와주시겠어요 (Dowajusigesseoyo)

도와주시겠어요 (Dowajusigesseoyo) is a Korean word for asking for help. The use of the vocabulary 도와주시겠어요 (Dowajusigesseoyo) is still very polite. Therefore the use of the word 도와주시겠어요 (Dowajusigesseoyo) is usually in formal situations.

도와주실래요 (Dowajusillaeyo)

Next, there is the word 도와주실래요 (Dowajusillaeyo) which can be used as a request for help. If interpreted, 도와주실래요 (Dowajusillaeyo) will mean “can you help me”. Although the existence of 도와주실래요 (Dowajusillaeyo) is not as polite as 도와주시겠어요 (Dowajusigesseoyo). However, the word 도와주실래요 (Dowajusillaeyo) can still be used as a formal form of asking for help. The addition of 시 (si) will show the level of politeness in the expression 도와주실래요 (Dowajusillaeyo).

도와주세요 (Dowajuseyo)

도와주세요 (Dowajuseyo) is an apology word that is most commonly used in everyday life. Where the use of the word 도와주세요 (Dowajuseyo) can indeed be used in an emergency.

도와줘 (Dowajwo)

도와줘 (Dowajwo) if interpreted literally is “help me”. The use of the word 도와줘 (Dowajwo) will usually be done in informal situations or to people of the same age or younger than you.

So, those are some types of greeting words in Korean. Starting from words of thanks, sorry to asking for help, have been explained in this article. Hopefully all the discussion above can add to your insight.

If you want to find books about Korean, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Hendrik Nuryanto

 

The main element in dance is something that must exist in the art of dance. Dance is a rhythmic movement at a certain place and time with or without music. Dance can be performed for various things, such as expressing the feelings of the dancers, entertainment, one of the processes of traditional ceremonies, association and so on.

When dancing, dancers must fulfill the main elements in it. That way, the dance that is performed will look cohesive, beautiful or be able to convey the message and meaning of the dance.

The main elements in dance are movement, fashion, make-up, dance accompaniment, dance properties, venue. In addition to these six elements, some say that the main elements in dance are wiraga, wirama, wirasa and wirupa. The main elements of this dance must and must be present in a dance performance, both traditional dance and modern dance.

In addition to the main elements, there are also dance companion elements that complement the dance performance. What are the main elements in dance? Check out the following explanation!

Definition of Dance

Before discussing the main elements of dance, it is better if Sinaumed’s knows and understands the meaning of dance first. What is dance?

Dance is a rhythmic body movement as an expression of the expression of the soul of the creator of the motion, so that it will produce elements of beauty and deep meaning. Tarik focuses on creative concepts and choreography.

The word dance in English is tied to French, namely danse, and these two words are considered to have roots in the ancient German language, namely donson, which means stretch or stretch or drag.

Dance has a function as a means and infrastructure in religious ceremonies. Bali is one of the areas in Indonesia that is still consistent and preserves the application of cultural dances in the daily lives of its people.

However, not only Bali, there are many areas in Indonesia such as South Sulawesi, Kalimantan to Irian Jaya which hold ceremonies using dance in them. Examples include cutting teeth, birth, cutting hair for the first time, marriage, death and maturity.

Religious dances generally have a sacred nature, are holy and have magical powers in them. An example is the Barong dance and Sanghyang dance from Bali, the birth dance from Irian Jaya, the dance to bring rain from East Nusa Tenggara and others.

Dance also has a role as a performance art or often referred to as a theatrical art. According to Susanne K. Langer, an American art philosopher, she explains that philosophically, dance as a performing art is a form of human birth and inner process to be seen by oneself and seen by others.

Definition of Dance According to Some Experts

In addition to the general understanding of dance, several experts also expressed their opinions about the meaning of dance. The following is the meaning of dance according to experts.

1. Corrie Hartong

Corrie Hartong explained that the art of dance is an urgent feeling that resides within humans. Then, these feelings encourage a person to express expressions in the form of rhythmic movements.

2. Soedarsono

Soedarsono expressed his opinion about dance. According to Soedarsono, dance is an expression that originates from within the soul of every human being and is expressed through rhythmic movements.

In this case, Soedarsono revealed, that the expression of feeling in question is an emotion or feeling that is felt by humans. Meanwhile, a beautiful rhythmic movement is a movement that follows the accompaniment of the accompaniment, so that it will create an art that makes other people stunned and fascinated when they see these rhythmic movements.

3. Prince Suryadiningrat

Prince Suryadiningrat stated that the notion of dance is a movement that originates from all members of a person’s body and is carried out in accordance with the rhythm of music with a specific purpose and purpose.

4. Bagong Sudito

Bagong Sudito argues that dance is an art in the form of rhythmic movements as well as a medium of expression for humans.

5. Judith Lynne Hanna

Judith Lynne Hanna said that dance is a plastic art that comes from visual movement and can be seen at a glance.

6. Yulianti Parani

Yulianti Parani explained that dance is a rhythmic movement that arises from several parts of the body or throughout the body and is performed by a person or group of people followed by certain expressions.

7. Kamala Devi Chattopadhyaya

Kamala Devi Chattopadhyaya is of the opinion that dance is an urge that originates from within a person and needs to be poured into the form of rhythmic movements.

8. MA Theodora Retno Maruh

MA Theodora Retno Maruh said that dance is a work of art in the form of movement and its nature will not change into contemporary art.

From the understanding of dance in general and according to the experts above, it can be concluded that dance is a work of art whose form is rhythmic movement accompanied by music and other elements.

Main Elements in Dance

According to the book Islamic Character Dance Choreography for Elementary School Children (2019) written by Arina Restian, the main elements in dance are divided into four namely wiraga, wirama, wirasa and wirupa. Here’s an explanation.

1. Wiraga (body)

The main element in dance is wiraga or rasa. Wiraga is an element of dance that shows various movements such as standing, sitting, jumping and others.

This element of wiraga is the main element in dance, because dance must have movements in it which are full of meaning. Every dance movement is always created by humans who are commonly known as choreographers. With the presence of this choreographer’s role, the actual dance you already remember will look even more beautiful to watch.

2. Wirama (rhythm)

The second main element of dance is wirama, namely rhythm. The existence of rhythm in the art of dance, comes from the music played by the dance accompanists. A dancer or a group of dancers must be able to adjust the dance movements to the rhythm of the accompanying music. Not only the rhythm of the music that must be combined, but the dancers also need to follow the tempo of the music well.

If the dance movements and rhythms combine well, then the dance stage will look more beautiful. Apart from that, the rhythm also complements the atmosphere and meaning that the choreography and the dancers are trying to convey.

3. Wirasa (taste)

The third main element of dance is wirasa or taste. A dance that is just performed, without any sense in it, so every movement danced by the dancers will not touch the feelings of the audience.

Taste in this dance can be shown by dancers through rhythmic dance movements or showing expressions. That way, a dance can touch the feelings of the audience.

For example, like Balinese dance which emphasizes expression in it. When dancing, the dancers do not only practice movements, but also expressions, eye movements and others to convey the meaning of the dance.

4. Wirupa (expression)

The last main element of dance is wirupa or expression. A dancer must be able to express himself through facial expressions and deepen the character of the character he is portraying. This wirupa is as important as the other three main elements of dance.

As explained earlier, that expression can convey the feelings of the dancers when performing a dance. With expression, dancers can express messages, stories and the meaning of a dance.

For example, dance movements that describe anger. If the dancer shows it by smiling, then of course it will change the message and meaning of a dance. So, dancers must know how to express their anger.

With the four main elements in the dance, the dance performed by the dancers will create coherent movements and accuracy in conveying messages.

Main Elements in Traditional Dance

Indonesia is a country of culture. One of the interesting cultures and an attraction for tourists is the art of traditional dance. There are various kinds of traditional dance and each dance has its own characteristics.

Even though every traditional dance in Indonesia is different, there are main elements that exist in every traditional Indonesian dance. The main elements in this traditional dance will form a bond, so that it displays a harmonious dance and reveals beauty when staged. Here’s an explanation.

1. Dance moves

Dance movements are compositions of beautiful movements performed by the limbs and have undergone processing or processing in such a way that these movements can be enjoyed by others.

The elements of dance movement have different characteristics for each dance art. In its cultivation, dance movements are also often referred to as distortions. Dance movements in traditional dance are divided into two, which are as follows.

• Pure dance movements are dance movements that have no meaning, but still emphasize the beauty factor.
• Meaningful dance movements are movements that have a specific meaning, for example the movement of the hands on the waist which means having power.

2. Dance accompaniment

The accompaniment of the art of dance does not only have to be in the form of musical instruments, but can also be in the form of sounds that support the atmosphere in which the art of dance is presented. However, dance accompaniment can also be performed with traditional as well as modern musical instruments or even just sounds coming from body movements. For example whistling, singing, clapping and stomping feet.

3. Dance costumes or props

Dance costume is the whole of all clothes, clothing worn by a dancer when performing a dance performance. Costumes function to help revive the character or character that has become the role of the dancer.

4. Make-up

In addition to costumes, make-up in dance performances also functions to bring the characters and characters played by the dancers to life. Makeup can also change the appearance of the dancers.

Make-up will be said to be successful if the dancer has the face that is needed and in accordance with the character he is carrying.

5. Performance venue

The main element in traditional dance is the place where performances are usually performed on stage. There are two common types of dance performance venues, namely open and closed stages. Open performances can be held in the field or yard. While closed performances can be held in halls, inside buildings or even classrooms.

Supporting Elements in Dance

In addition to the four main elements in dance, there are also supporting elements in dance that help perfect the dance performance. With supporting elements, the dance performance will look more meaningful and even make the audience more interested. Here are some supporting elements in the art of dance.

1. Costumes

Costume is a supporting element in dance. Even though the costume is a supporting element, the existence of the costume is considered very important. The existence of this costume can give its own color in a dance performance. In addition, costumes in dance performances also have the function of conveying the message and atmosphere of the performance well to the audience.

2. Make-up

In addition to costumes, the supporting element of dance is make-up which also has an important value in dance performances. Makeup does not only function to make the appearance of the dancers look more attractive and beautiful, but also serves to convey the firmness in the expressions of the dancers.

So, if in a dance performance the make-up is not good or does not match the story and theme of the dance, it is feared that the message and atmosphere of the dance cannot be conveyed properly to the audience.

3. Floor pattern

Dance is a rhythmic movement that needs floor patterns to move from one place to another. The floor pattern as a companion element of the dance will make the dance movements look more beautiful and orderly.

If a dance is performed in a group, the rotational patterns and rotations are usually much more complicated. This is so that each of the dancers can perform the dance moves to the fullest.

As a result, dance movements that have been designed and made in such a way by the choreographer will look more beautiful. In addition, the floor pattern also functions so that the dancers do not collide when changing positions.

4. Lighting

The fourth element of dance is lighting. The lighting system in dance performances is divided into two types, namely the lighting system for lighting and the lighting system used for artistic staging purposes.

The lighting arrangement is generally the main source of lighting when performing dance arts. While lighting for artistic purposes usually serves to provide an atmosphere as well as dramatize dance performances.

5. Themes

Each dance performance generally raises a certain theme or story. So, every dance movement is not just a movement, but has a meaning behind it or becomes a symbol of the theme in the dance performance. The theme of the dance performance will affect all aspects of the elements in the dance, both the main elements and the supporting elements.

So, even though the theme is a supporting element, it plays an important role in dance. Different themes will bring up different performance concepts.

For example, if a dance performance takes the theme of romance from the story of Rama and Shinta, then the main and supporting elements will follow that theme. That way, the story of Rama and Shinta can be conveyed properly through dance movements, even though the dancers don’t speak or tell stories.

From this explanation, the main elements in dance are wiraga, wirasa, wirama and wirupa. The four main elements in this dance must exist in the art of dance, if there are none, then the dance performance may fail, not be beautiful or even not convey the message and story of the dance theme.

If Sinaumed’s is interested in dance, then Sinaumed’s can learn dance by reading books. As #FriendsWithoutBatas, sinaumedia.com provides useful and original books such as books about dance. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Mail merge is a feature that can assist users in making letters, envelope formats, invitations, certificates or other documents more concise. By using the mail merge feature from Microsoft Word, users can work on documents with the same format, a large number of them more quickly, even though their identities are different. That way, Microsoft Word users don’t need to edit documents one by one.

From a brief explanation of the mail merge feature, is Sinaumed’s interested in using this feature? To use this mail merge feature, Sinaumed’s must have two files and one of them is a database in Microsoft Excel. Then for more, see the tutorial using the mail merge feature in this article!

What is the Mail Merge Feature? 

After entering the era of globalization, more and more business activities have begun to penetrate the digital world. There are many companies or even MSMEs that are starting to expand their business in the form of services for making digital invitations and so on.

In addition, there are many companies that require employees with qualified skills to be able to create special documents. These documents sometimes have to be made in large quantities. The presence of this mail merge feature can make it easier for business people or employees to make work easier.

Mail merge is one of the features in Microsoft Word that can be used by users to create invitations, letters or other types of documents in a faster time.

In Indonesian, the term mail merge can be defined as mass mailings. By understanding its meaning, it can be seen that the mail merge feature is used to create documents, for example letters and other documents in large numbers or more than one.

By using this mail merge feature, the activity of sending invitations will become more practical and faster, because users do not need to make invitations one by one for each recipient, even though their identities are different.

Not only invitations, mail merge can also be used to make it easier for users to create other documents, for example, invoices, catalogs, newsletters, certificates and so on.

To be able to enjoy the mail merge feature from Microsoft Word, Sinaumed’s needs to create 2 documents, namely the main document and the data document. The main document is the main domain that contains the information or text to be sent.

Meanwhile, data documents are documents that contain information or supporting data, for example, such as recipient addresses, recipient names, a list of email accounts that will receive the invitation data and so on. Data documents can be saved in file formats in the form of csv or xls.

If you want to know how to use mail merge, then Sinaumed’s needs to know what components are needed to make a mail merge and the function of mail merge.

Mail Merge component

As previously explained, there are two important components for Sinaumed’s to be able to use the mail merge feature. The two components are the main document and data source files.

The main document is a template file or document which is the basic format for creating a mail merge. So that means, before creating a large number of documents at once, Sinaumed’s must first have a main document which is the basic template.

Meanwhile, data sources files are a kind of document that Sinaumed’s will later insert in making a mail merge. Data source file documents are usually in the form of databases created in Microsoft Excel or files in a supported format that can be imported into Microsoft Word.

Before creating a mail merge, it’s a good idea for Sinaumed’s to create both types of files. This is so that the mail merge creation process can run more efficiently.

Mail Merge function

The mail merge feature from Microsoft Word has several functions, including the 6 main functions of the mail merge feature, namely creating letters, creating invitations, creating certificates, creating catalogs, creating inventories and creating other e-mails. Apart from these six functions, there are also several functions that can be enjoyed by Microsoft Word users who use the mail merge feature, as follows:

1. Simplify the work of sending letters

For Sinaumed’s, who is used to sending letters every day and is required to send them to many recipients at once, then of course it would be a hassle to send letters one by one.

In addition, if Sinaumed’s finds an error after sending the letter, then the error cannot be corrected, especially if the recipient has read the letter.

With the mail merge feature, the job of sending large numbers of letters will become easier. Users can make the main document or main document a template, so that errors will be minimized.

Users can also arrange letters according to recipient data. Examples include recipient names, recipient addresses and other data.

2. Work becomes faster and more practical

The second function of mail merge is being able to prepare documents and send these documents to multiple recipients at once. With this one feature, of course the work will be faster, practical and more efficient. Users of the mail merge feature don’t need to waste time because they have to do other unimportant work. For example, such as sending documents one by one.

3. Can create many types of documents

The mail merge feature in Microsoft Word can be used to create various types of documents and not just letters. In addition to the six functions described earlier, mail merge can also create envelopes, labels and more.

With just one feature, Sinaumed’s can create multiple documents. Because of this use, mail merge is widely used by HRD, secretaries and other professions that require creating and sending a lot of documents.

How to Make a Mail Merge in Microsoft Word

After knowing what the mail merge feature is and the function of the mail merge feature in Microsoft Word, then Sinaumed’s is ready to follow the tutorial on making a mail merge. Here’s an explanation.

• Create a data source document

The first step that Sinaumed’s has to do if you want to create a mail merge in Microsoft Word is to first create a data source document in Microsoft Excel. Data sources are specially designed, according to the needs of each user, so data sources must be created manually.

For example, if Sinaumed’s wants to send data to many recipients with different addresses at once, Sinaumed’s needs to fill in the data source document in the form of the recipient’s name and recipient’s address. Apart from that, Sinaumed’s also fills in additional data, for example, such as telephone numbers and other required data.

The data source document is the main component if you want to create a mail merge. Data source documents are also referred to as data source files and must exist so that the process of creating a mail merge becomes easier and smoother.

 

• Create a main document

After completing the data source document, the next step is to create the main document. The main document or main document is created in Microsoft Word.

Regarding the contents of the main document, it only needs to be adjusted to the needs of each user. For example, if Sinaumed’s wants to make a meeting invitation letter, then the contents of the main document must match the meeting invitation letter.

It is possible that mail merge is used for the name and address of the recipient listed on the body of the letter or mail merge can also be used to make an envelope that wraps the invitation letter.

So, in essence, this feature of the mail merge will make it easier for users if Sinaumed’s wants to enter multiple and different recipients’ personal data.

 

• Merge the data source with the main document 

After the two components of the mail merge document are ready, Sinaumed’s only needs to merge the two documents. The method is as follows:

• Make sure the main document is open.
• Then select the Mailing (mail) sub menu in Microsoft Word.
• Then click the Start Mail Merge menu. Then under Sinaumed’s you will find a menu of Letters, E-mail Messages, Envelopes, Labels and Directory. Sinaumed’s, you can choose one according to your needs. For example, if Sinaumed’s wants to make envelopes, then choose the Envelopes menu.
• After that, switch to selecting a sub menu and have Select Recipient, then click the Use Existing List menu. Enter the data source previously created in Microsoft Excel.
• Once selected, the main document will automatically be linked to the data source. Sinaumed’s only needs to choose the right data source.

 

• Set the layout

After the main document and data source document are connected, the next step that Sinaumed’s needs to do is ensure that the layout of the data source and the main document is in accordance with what Sinaumed’s wants.

For example, for the name column, make sure it is connected to the list of names in the data source document. To do this, Sinaumed’s simply places the cursor next to the Name column, then selects the Insert Merge Field sub menu and finally selects the Name column. then, Sinaumed’s only needs to do these steps repeatedly to connect addresses, telephone numbers and other data.

 

• Check the preview, save and print

In order to avoid errors, Sinaumed’s needs to double-check that the data entered is correct. The trick is to check the preview results sub menu.

By selecting the menu, the main document will appear with data that has been filled in automatically. Then to move to the next data, Sinaumed’s only needs to select the Next Record menu.

If all the data entered is correct, then Sinaumed’s can save the mail merge in Microsoft Word by selecting the Finish and Merge sub menu. When selecting the Finish and Merge menu, Sinaumed’s will see the following 3 options:

• Edit individual documents, with this option, Sinaumed’s can save the work files in a new document.
• Print document option used to print mail merge documents.
• Send email messages are used when Sinaumed’s wants to send the main document file.

Creating Mail Merge with Data in MS-Excel

The mail merge feature can not only be used in Microsoft Word, but can also be used in MS. Excel. Pros of making a mail merge via MS. Excel is easier to add and control data. In addition, Sinaumed’s will also find it easier to copy data to other new or old worksheets. Here’s how to create a mail merge with data sources on MS. Excel:

As with creating a mail merge in MS Word, the first step that must be taken to create a mail merge in MS Excel is to first create a data source.

To create a data source in MS.Excel there are several conditions that must be met. Here are some conditions:

• Column headings must consist of one line.
• The MS.Excel table must be named range.

After fulfilling the requirements for creating a data source, Sinaumed’s only needs to enter the data needed to create a mail merge. To be clearer, see the following tutorial.

1. Open MS.Excel and click blank workbook.
2. When the data is as needed on Sheet 1. Then rename the file to Data.
3. Select or block data from column A1 to H11 by dragging and dropping.
4. Name the range, by clicking the Name Box and pressing the Enter key.
5. Select the save or save option on the Quick Access a Toolbar menu or by clicking the File menu and selecting the Save menu to save data in MS.Excel. Specify the storage folder like storing files in general and name it Data-3.xlsx.
6. Not a new document in MS.Excel.
7. Format the data source document as the master document of the mail merge.
8. Repeat step 5 and name the file as Sura-3.docx.
9. Connect the main document with the data source by clicking the Select Recipients button on the Mailings tab and selecting the Start Mail merge group.
10. Click the Use an Existing List menu, because the mail merge takes the data source that was previously created. After that, Microsoft Word will display a dialog box titled Select Data Sources.
11. Specify the data source file storage folder and choose the file name Data-3. To make it easier for Sinaumed’s, in the All Data Source dropdown section, Sinaumed’s can select Excel File and click the Open button.
12. Then, the Select Table dialog box will appear and select the desired range name then click OK.
13. After the main document and data source are connected, Sinaumed’s can insert a single field from the data source document into the main document by selecting the Insert Merge Field dropdown button on the Mailings tab, the Write and Insert Fields group.
14. Prepare fields in each section.
15. To see the temporary results from the mail merge, Sinaumed’s can click the Preview Results button which Sinaumed’s can find on the Mailings tab and the Preview Results group.
16. To combine mail merges in a new document, Sinaumed’s can click the Finish and Merge button on the Mailings tab and select the Finish group and select Edit Individual Documents.
17. Then, in the Merge to New Document dialog box, Sinaumed’s can activate the All option then click OK.

That’s how to create a merge mail with existing data sources in Microsoft Excel. Sinaumed’s can also format data in a mail merge if you want the resulting data to look neater. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you, Sinaumed’s.

Thus an explanation of mail merge, its meaning, function and how to make it. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn more about mail merge and techniques using MS.Word or Ms.Excel, they can get information by reading books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides various kinds of quality and original books for Sinaumed’s. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Khansa

Reference:

• https://www.rumahweb.com/journal/mail-merge-ada/
• https://katadata.co.id/agung/berita/62dea7562432e/mengenal-gratis-mail-merge-di-microsoft-word-dan-cara-making it
• https://tekno.kompas.com/read/2022/01/26/17450047/how-to-make-mail-merge-di-microsoft-word-for-mudahkan-bikin-surat-
• https://www.ekrut.com/media/mail-merge-ada

The Pattimura War – Sinaumed’s must have known Indonesia’s long history before we finally got independence. Colonization of Indonesia started with the arrival of colonialists from the European Continent such as the Portuguese, Dutch and British, followed by the arrival of Japan several years before our independence.

It cannot be denied that the figure of the Proclaimer as well as the First President of the Republic of Indonesia, IR Soekarno together with Vice President Mohammad Hatta supported by other figures became the key to Indonesia’s independence from the shackles of colonialism.

Even so, Sinaumed’s needs to remember that Indonesia’s independence did not happen automatically because of the people mentioned in the previous paragraph. Long before the reading of the proclamation of independence, there were various kinds of efforts from a number of regions to break away from the clutches of the colonialists.

This effort even led to a small war in the area. Even though the majority of wars such as the Pattimura War, the Diponegoro War, the Padri War and the Aceh War ended in defeat, it does not cover the fact that these efforts became one of the triggers for the Indonesian people’s desire to be independent.

For this reason, in this article, we will review some of the Archipelago Wars that occurred before Indonesia’s independence. Sinaumed’s will later study the figures involved in this war and the chronology of the war in general.

Pattimura War

Overview of Pattimura

There is a number of controversies regarding the real name of this figure who is better known as Kapitan Pattimura. Generally, people know Pattimura’s real name as “Thomas Matulessy”. However, other sources say that the figure of Pattimura has the real name “Ahmad Lussy”.

Regardless of Pattimura’s real name, it cannot be denied that the figure who was born on June 7, 1973 is a national hero who had defended his homeland, Maluku Island in 1817. He himself called on the people of Maluku to rebel against the invaders who invaded their homeland.

This rebellion is now also known as the “Patimura War”. Unfortunately, at that time Pattimura’s efforts to defeat the invaders did not end in success. In the end, he and a number of his colleagues were arrested by the Dutch colonialists and themselves sentenced to death for their actions.

Overview of Marta Christina Tiahahu

As explained above, Pattimura was not the only figure who took part in fighting the Dutch colonialists when the Maluku Islands were invaded. Another national hero who also took part in this rebellion was a woman named Marta Christina Tiahahu.

Born on January 4, 1800, Marta Christina Tiahahu has helped liberate the Land of Maluku from colonial hands since she was 17. He himself went down to the battlefield along with his father, helping Pattimura in the rebellion against the Dutch colonialists in 1817.

Unfortunately, Marta Christina Tiahahu and her father were caught by Dutch troops. Even though in the end Marta Christina Tiahahu was released by Dutch troops, her father’s life could not be saved. After that, he fled to the forest, where slowly his mental and physical health deteriorated as he watched the people he loved die in front of him.

History of the Pattimura War

The Pattimura War began with the appointment of Pattimura as “Kapitan” or leader of the war in May 1817. The figure of Pattimura was chosen by the local community because Pattimura was known to be an authoritative figure and had received military training, making him suitable to lead on the battlefield.

Together with a number of his colleagues such as Said Command, Anthony Reebhok, Paulus Tiahahu and his daughter Martha Christina Tiahahu and other Moluccans, they attacked Fort Duurstede which at that time was one of the headquarters of the Dutch army.

The efforts of Pattimura and his colleagues were successful, and the Moluccans managed to occupy Fort Duurstede. The Dutch themselves had tried several times to take Fort Duurstede, but their efforts were always thwarted by Pattimura. While defending Fort Duurstede, Pattimura and company tried to launch other attacks.

After declaring the Haria Proclamation for the Maluku people against the Dutch army, Pattimura attacked Fort Zeelandia in June 1817. Unfortunately, this time his efforts failed. Even worse, Fort Duurstede was eventually re-occupied by the Dutch.

Even so, this still did not dampen the enthusiasm of the Maluku people to return to seize their homeland. However, the Netherlands is not without sense. They several times made a number of cunning tactics to lower the morale of the Maluku people and reduce the strength of the rebels.

One way is to “buy” Raja Booi, who at that time inhabited the Saparua region. He himself leaked the strategy of Pattimura and his colleagues, which led to them being finally caught in November 1817. After being arrested, Pattimura and his colleagues, such as Anthony Reebhok, Philip Latumahina, and Said Parintak were hanged in front of Fort Nieuw Victoria, ending the Kapitan’s struggle.

Diponegoro War

Overview of Diponegoro

The figure who is also known as “Prince Diponegoro” is one of the Indonesian National Heroes who led his troops to expel the Dutch colonialists from the plains of Java, to be precise in the Yogyakarta area and its surroundings. The Diponegoro War is known as one of the biggest wars in Indonesia and claimed hundreds of thousands of lives and damaged thousands of property.

The figure of Diponegoro himself was born with the real name Bendara Raden Mas Antawirya on November 11, 1785. This figure is known as a warm, peace-loving and romantic figure. It is known that Diponegoro was married to 5 different women and had 12 sons and 5 daughters.

Despite his true nature which basically loves peace, Diponegoro did not like the Dutch colonialists. He thinks that these Dutch people have an attitude that is not chivalrous and does not seem to respect the culture and customs of Yogyakarta.

He is also known to have knowledge and depth of war strategy. Evidently, the Dutch had difficulty finding and capturing Diponegoro until he was finally caught in 1830 and exiled to Manado. Finally, on January 8, 1855, Diponegoro died at the age of 69 years.

History of the Diponegoro War

The Diponegoro War began because Diponegoro was known to have never liked the Dutch system in the occupation of the Yogyakarta area. Apart from his system which seemed to be full of coercion and tormented the people of Yogyakarta, Diponegoro also considered that the Dutch were trampling on Yogyakarta’s noble traditions.

This is what sparked the fire of rebellion against the Dutch within Diponegoro. Together with several commanders, such as Kiai Madja, Sentot Prawirodirjo and Kerta Pengalasan, Diponegoro made preparations to fight against the soldiers from the Netherlands.

Diponegoro used various tactics to avoid attacks from the Dutch. Starting from 1825-1830, the Prince often moved headquarters from one place to another to avoid the Dutch. This move was made easier by the large number of people who provided moral and logistical support for the Diponegoro camp.

The Diponegoro camp itself was also strengthened by various weapons, both traditional weapons and firearms, enabling them to defeat the Dutch when they had to deal with them. Diponegoro was considered so slippery because he had repeatedly managed to escape from Dutch ambushes and disappeared without a trace.

The difficulty for the Dutch to find Diponegoro made them send high-ranking military officials several times to find and attack Diponegoro. They also did not forget to use dirty tactics and tricks to catch the Prince.

The Dutch often held competitions to find Diponegoro and were rewarded with big prizes. They also took advantage of the situation where Diponegoro’s side had to deal with a number of wartime diseases such as malaria and fever.

Finally, in March 1830, Diponegoro was arrested after being framed by the Dutch General. He was then exiled to Manado and spent the rest of his life there. This war was continued by Diponegoro’s sons, such as Ki Sodewa Bagus, Dipaningrat, Dipanegara Anom, and Prince Joned, although in the end they were subdued by the Dutch.

Padri War

Overview of Imam Bonjol

Turning to the Minangkabau area, there was also a war called the Padri War which was initially caused by differences in customary understanding by the local tribes, until finally the Minangkabau tribes united to defeat their real enemy, namely the Dutch army.

It is Imam Bonjol or also known by his title “Tuanku Imam Bonjol”, who is the leader of the Padri War. This figure was born with the real name Muhammad Syahab on January 1, 1772. He himself became a leader who led local tribes to fight against the Dutch instead of against their fellow Minangkabau.

His leadership can be said to be quite successful, considering that he managed to unite the two parties that had previously been at odds for decades. Unfortunately, after years of fighting against the Dutch, Imam Bonjol finally had to surrender before the Dutch.

He is known to have surrendered to the Dutch army. After that, Imam Bonjol was exiled to Cianjur, West Java, before finally being transferred again to Ambon, Maluku. Imam Bonjol died at the age of 92 on November 6, 1894.

History of the Padri War

The Padri War initially started when the two tribes or people who came from Minangkabau, namely the Padri and Indigenous People, had different opinions about the beliefs they professed. Long story short, the conflict between the two peoples is known to have started since 1803.

However, entering 1821, the Indigenous People were pressed after facing various kinds of attacks from the Padri. In the end, the leader of the Indigenous People named Sultan Alam Bagagarsyah asked for help against the Dutch troops, as well as surrendered himself to the Dutch against the Padri.

In the end, the Dutch succeeded in helping the Indigenous people against the Padri. Even so, the Dutch had to admit that the Padri were quite a difficult opponent to beat. This led to a ceasefire by the Dutch and the Padri from 1825 to 1831.

However, not long after the Diponegoro War was over, the Dutch again tried to subdue the Minangkabau people and blackmailed them. This is where the role of Tuanku Imam Bonjol in uniting the two peoples who have different backgrounds to fight against the Dutch.

The Padri War was resumed, this time fighting against the Dutch. This battle started from Imam Bonjol’s direction to reoccupy Bonjol City. There was a fortress called Fort Bonjol which was very sturdy and difficult for the Dutch to penetrate, making them have to think hard about attacking these Minangkabau troops.

The focus of this war shifted to Fort Bonjol from 1835 to 1837. However, after being battered continuously, the Minangkabau people found it increasingly difficult to withstand resistance from the Dutch. In the end, in October 1837, Imam Bonjol surrendered to the Dutch.

Imam Bonjol was exiled a year after he was arrested for heading to Cianjur, West Java and Ambon, Maluku. The Padri War itself continued until 1838, although in the end the Minangkabau had to accept the harsh reality that they could not defeat the Dutch troops.

Aceh War

Overview of Teuku Umar

Turning to Aceh, the figure who became the leader in the Aceh War was Teuku Umar. This man was born in 1854 with an unknown date. He is a National Hero of Indonesia who is known as a smart, brave and determined person.

This is what made him lined up as a leader when the people of Aceh when they fought against the Dutch colonialists in breaking away from colonialism. He had succeeded in making it difficult for the Dutch to subdue Aceh. But, in the end, this figure died in the middle of the battle.

Teuku Umar is known to have died from being shot in 1899, in February to be precise. He was surrounded by Dutch soldiers and inevitably had to fight to escape from the invaders’ ambush. However, he failed and in the end had to breathe his last at the age of 45 years.

Overview of Cut Nyak Dhien

The death of Teuku Umar did not make the people of Aceh just give up in the face of the Dutch colonialists. Even though it had to stop for several years, the struggle of the Acehnese people was finally taken over by the wife of Teuku Umar, namely Cut Nyak Dhien.

Cut Nyak Dhien was born in 1848 again with an unknown date and month. In 1880, he married the figure who led the Aceh War, namely Teuku Umar. The two of them fought against the Dutch as husband and wife before Teuku Umar died in 1899 after being besieged by the Dutch.

With this, Cut Nyak Dhien fought alone to lead troops in Aceh to expel the Dutch colonialists. Unfortunately, due to his old age, he is not able to do much. After being arrested and exiled to Sumedang, Cut Nyak Dhien died on November 6, 1908.

History of the Aceh War

The Aceh War itself actually took place since 1873 and is known to have ended in 1915. During the war, several times the Dutch and the people of Aceh alternated leadership in which the two camps tried to conquer the other camp.

Like the several wars previously mentioned, the people of Aceh fought using guerrilla tactics to make things difficult for the Dutch. Meanwhile, from the Dutch side, they used various kinds of technology, weapons and resources at their disposal to defeat Aceh.

When Teuku Umar led the Aceh War, he pretended to be on the Dutch side several times so that the Acehnese could get weapons supplies to fight the invaders. This tactic proved successful several times, before finally being surrounded by Dutch troops and shot dead.

After Teuku Umar died, Cut Nyak Dhien led a relatively small army to continue the struggle against the Dutch. Unfortunately these troops failed to make a big impact, due to the fact that their numbers were indeed small and not enough to fight the Dutch, as well as the fact that the Dutch were used to fighting against Aceh’s tactics and on the battlefield.

After the arrest of Cut Nyak Dhien, the Aceh War was still being continued by a number of groups in the region. However, almost none of them could make a big impact on the Dutch colonialists. Finally, this war was really considered over in 1915.

Related Book Recommendations

This is an article that discusses the Pattimura War and a number of other archipelago wars. To find out more about the history behind this war. Sinaumed’s can read books such as the recommended books below.

1. Padri War in West Sumatra (1803-1838)

2. Chronicle of the Java War 1825-1830

3. Kapitang Pattimura – Son of Hulaliu Country

History of Islamic Culture – In Indonesia, Islam is the majority religion with an estimated number of adherents of more than half of the population. Moreover, coupled with the many historical relics of Islamic culture in the archipelago. This is what then encourages many interested people to finally research and learn much more deeply about the history of Islamic culture in Indonesia.

The formation of Islamic religious traditions originating from the cultures of various countries, ultimately makes Islam in Indonesia have a culture that originates from the acculturation of certain cultures. So, how is the history of Islamic culture in Indonesia? Here’s a further explanation.

Early History of the Entry of Islam to Indonesia

According to Thomas Walker Arnold, it is quite difficult to determine exactly when Islam entered Indonesia. However, since the 2nd century BC, Ceylon people have traded and entered in the 7th century AD. Ceylon people then experienced rapid progress in terms of trade with the Chinese. By the middle of the 8th century, the Arabs had wandered all the way to Canton.

When Islam entered Indonesia, it had been going on since the 7th and 8th centuries AD. However, the development of da’wah only started in the 11th and 12th centuries. So that means, preaching in the archipelago has indeed spanned several centuries in the early days.

Theories About the Entry of Islam to Indonesia

Meanwhile, according to Ahmad Mansur Suryanegara, there are three major theories that explain the entry of Islam into Indonesia. Here’s an explanation.

1. Indian Theory or Gujarat Theory

The Indian theory reveals that Islam in Indonesia came from the Indian region, namely Gujarat. So when is the period when Islam came from India? It is estimated that around the 13th century by Muslim traders originally from India.

Snouck Hurgronje is one of the figures who put forward this Indian theory. What, then, is the evidence for the correctness of the Indian theory?

The proof is the discovery of a tombstone left by Sultan Malik Al-Saleh in 1297. The stone has the same characteristics as the tombstones in the Gujarat area.

In addition, the tomb of one of the Wali Songo named Maulana Malik Ibrahim also has the same tombstone characteristics as the tomb of Sultan Malik Al-Saleh.

In addition to evidence in the form of tomb remains, there is also other evidence from the Indian theory. Other evidence is in the form of travel notes written by Marco Polo, a merchant from Venice who visited the Perlak area, Aceh in 1292.

In Marco Polo’s report, it was stated that there was a Muslim community that had just been established in Perlak by Moorish traders.

If you pay attention further, there are many major events that occurred in the 12th century in various other parts of the world. For example, with the assumption that Islam entered Indonesia in the 13th century, then in the same century, under the leadership of Genghis Khan, the Mongols succeeded and controlled most of Asia.

His empire then stretched from the Pacific Ocean to Europe or to be precise at this time called Hungary. Then, was Indonesia once under the rule of Genghis Khan? If not, why did this happen?

From this Indian theory, an Arab or Meccan theory emerged which denied that Islam entered Indonesia through India. Here’s an explanation.

2. Arab Theory or Mecca Theory

The Arab theory explains that Islam entered the archipelago from the 7th century. Much earlier than the Indian theory. Spreading the teachings of Islam in the archipelago, was caused by the arrival of Arab traders who had the aim of spreading Islamic teachings in Indonesia.

One of the figures who put forward this Arab figure was Buya Hamka. In his book entitled History of Muslims, published in 1997, Buya Hamka argued that the arrival of Islam in Indonesia had evidence that the source was an ancient Chinese manuscript and its contents stated that there was a group of Arabs living on the west coast of Sumatra in 624.

Not only that, in an area called Barus which was then within the territory of the Sriwijaya Kingdom, a tombstone with the name of Sheikh Rukunuddin was found who died in 672 AD. the same period as this Meccan theory.

3. The Persian theory

The third theory of the entry of Islam into Indonesia is the Persian theory. This theory is supported by several figures, one of which is Hoesein Djajadiningrat.

According to Persian theory, the origins of the presence of Islam in the archipelago came from the Persian region in the 13th century. According to Persian theory, the Islamic religious culture in Indonesia and the Islamic culture in Persia have many similarities.

The visible evidence is the existence of the Tabot event in the Bengkulu area and Tabuik in West Sumatra which are usually held on the 10th of Muharram and have similarities to one of the rituals in Persia.

In addition, the calligraphy on tombstones in Indonesia is also said to have similarities with tombstones in Persia.

Apart from the 3 theories above, there are also those who say that Islamic religious teachings entered Indonesia based on Chinese theory, along with a full explanation.

4. Chinese theory

The final theory about the entry of Islam into Indonesia is the Chinese theory. According to Chinese theory, Islamic religious teachings developed in China during the Tang Dynasty, namely around 618 AD to 905 AD and Islamic religious teachings were brought by a Muslim commander named Saad bin Waqash who came from Medina and was during the caliphate of Uthman bin Affan.

This China theory was coined by Slamet Mulyana and Sumanto Al Qurtuby who considered that Islam in the archipelago came from one of the areas that became the center of the propagation of Islam in China, namely in the Canton region.

It was from this area that the preachers who had existed for a long time spread Islamic teachings to the archipelago, especially in the Palembang area. The number of high-ranking officials from the Demak Sultanate to Wali Songo who came from ethnic Chinese descent, is one proof of this Chinese theory. One of them is Raden Patah who has a Chinese name, namely Jin Bun.

History of Islamic Culture in Indonesia

After knowing how the history or origins of Islam entered Indonesia, which was put forward with four major theories, it’s time to discuss the history of Islamic culture. Islamic culture is a culture that highly upholds human values, morals and of course religion and matters that are closely related to the history of the development of Islam itself.

The history of Islamic culture in Indonesia originates from the first Islamic empire in Indonesia which brought and spread Islamic teachings through trade.

The history of Islam in Indonesia is widely known since several Islamic-style kingdoms began to exist in the archipelago. Examples include the Kingdom of Samudera Pasai, the Kingdom of Demak to the Kingdom of Mataram. Here’s an explanation.

1. Kingdom of Demak

The Kingdom of Demak was the first Islamic kingdom in Java. This kingdom was founded by Raden Patah in 1478. The Demak kingdom grew rapidly and became a trading center as well as a center for the spread of Islamic teachings in Java at that time.

The spread of Islam at that time was greatly influenced by the services of the saints, both on the island of Java and those outside Java such as Maluku to areas in East Kalimantan.

During the reign of Raden Patah, the kingdom of Demak had built a mosque which at that time was assisted by the saints or sunan. Then the culture that developed in the Demak kingdom also received support from the trustees, especially from Sunan Kalijaga.

The life of the people living around the Kingdom of Demak has also been regulated by Islamic religious regulations, but these regulations still do not abandon the old traditions of community property.

During the period of the Islamic kingdoms in Java, there was a political and religious transformation from the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms to the Islamic kingdoms in Java.

2. Pasai Ocean Kingdom

The kingdom of Samudera Pasai is in Aceh and is the first Islamic kingdom in Indonesia. The kingdom of Samudera Pasai was founded by Meurah Silu in 1267 AD. After converting to Islam, Meurah Silu later changed its name to Malik Al Saleh and had the title Sultan Malik Al Saleh.

Sultan Malik Al Saleh ruled in 128501297. During his reign, he was visited by a traveler from Italy in 1292 named Marcopolo.

Through notes written by Marcopolo, it is known that the king of Samudera Pasai has the title of Sultan.

The royal territory became the first area in the archipelago visited by traders and sailors. This is due to Indonesia’s strategic location and being on international trade routes, namely on the northern coast of Sumatra, to be precise, near the city of Lhokseumawe, Aceh.

The Kingdom of Samudera Pasai succeeded in reaching its peak of glory during the reign of Sultan Mahmud Malik Az-Zahir, also known as Sultan Malik al Tahir II.

During its heyday, Samudera Pasai established relations with Islamic empires in India and Arabia. Apart from that, the Samudera Pasai kingdom also issued gold currency which was later called dirhams and was used officially as royal money.

The Samudera Pasai Kingdom was not only a trading center, but also a center for the development of Islam in the archipelago.

3. Islamic Mataram Kingdom

There were two Mataram Kingdoms in Indonesia. The first is the Ancient Mataram Kingdom which was founded in the 8th century and was a Hindu-Buddhist kingdom. Then there was the Islamic Mataram Kingdom which was founded in 1586.

The Islamic Mataram Kingdom is located in Kota Gede, to be precise, in the southeast of the city of Yogyakarta. This one kingdom stands around the flow of the Opak and Progo Rivers, whose waters empties into the South Sea.

The Palace of the Islamic Mataram Kingdom, believed by its inhabitants to be the center of the world. The people at that time called this kingdom the center of the universe. In Yogyakarta, the historical heritage sites of the Islamic Mataram Kingdom are the Kerto Site, the Pleret Site and Kotagede Site.

The death of Sultan Hadiwijaya or Jaka Tingkir in 1582 made the cities on the coast continue to strengthen themselves. Prince Benowo, the son of Sultan Hadiwijaya, apparently could not handle the movement of the city.

The prince then handed over his power to the Kingdom of Pajang to Sutawijaya. With this surrender, the Pajang Kingdom became the territory of the Mataram Kingdom.

The Islamic Mataram Kingdom reached its peak during the reign of Sultan Agung Hanyokrokusumo who ruled from 1613 to 1645. He was the third king after Panembahan Sedo Krapyak.

The geographical location of the kingdom which was inland made the Mataram Kingdom an agrarian kingdom. Agriculture has also become the main source of the economy for the community and is growing rapidly because it is supported by fertile soil.

Even though they rely on agriculture as their economic center, not a few people carry out trading activities at sea. These two economic activities eventually developed rapidly and made Mataram have a role in the world of politics.

Due to its heyday, the Mataram Kingdom succeeded in developing the Kejawen Culture in the archipelago and this culture is a form of acculturation of Hindu-Buddhist culture and Islamic religious teachings.

Legacy of Islamic Cultural History in Indonesia

The historical heritage of Islamic culture in Indonesia generally comes from the Islamic kingdoms that once existed and triumphed in the archipelago. This royal period lasted from the 840s with the establishment of the first Islamic empire, namely the Perlak Sultanate, until 1903 with the collapse of the Aceh Sultanate, due to the occupation of the Dutch East Indies colonial government.

Of course, this civilization that has lasted for more than a thousand years has produced many relics that can still be seen, observed or witnessed today.

There are three categories of historical heritage of Islamic culture in Indonesia, namely mosques, palaces and tombs. These three relics indirectly become one of the proofs that the Islamic empire had existed in the past.

This is what makes today’s Indonesian people aware that a thousand years ago, there was an Islamic empire in the archipelago. The following is an explanation of the historical heritage of Islamic culture in the archipelago.

1. Mosque

At that time, the mosque was not only used as a place of worship for Muslims, but was also used to spread Islamic teachings. If you pay attention, the mosque has quite unique characteristics, namely it has a porch, towers, a pool with a terraced roof and has a square-like shape and is located in the city and faces the main square.

One example of a mosque that can still be visited today is the Great Mosque of Demak. The mosque is a legacy of the Demak Sultanate and is the oldest mosque on the island of Java. The mosque was founded by Raden Patah in 1477.

2. Palace

The palace is a symbol and center of power. The palace has the characteristics of a building surrounded by fences, rivers and moats. One example is the Kasepuhan Palace in Cirebon.

3. Tomb

Jirat or gravestone or tomb or tombstone is a characteristic of the Islamic empire at that time. For this reason, the tomb became one of the historical heritages of Islamic culture by Islamic empires in the archipelago. One example of a tomb is the mausoleum of Maulana Malik Ibrahim in Gapura Village, Gresik.

That is an explanation of the history of Islamic culture and its historical evidence or legacy. If Sinaumed’s is interested in knowing more about the history of Islamic culture, then Sinaumed’s can dig deeper by reading books.

Symbol of Pancasila – Every June 1, the Indonesian nation commemorates the Birthday of Pancasila, the foundation of the Republic of Indonesia. The government also made June 1 a national holiday so that people would not forget the history of Pancasila.

In language, the name Pancasila is a combination of two words in Sanskrit, namely “Panca” which means five and “Sila” which means principles or principles. Thus, Pancasila means guidelines and formulas for the life of the nation and state for all Indonesian people.

Pancasila is composed of five main ideologies listed in the 4th paragraph of the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution, namely:

1. Belief in the one and only God
2. Just and civilized humanity
3. the unity of Indonesia
4. Population led by wisdom in deliberations/representations
5. Social justice for all the people of Indonesia

These guidelines and formulas for the life of the nation and state were not born by themselves. He was born from the sweat and tears of Indonesian freedom fighters. This was confirmed by Ir. Soekarno in his speech:

“I did not say that I created Pancasila. All I did was dig deep into our earth, our own traditions and I found five beautiful pearls.”

It has been 77 years since Pancasila has become a symbol of unity and a guideline for the life of the nation and state. As the next generation, we must practice and reflect Pancasila values ​​in our daily lives.

Therefore, in this article we will discuss what are the values ​​contained in Pancasila so that Sinaumed’s can know and understand them well.

The History of the Birth of Pancasila

The history of the birth of Pancasila began with the formation of the Indonesian Independence Preparatory Investigation Agency (BPUPKI) on March 1, 1945. At that time, Dr. Kanjeng Raden Tumenggung Radjiman Wedyodiningrat as chairperson asked members of the assembly about the shape of the basis of the Indonesian state.

Then on May 29, 1945, BPUPKI held its first meeting with an agenda to discuss the basis of the Indonesian State. This meeting was held at the Chuo Sangi In building which is located at Jalan Pejambon 6, Jakarta or now better known as the Pancasila Building.

In that meeting, Muhammad Yamin proposed the formulation of the five foundations of the state which consisted of:

• Nationality
• Humanity
• Fairy Godhead
• Citizenship
• and, People’s Welfare

According to M. Yamin, the formula is rooted in history, religion, civilization and state administration that have developed in Indonesia for a long time. However, this formulation is still doubted by Mohammad Hatta.

On June 1, 1945, Ir. Soekarno in his speech entitled “The Birth of Pancasila”, proposed Pancasila as the basis of the Indonesian state which was composed of:

1. Indonesian Nationality or Nationalism
2. Humanity or Internationalism
3. Consensus or Democracy
4. Social welfare
5. Cultural divinity

Before the first trial ended, BPUPKI formed a Committee of Nine consisting of Ir. Soekarno, Mohammad Hatta, AA Maramis, Abikoesno Tjoksoejoso, Abdul Kahar Muzakir, Agus Salim, Achmad Soebardjo, Wahid Hasyim and Mohammad Yamin.

Sinaumed’s could read the speeches of Muhammad Yamin and Ir. Sukarno completely and understood the main points of his thoughts in the book Birth of Pancasila: Collection of BPUPKI Speeches written by Floriberta Aning. By reading the main thoughts of the founding fathers when formulating the basis of the independent Indonesian state, Sinaumed’s can know how clear and original their thoughts are.

This small committee was given the task of reformulating Pancasila as the basis of the state and drafting a Constitution based on Bung Karno’s speech. Apart from that, they also used the documents as text to proclaim Indonesian Independence.

After going through that long process, finally the formulation of Pancasila was successfully perfected. At the PPKI meeting which was held on August 18, 1945, the final formulation of Pancasila was ratified as the basis of the Indonesian State and included in the Preamble of the 1945 Constitution.

There are several stipulation documents in the Pancasila Formula, namely:

• Jakarta Charter – 22 June 1945
• Preamble of the 1945 Constitution – August 18, 1945
• Introduction/Preamble to the Constitution of the United States of Indonesia – 27 December 1949
• Introduction/Preamble to the Provisional Constitution – 15 August 1950
• The Jakarta Charter animates the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution and is a continuum with the Constitution – Presidential Decree 5 July 1959

The Meaning of the Pancasila Symbol

1. Garuda bird

Pancasila has the symbol of the Garuda bird with spreading wings and a head that turns to the right. There is an important meaning behind this symbol. Garuda bird is the King of all birds which symbolizes strength. Then the wings that expand symbolize dynamic motion and enthusiasm to uphold the good name of the nation and state of Indonesia.

Meanwhile, the head that turns to the right shows the State of Indonesia as the right country. Because the right direction is considered as a symbol of the right path. As explained by Yudi Latief in his book entitled Pancasila Insights – Comprehensive Edition.

This book discusses Pancasila with a variety of approaches that are more interesting, creative and holistic, while still placing Pancasila as a dynamic guiding star in responding to increasingly complex social and global dynamics.

2. The Garuda bird’s foot grip

The inscription Bhinneka Tunggal Ika on the foot of the Garuda Bird comes from Old Javanese which means “different but still one”. This is the motto or motto of the Indonesian nation as a nation which consists of various ethnicities, cultures, religions but in essence is one unit.

3. Gold Color

The gold color is the main color of the Garuda bird because it symbolizes majesty. Thus, the Indonesian nation must uphold the noble and noble dignity of the nation.

Apart from the gold color, there are also other colors on the Garuda bird as stated in Article 49 of Law Number 24 of 2009. These colors consist of red on the upper right and lower left of the shield, white on the upper left and lower right of the shield, black in the middle of the heart-shaped shield and natural colors for all images of the emblem.

4. Number of Feathers

The number of feathers on the wings, tail and neck of the Garuda Pancasila bird symbolizes the birth of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

On the right and left wings, there are 17 feathers that show the date of Indonesian independence. On the tail, there are 8 strands of feathers which indicate the month of Indonesian independence.

At the bottom of the shield necklace that connects to the tail there are 19 strands of bulus and on the neck there are 45. The number of these feathers shows the number 1945, the year of Indonesia’s independence.

When combined, the numbers above show August 17, 1945 which has historical meaning for us, where to build an awareness process for every Indonesian citizen, we must always respect time and remember history.

5. Shield

The shield symbolizes protection and struggle because shields are often used on the battlefield by soldiers to protect themselves from enemy attacks.

There is a transverse line in the Garuda bird’s shield that divides the shield into two parts, namely the top and bottom. The line describes the Equator which divides the Indonesian Archipelago.

The upper and lower shield space is further divided into 5 sections which in it symbolize the five precepts of Pancasila.

a. The Meaning of the 1st Precept Symbol

This symbol is in the shape of a star which represents the Light that comes from God and is given to every human being. The black color on the star describes the color of nature which has God – the source of everything that existed before the existence of this world – not the result of human creation.

b. The Meaning of the 2nd Precept Symbol

The symbol of the second precept is in the form of a chain consisting of rectangular and circular links that are interconnected with each other to form a circle. This linkage indicates that the Indonesian nation is a nation that works hand in hand and needs one another.

c. Meaning of the Symbol of the 3rd Sila

The symbol of the 3rd precept is in the form of a banyan tree, a large tree that can be used as shade by many people. This is correlated with the Indonesian state which is the shelter of all the people under the auspices of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

The banyan tree also has stems or tendrils and roots that spread in all directions which depict the diversity of ethnic groups that unite.

d. Meaning of the 4th Precept Symbol

The symbol of sila-4 is in the shape of a bull’s head. The bull is an animal that often gathers, so this symbol means that Indonesian people like to gather together to do something, such as deliberations to discuss in order to reach a good decision.

e. Meaning of the 5th Precept Symbol

The last symbol of the precepts is in the form of Rice and Cotton which are symbols of food and clothing. This symbol represents the main requirement of a country, which is fair and able to achieve prosperity for all its people.

The Benefits of Studying the Values ​​of the Pancasila Symbol

We must learn the values ​​behind the Pancasila symbols so that we can apply them in everyday life. That way, we will get real benefits and become the next generation expected by our predecessors.

So, what are the benefits that we can feel after learning the values ​​behind the Pancasila symbol? Look carefully at the answers below:

1. Instill the noble values ​​of Pancasila

Pancasila is the foundation of the Indonesian nation’s ideology. Even the laws and regulations in Indonesia also refer to the values ​​contained therein. This shows that Pancasila is the most noble foundation in Indonesia.

Therefore, Pancasila education is very important to be given from an early age to children so that they understand and understand the values ​​of Pancasila which can be applied in everyday life.

2. Help understand the true meaning of Pancasila

There are still many of us who do not understand the true meaning of Pancasila in depth. Perhaps many have memorized the five precepts contained in Pancasila, but this is different from understanding the true meaning of the five precepts.

That is why, Pancasila education must be taught from the elementary school level up to the university level. The goal is that we as Indonesian citizens can correctly understand the meaning of Pancasila as the nation’s ideology.

3. Increasing love for the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia

In the life of the state, there is a close relationship between Pancasila values ​​and the people. Therefore, it is important for us as Indonesian citizens to love this ideological basis. If not, we will find it difficult to love this country.

By studying the values ​​contained in the Pancasila symbol, indirectly we will get to know Indonesia more deeply. This is why Pancasila education is important to be given to all Indonesian citizens.

4. Behave in accordance with the contents of the Pancasila points

Pancasila consists of five different precepts. Each precept has precepts that are in charge of explaining it. By studying the values ​​contained in Pancasila, we can behave according to the contents of the Pancasila points.

By understanding and practicing Pancasila values, we can also become good and responsible citizens in accordance with the ideological foundation of the Indonesian nation.

5. Can practice Pancasila in all situations

The values ​​and points contained in Pancasila are a good thing in the life of the nation and state. We as Indonesian citizens can practice these noble values ​​and points in our daily lives so that we can behave in accordance with Pancasila.

Thus, we can become good and responsible citizens in accordance with the ideological foundation of the Indonesian nation.

6. As a guide to be a good citizen

Pancasila is a guidebook for us. This handbook contains five important points that help us to be good citizens. If we never learn about how to be good citizens, we will not be of any use to people’s lives.

Therefore, it is important to learn the values ​​of Pancasila in order to become citizens who are useful for the nation and state.

7. Building the character of a dignified citizen

In addition to the ideological basis for the State, Pancasila is also a reflection of the characteristics of Indonesian society. This character is formed from the values ​​of Pancasila which are put to good use so that the Indonesian people become citizens with dignity and integrity in living the life of the nation and state.

8. Realizing a moral life

Moral becomes something that is difficult to obtain. We can realize a moral life by understanding and learning the values ​​of Pancasila. The creation of conditions for a moral society is very important so that the atmosphere of community life becomes full of tolerance, harmony and tolerance.

Moral is an absolute thing that must be owned by all humans. If not, then there is no positive value left from it.

Find other explanations regarding the benefits of studying the value of the Pancasila symbol in the book Pancasila Characteristic People compiled by Dr. Silverius Y. Soeharso, SE, MM, Psychologist.

Application of Pancasila Values ​​and Symbols

1. Value of Belief in the One and Only God

• Have faith in God Almighty
• Recognizing freedom of religion and worship according to their respective religions
• Give thanks to God Almighty for all His blessings and gifts
• Respect the harmony between adherents of religion
• Do not impose a religion and belief on others

2. Fair and Civilized Human Values

• Love fellow human beings and participate in humanitarian activities
• Recognizing and implementing equal rights and obligations as well as human dignity
• Develop an attitude of tolerance
• Uphold human attitudes and values

3. Value of Indonesian Unity

• Placing unity, unity without prioritizing personal or group interests
• Teach love and pride in the motherland
• Willing to sacrifice for the nation and the country
• Cooperate in the interests of the nation and the state
• Maintain world order based on freedom, eternal peace and social justice
• Developing Indonesian unity based on Bhineka Tunggal Ika

4. Community values ​​led by wisdom in representative deliberations

• In deciding the problem should give priority to deliberation
• Carry out the results of the deliberations
• Do not impose personal will on others
• Prioritizing the interests of the Indonesian people and state

5. The Value of Social Justice for All Indonesian People

• Be fair between rights and obligations
• Mutual respect for the rights of others
• Be fair to others
• Give help to others
• Doing work that is useful for the common good

It can be concluded that Pancasila is the crystallization of the nation’s noble values ​​which, if properly implemented, will bring benefits to us. Therefore, let’s start practicing divine values, human values, unity values, social values ​​and justice values ​​in ourselves from an early age.

Find other examples of the application of Pancasila values ​​in daily life in the book Pancasila, the Basic Philosophy of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia and Spirit of Mental Revolution, written by MA, Prof. Em. Dr. Tarcisius Michael Soerjanto Poespowardojo.

This book, which elaborates on Pancasila as an Indonesian philosophy on the one hand and on the spirit of mental revolution that can be contributed by it on the other hand, is truly valuable for the treasury of studies related to Pancasila in the current context of our nation’s life.

Thus the discussion about the symbol of Pancasila. Hopefully all the discussion above can add to your insight. If you want to find books about Pancasila, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Location of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom – Maybe here are among the Sinaumed’s who don’t really like history lessons. Usually, some of the reasons why students don’t like this subject are not far from the boring subject matter coupled with the less exciting way the teacher explains.

It is only natural that some of you are not very interested in studying history. However, don’t let Sinaumed’s think that studying history, especially Indonesian history, is of no use. You need to know that there are many benefits that can be obtained after studying Indonesian history.

Indonesia is a country rich in ethnicity and culture. This is also inseparable from the history of the nation which began with the many kingdoms of various styles scattered throughout the archipelago. You can conclude that studying this can help you understand Indonesian culture and culture as a whole.

For this reason, in this article, Sinaumed’s will try to study one of the oldest kingdoms in Indonesia, namely the Ancient Mataram Kingdom. You will learn various things such as the history and location of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, the collapse of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom and who were the leaders of this kingdom.

Hopefully, besides this article being able to provide the information Sinaumed’s needs, this article can also open your eyes about the importance of studying history and prove that there are many historical events in Indonesia that you need to learn about.

History and Location of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom

We will start with basic information regarding the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, before going into important matters related to this kingdom. Basically, the Ancient Mataram Kingdom was a kingdom with Hindu and Buddhist styles that developed from the 8th century to the 11th century.

The location of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom was in Central Java before finally moving to East Java. This kingdom was originally founded by King Sanjaya, and his throne was continued by a number of Syailendra dynasties and Isyana dynasties after the death of the kingdom’s founder.

The word “Mataram” itself is taken from the Sanskrit “Matr” which means “mother”. Many historians describe the Ancient Mataram Kingdom as the personification of a mother figure who symbolizes life, nature and the environment.

Besides being known as “Ancient Mataram”, this kingdom is also widely known as “Medang” by the Javanese. The term Medang arose from various inscriptions found in various locations around Central Java and also in East Java.

Upon further examination, the word Medang apparently refers to a palace called the Medang palace which is located in the Mataram Kingdom. The etymology or origin of the name “Medang” is thought to come from the name of the “medang” tree, a tree originating from that area which is known to be hard and sturdy.

Many historical observers say that the economy of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom was very dependent on agriculture, especially rice farming. The Ancient Mataram Kingdom also benefited from maritime trade to a number of kingdoms from other countries.

In addition, according to foreign sources and archaeological findings, the Ancient Mataram Kingdom was thought to have had a large population and not a few of them were quite prosperous. This kingdom is examined to develop a society that has a complex personality and culture.

This was the reason behind the level of sophistication that the Ancient Mataram Kingdom possessed compared to other kingdoms and their refined civilization. Entering the late 8th century, this kingdom witnessed the development of classical Javanese art and architecture which was reflected in the rapid construction of temples.

Some of the most famous temples built in Mataram are Kalasan Temple, Sewu Temple, even Borobudur Temple and Prambanan Temple, all of which are quite close to the city of Yogyakarta. All of these temples are known to have been built during the era of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom.

At its peak, the Ancient Mataram Kingdom had become the dominant kingdom. They have abundant natural and human resources and are quite feared not only on the island of Java, but also on the island of Sumatra, Bali and even other countries such as Thailand, India, the Philippines, Cambodia.

The Collapse of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom

The Ancient Mataram Kingdom experienced a very extraordinary period during their heyday. Even though they had moved locations due to outside invasions in the 10th century, they were still able to continue living in peace even though they had to move from Central Java to East Java.

Even so, in the end the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, which was so powerful in its time, experienced its downfall. The reason behind the collapse of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom was basically due to the war they waged against the Sriwijaya Kingdom.

Sinaumed’s needs to know that at that time, there was a Buddhist kingdom which was also known for its power and was located in South Sumatra, around Palembang City to be precise. The kingdom referred to here is none other than the Sriwijaya Kingdom.

At the end of the 10th century, it is suspected that the rivalry between the Sriwijaya Kingdom and the Javanese Ancient Mataram Kingdom became hotter than before. Some experts even suspect that these two kingdoms are hostile to each other. There are a number of reasons behind the enmity of these two great empires.

In 990, Dharmawangsa, King of the Mataram Kingdom at the time, launched a naval invasion against Srivijaya in an attempt to take Palembang. Evidence of the Javanese invasion of Srivijaya is recorded in the historical records of the Chinese in the Song period.

At that time, an envoy from Sriwijaya was sent to the Chinese court in Guangzhou in 988. After spending about two years in China, the envoy learned that his country had been invaded by the Javanese and prevented him from returning home.

King Dharmawangsa’s attack on the Sriwijaya Kingdom made the Maharaja of Sriwijaya, Sri Cudamani Warmadewa seek protection from China. At that time, Sri Cudamani Warmadewa was a capable, shrewd ruler who had diplomatic skills.

The ingenuity and ability possessed by the Maharaja made him able to get further breaths. In the midst of a crisis caused by the invasion of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, Sri Cudamani Warmadewa won Chinese political support by pacifying the Chinese Emperor.

The attack of King Dharmawangsa against Sriwijaya in the 990s did not have much effect on the sovereignty and prestige of the Srivijaya Kingdom. And in the end, the Srivijaya Kingdom succeeded in repelling the invasion and regaining control of its kingdom around 1003.

In fact, it was the Sriwijaya Kingdom that was able to launch an attack on the Ancient Mataram Kingdom. Then, the attack from the Srivijaya Kingdom on the Ancient Mataram Kingdom was not what Sinaumed’s had imagined. This is because this attack was initiated by a coup by members of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom.

Haji Wurawari, one of the leaders in the ancient Mataram Kingdom, rebelled against his superiors. He launched an invasion from Lwaram, attacking and destroying the Palace in Mataram. This event ended with the death of King Dharmawangsa and most of the royal family.

With the death of King Dharmawangsa and the fall of the capital city, under the military pressure of Hani Wurawari, the Ancient Mataram Kingdom which was known for its power and prosperity from the past, finally collapsed and fell into chaos.

Added to this was the absence of the supreme ruler of Mataram, the warlords in many regional provinces and settlements in Central and East Java rebelled, wanting to break away from the central Mataram government and form self-government serving local dynasties.

List of Leaders of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom

How about it, Sinaumed’s? After reading a fairly detailed explanation about the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, there are many lessons that you can learn from the story of the kingdom’s superiority, both from a moral, historical and cultural perspective.

From the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, you can see how people lived at that time. Even though they rely on farming and farming, they can live and prosper from these activities. This is strong evidence behind Indonesia’s nickname as an agricultural country.

The many temples around Central Java and East Java are also important relics of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom for Indonesian people and are also clear evidence of the spread of Buddhism and Hinduism in Indonesia at that time.

And there are many more things that Sinaumed’s can find in the existence of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom. In this last session, we will try to discuss the leaders of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom from time to time before it finally collapsed due to a coup.

It is known that at least 20 leaders of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom from time to time. Discussing the achievements and lives of these leaders one by one will take a lot of time. So, you will read the leader’s name, leadership period and evidence that this figure once occupied the highest throne of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom.

 

Name of King/Leader	Leadership Period	Leadership Records
Sanjaya	716 AD – 746 AD	It is recorded in the Canggal Inscription (732), Mantyasih Inscription (907) and Taji Gunung Inscription (910)
Dyah Pancapana	746 AD – 784 AD	It is recorded in the Kalasan Inscription (778), Kelurak Inscription (782), Abhayagiri Inscription (792), Mantyasih Inscription (907), and Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Rakai Panaraban	784 AD – 803 AD	Recorded in the Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Manara	803 AD – 827 AD	Recorded in the Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Sugar	827 AD – 829 AD	Recorded in the Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Rakai Garuŋ	829 AD – 847 AD	Recorded in the Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Saladu	847 AD – 855 AD	It is recorded in the Shivagrha Inscription (856), Mantyasih Inscription (907), and Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Lokapala	855 AD – 885 AD	It is recorded in the Shivagrha Inscription (856), Salingsingan Inscription (880), Wuatan Tija Inscription (880), Ngabean Inscription (882), Mantyasih Inscription (907), and Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Tagwas	885 AD – 885 AD	Recorded in the Er Warm Inscription (888) and the Middle Wanua Inscription (908)
Dyah Dewendra	885 AD – 887 AD	Recorded in the Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Bhadra	887 AD – 887 AD	Recorded in the Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Jbang	894 AD – 898 AD	Recorded in the Wanua Tengah Inscription (908)
Dyah Balitung	898 AD – 908 AD	It is recorded in the Chicken Teas inscription (900), Taji inscription (901), Watukura inscription (902), Telang inscription (904), Kubu inscription (905), Poh inscription (905), Rukam inscription (907), Mantyasih inscription (907) , Middle Wanua Inscription (908) and Kaladi Inscription (909)
Dyah Daksotama	908 AD – 919 AD	It is recorded in the Panggumulan Inscription (902), Rumwiga Inscription (905), Palepangan Inscription (906), Reinforcement Inscription (910) and Tihang Inscription (914)
Dyah Tulodhong	919 AD – 924 AD	Recorded in the Sukabumi Inscription (804) and the Linntak Inscription (919)
Dyah Wawa	924 AD – 929 AD	Recorded in the Sukabumi Inscription (927), Sangguran Inscription (928) and Wulakan Inscription (928)
Dyah Sindok	929 AD – 947 AD	It is recorded in the Linntak inscription (919), Turyyan inscription (929), Linggasutan inscription (929), Gulung inscription (929), Jru Jru inscription (930), Anjukladang inscription (937) and Wurandungan inscription (944)
Isyanatungga	947 AD – 985 AD	It is recorded in the Gedangan Inscription (950) and the Pucangan Inscription (1041)
Makutawangsa	985 AD – 990 AD	Recorded in the Pucangan Inscription (1041)
Dharmawangsa	990 AD – 1016 AD	Recorded in the Pucangan Inscription (1041)

Perhaps some of the Sinaumed’s were surprised to see how many inscriptions were used to record the names of the Kings of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, considering that the names of these inscriptions were not necessarily mentioned in history lessons at school.

However, Sinaumed’s needs to remember here that not all the Kings of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom had qualified achievements during their heyday. Some of them only work as successors to the throne and there are even kings who don’t serve for a long time.

This is the reason why you don’t learn all the names of the kings not only from the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, but also other kingdoms. Usually, the kings mentioned in history textbooks have played an important role, both in the progress of the kingdom and in the decline or even the collapse of the kingdom.

Returning to the topic of the Ancient Mataram Kingdom, the discussion regarding the names of the kings who occupied the royal throne concludes this article. Sinaumed’s has obtained various kinds of information about the Ancient Mataram Kingdom starting from the location, history to the reasons for the collapse of the kingdom.

Hopefully this article can be an article that gives you useful insights both now and in the future. Hopefully Sinaumed’s can find the information you need regarding the Ancient Mataram Kingdom.

Apart from that, the hope is that Sinaumed’s can open his eyes more and realize how important it is to study history, especially Indonesian history. There is a lot of interesting and informative information that you can get if you study history carefully.

The recommended books above are offered by us, sinaumedia #Friends Without Limits. You can buy and find not only these books, but also other books according to your interests on the sinaumedia.com site . Hopefully the existence of these books can add to your insight and knowledge #MoreWithReading.

Author: M. Adrianto S. 

Genealogy of the Majapahit Kingdom – The Majapahit Kingdom was once the largest empire in the history of the Indonesian people and the Archipelago. This Hindu-Buddhist kingdom itself began in 1293 until its collapse in 1527 AD with a series of well-known leaders in the history of the genealogy of its kings, starting from Raden Wijaya, Hayam Wuruk, to Brawijaya V.

The founder of Majapahit himself was Raden Wijaya (1293-1309) who was previously the warlord of the Singasari Kingdom and the favorite son-in-law of his last king, Kertanegara. After Kertanegara was killed in a Jayakatwang rebellion in 1292 which later led to the end of Singasari, Raden Wijaya and pioneered the establishment of a new government and became known as the Majapahit Kingdom.

Check out a more complete explanation of the Majapahit royal genealogy to its historical traces and heritage sites.

History of the Majapahit Empire

1. The Early & Glorious Period of the Majapahit Empire

At first Raden Wijaya cleared the forest on the banks of the Brantas River. This village then grew rapidly in 1293 and became a kingdom called Majapahit. The government center itself is in Trowulan, Mojokerto, East Java.

Raden Wijaya who is enthroned and has the title Kertarajasa Jayawardhana. Then, during the Jayanagara era (1309-1328), which was marked by a series of acts of rebellion, the situation in the Majapahit Kingdom slowly began to be conducive under the leadership of Tribhuwana Wijayatunggadewi (1328-1350).

Jayanagara and Tribhuwana are both sons of Raden Wijaya but have different mothers. Tribhuwana Wijayatunggadewi appointed Gajah Mada as prime minister. Gajah Mada then made his legendary pledge, namely the Amukti Palapa oath with the determination to reunite the regions throughout the archipelago under the banners of the Majapahit Empire. Gajah Mada took this Amukti Palapa Oath in front of Queen Tribhuwana Tunggadewi when Hayam Wuruk was just born

Gajah Mada’s oath was later realized in the next era, namely during the leadership of Hayam Wuruk or Sri Rajasanagara in 1350-1389. With the support of Gajah Mada, Hayam Wuruk was then able to bring the Majapahit Kingdom to its heyday.

Quoted from Purwadi’s The History of Javanese Kings (2010), during the era of the leadership of Hayam Wuruk and Gajah Mada, the Majapahit Kingdom itself did not only succeed in expanding its territory. Prosperity itself really felt all the people who took shelter under the banner of Majapahit.

However, with the death of Gajah Mada and Hayam Wuruk, the golden age of the Majapahit Empire began to fade. There was no leader who was really capable of making this empire’s resilience then falter, several conquered countries began to break away one by one.

2. The End of the Majapahit Kingdom

The rise of Queen Suhita (in 1429-1447) to the top of the throne then opened new hopes for Majapahit to begin its rise. During her leadership era, Queen Suhita intensively revived local wisdom which had been neglected during the turbulent times before she took the throne.

During the reign of Queen Suhita, it was marked by the return to power of the elements of the archipelago. Various places of worship were erected on mountain slopes, as well as buildings (temple) arranged as terraced punden, for example on the slopes of Mount Penanggungan, Mount Lawu, and so on.

Queen Suhita who died in 1447. Because Queen Suhita was not also blessed with offspring, Kertawijaya (1447-1451) was crowned as the next Majapahit ruler.

Kertawijaya, as the youngest brother of Queen Suhita, is the King of Majapahit who started using the name Brawijaya as a reminder of the kingdom’s founder, namely Raden Wijaya. However, the movement initiated by Queen Suhita could not be continued by her sister. The Majapahit Kingdom was then led by a series of kings who were not very capable so that it began to erode and showed signs of collapse.

The last days of Majapahit were getting closer when the emergence of the Sultanate of Demak in Central Java. The Demak Sultanate itself was the first Islamic kingdom in Java which was founded precisely by one of the princes from Majapahit by the name of Raden Patah.

Several later references say that Raden Patah was the son of Bhre Kertabhumi or Brawijaya V (his reign in 1468 -1478), a figure believed to be the last king of Majapahit. When Raden Patah later founded the Sultanate of Demak in 1468 AD together with the Wali Songo, the situation in Majapahit was in turmoil.

Majapahit was experiencing internal problems with the emergence of a rebellion carried out by Girindrawardhana, son-in-law of Brawijaya V. Finally, Girindrawardhana then managed to occupy the throne of the Majapahit Kingdom and held the title Brawijaya VI (reign 1478-1489).

Brawijaya VI was overthrown by his prime minister, Patih Air, in 1498. As a result of this conflict, the Majapahit Kingdom became weaker and lost legitimacy from its conquered territories. In 1517, the Demak Sultanate under the leadership of Pati Unus, the successor of Raden Patah, then attacked Majapahit, which at that time had moved its capital city to Daha (Kediri).

This invasion then paralyzed the Majapahit economy. A decade later, in 1527, Majapahit was completely destroyed. The attack of the Demak Sultanate, which at that time was led by Sultan Trenggana, the younger brother of Pati Unus, then ended the full history of Majapahit. After that, the Sultanate of Demak took over the remaining Majapahit territories and at the same time established itself as the new main power on the island of Java.

Genealogy of the Majapahit Kingdom

To find out about the genealogy of the kings who once ruled in the Majapahit Kingdom, historical evidence based on reliable sources is needed. We can know the sources of royal history from the various contents of the Butok inscriptions, the Pararaton book and the Negarakertagama book.

Based on this source, the following is a complete genealogy of the kings of the Majapahit Kingdom.

1. Raja Wijaya or Raden Wijaya

Raden Wijaya is the king and founder of the Majapahit Kingdom. He was the first king who reigned from 1293 to 1309 AD. The title of king he got was Kertajaya Jayawardhana.

2. King Jayanegara

This king was later known as the name “Kala Gemet”, he ruled the kingdom starting from 1309 to 1328 AD. The title of the king is Sri Jayanegara. During his reign he was famous for several rebellions, for example, the Ranggalawe rebellion.

3. Raja Sri Gitarja

This third King of the Majapahit Kingdom as a daughter of Gayatri. He ruled from 1328 to 1350 AD and had the title Tribhuwana Tunggadewi. During this time, the name Gajah Mada regent emerged and succeeded in defeating several rebellions, so that he was later appointed as the prime minister of Majapahit.

4. King Hayam Wuruk

Hayam Wuruk as the fourth king of the Majapahit Kingdom, he began to rule this kingdom at the very young age of 16 years. He ruled from 1350-1389 AD. The title of king he got was Sri Rajasanagara. When in power, the Majapahit Empire then managed to reach the peak of its glory.

5. King Wikramawardhana

He was the king who ruled the eastern part of the Majapahit Kingdom from 1389 to 1429 AD. He later died in 1429 AD.

6. Raja Suhita

King Suhita ruled this kingdom from 1429 to 1447 AD. The title of king he obtained was Dyah Ayu Kencana Wungu.

7. King Kertawijaya

The seventh king of the Majapahit kingdom is King Kertawijaya. He ruled the government of this kingdom in 1447 to 1451 AD. This king also has a fairly well-known title, namely Brawijaya I.

8. King Rajasawardhana

This king reigned from 1451 to 1453 AD. The title he got was Brawijaya II.

9. King Purwawisesa

King Purwawisesa reigned in the Majapahit Kingdom from 1456 to 1466 AD. This ninth king received the title Brawijaya III.

10. Raja Bhre Pandansalas

The next king of the Majapahit kingdom was Bhre Pandansalas. He ruled from 1466 to 1468 AD and had the title Brawijaya IV.

11. Raja Bhre Kertabumi

This 11th king is a king with the title Brawijaya V. He managed to rule the Majapahit kingdom for 10 years, from 1468 to 1478 AD.

12. King Girindrawardhana

Ruled from 1478 to 1498 AD with the title of Brawijaya VI 13. This last Raja or Patih Air King then ruled the kingdom from 1498 to 1518.

Sites of heritage inscriptions and historical traces of the Majapahit Empire

The Majapahit Empire left historical traces in the form of several inscriptions and remains scattered in various regions, including three points which were the center of its administration, namely Mojokerto, Trowulan, and Daha or Kediri.

The following are some of the relics of this legendary kingdom.

1. Wurare Inscription

The inscription that reads the year 1211 Saka or 1289 AD. Tells the story of a brahmin named Aryya Bharad who then divided the land of Java into two parts due to two kings who were almost at war, namely the Kingdoms of Panjalu and Janggala.

2. The Kudadu Inscription

The inscription on this inscription later found the year 1216 Saka or 1294 AD. It tells the story of Raden Wijaya who was assisted by Rama Kudadu in escaping from the threat of Jayakatwang who had killed Raja Singasari, Kertanegara. This inscription also reveals historical facts regarding the determination of the Kudadu area to become autonomous or a special area because it protected its king.

3. Sukamerta inscription

Found the year 1208 Saka or 1296 AD on this inscription. Tells how Raden Wijaya married 4 daughters of Kertanegara. There is also a story of the coronation of Jayanegara, crown prince Raden Wijaya, as viceroy in Daha (Kediri) in 1295 AD.

4. Balawi inscription

Written in 1305 AD In fact there is no clear depiction of the story. This inscription itself was found in Balawi Village, Lamongan, East Java.

5. Prapancasapura Inscription

Created during the leadership of Tribhuwana Tunggadewi, in the period 1328-1350 AD This inscription then tells about Hayam Wuruk who had another name Kummaraja Jiwana.

6. Parung inscription

The year 1350 AD is written on this inscription. It is said that a judge must then have careful consideration before giving a decision.

7. Canggu Inscription

The date of manufacture is written in 1358. It contains various regulations regarding the passages in the area around the Bengawan Solo and Brantas rivers.

This is information about the Majapahit Kingdom starting from history, the Majapahit Kingdom’s genealogy, historical traces and heritage sites. Hope it is useful!

Books Related to the Majapahit Kingdom

1. History of the Kings of Majapahit

Majapahit is one of the biggest kingdoms in the archipelago. Since the government of Dyah Wijaya to Jayanagara, Majapahit is still in the process of political upheaval. The glory of Majapahit was during the reign of Tribhuwana Tunggadewi to Hayam Wuruk. Meanwhile, since the government of Wikramawardhana, Sri Suhita, Dyah Kertawijaya, Rajasa Wardhana, Sri Suhita, Dyah Kertawijaya, Rajasa Wardhana, Sri Suhita, Dyah Kertawijaya, Rajasa Wardhana, Girishawardhana

2. The History of Majapahit: The Rise and Fall of the Greatest Empire in the Archipelago

Established between 1293 and around 1527, this kingdom based in East Java reached its peak of glory under the reign of King Hayam Wuruk, who expanded his empire’s territory across the archipelago and mainland Southeast Asia. This success was achieved through the help of his Mahapatih, Gajah Mada.

According to Negarakertagama (Desawarñana) written by Mpu Prapanca in 1365, the Majapahit Empire had ninety-eight vassal kingdoms, stretching from Sumatra in the west to Papua in the east, a vast area which now includes Indonesia, Singapore, Malaysia, Brunei, East Timor, and the southern part of the modern Philippines, although the exact nature of control over these vast areas is still a matter of debate among modern historians.

The Majapahit saga seeks to provide objective and complete documentation of the great empire which in national historiography is considered the forerunner of the modern Indonesian state. A report that not only records the story of the Majapahit rulers but also the daily lives of the people as well as the kingdom’s relationship with the international world at its time. A historical record that not only writes down the fame of Majapahit’s name but also the ulcers of its history, from its founding to the collapse of the kingdom.

3. Majapahit 2

The atmosphere of Kotaraja is like fire in a husk. Behind the cool breeze, hidden danger threatens, ready to pounce with a swing of the hand. However, only a few people captured the atmosphere. Others have lost the sense of suspicion that originally existed. Amidst the debilitating calm, suspicious traces strewn around the Singasari area.

However, are these strange signs really part of the cipher language? When revenge turns to revenge, the attack that comes like a flash flood cannot be avoided. Bala Sanggrama, an epic about the forerunner of the great empire of the archipelago: Majapahit. Written by a seasoned writer, this novel is one of the historical records of a piece of this nation’s journey.

4. Traces of Majapahit Civilization: Giant Empire

The fame of Majapahit is recognized by the world as one of the giant empires that ever existed in the archipelago. Its territory stretching from Sumatra to Nusa Tenggara is said to be the forerunner of the first archipelago. Majapahit became a superpower empire in the 13th century. A last Hindu-Buddhist kingdom to rule the archipelago and is considered one of the largest states in Indonesian history.

This book presents traces of the history of the existence of the Majapahit Kingdom, which at that time developed into a giant empire. The author tries to provide as objective & detailed a picture as possible about the existence of a giant empire on the archipelago so that it becomes a valuable lesson.

Thus a review of the Majapahit royal lineage and traces of its historical heritage. Sinaumed’s can get books related to the Majapahit kingdom by visiting sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithReading information.

The Function of Mangrove Forests – Of course, most of the Sinaumed’s already know what a mangrove forest is, right? Where this mangrove forest is one of the main subjects for environmental development in Indonesia. But, what exactly are the definitions, characteristics, and functions of mangrove forests? So, for more details, in this article we will discuss more about the functions of mangrove forests and their meanings. Listen until it’s finished.

So, this mangrove forest is a type of forest that consists of specific plant formations and we can usually find it in protected coastal areas in the tropics or subtropics. The word mangrove itself comes from a combination of Portuguese, namely mangue, and English, namely grove. Where in Portuguese, the word mangrove is used for individual plant species. Meanwhile, the word mangal is used for forest communities consisting of individual mangrove species.

Meanwhile in English, the word mangrove is used for a community of trees or grasses that grow in coastal areas or for individual types of other plants that grow and are associated with them. The examples of mangrove species that we can find in Indonesia are trees from mangrove species.

In Indonesia alone, mangrove forests that grow and develop here are around 8.6 hectares, of which 3.8 million hectares are in forest areas and also 4.8 million hectares outside forest areas. Damage to mangrove forests in forest areas is around 1.7 million hectares or 44.73 percent and for damage outside forest areas is 4.2 million hectares or 87.50 percent. Between 1982 and 1993 there was a reduction of 513,670 mangrove forests or around 46,697 hectares per year.

Mangrove forests are one of the main subjects for environmental development in Indonesia. Many social institutions engaged in the environmental sector continue to socialize the benefits of mangrove forests for the environment. These conditions support public awareness that mangrove forests are indeed very important to protect the environment. Preserving the mangrove forest area is a very good effort to stabilize environmental conditions and also save all the habitats in the mangrove forest. We can find this mangrove area in several areas in Indonesia, such as in Bangka Belitung Regency.

Definition of Mangrove Forest According to Experts

Mangrove forest is a forest ecosystem consisting of groups of trees that can live in an environment with high salt content. One of the characteristics of mangrove plants is that they have roots that stick out to the surface. The appearance of the mangrove itself looks like a stretch of shrubs that separates the land from the sea. This mangrove forest is a group of woody plant species that grow along tropical and subtropical coastlines that are protected and have a kind of coastal landform with anaerobic soil types or soils with limited oxygen levels.

In order to better understand what is the meaning of mangrove forests, here are some definitions of mangrove forests according to experts, including:

1. Saenger

In general, Saenger said that the definition of mangrove forest is one of the forest formations that are affected by the presence of sea tides with anaerobic soil conditions.

2. Sukarjo

According to him, mangrove forests are a group of plants consisting of various kinds of plants from different families. However, they have the same morphological and physiological adaptability to habitats that are affected by tides.

3. Soerianegara

According to him, mangrove forests are forests that grow on alluvial mud in coastal areas and river estuaries and their existence is always influenced by sea tides. Mangrove forests consist of various plant species such as the genera Avicennia, Sonneratia, Rhizophora, Bruguiera, Ceriops, Lumnitzera, Excoecaria, Xylocarpus, Scyphiphora and Nypa.

4. Tomlinson

The definition of mangrove forest as a plant that grows in tidal areas or as a community.

Characteristics of Mangrove Forests

In the book entitled Geography: Exploring the Earth and the Universe for Class XI by Hartono, the following are the characteristics of mangrove forests:

– The type of vegetation will be affected by the process of tides.
– This mangrove forest vegetation has a vegetation root system which is partly above the water surface.
– The types of vegetation in the mangrove forest include nipah and mangroves.
– The root system in plants in mangrove forests has a function as a means of respiration and also traps mud from tidal events.

Mangrove Forest Function

According to Asihing Kustanti in his book entitled “Mangrove Forest Management”, there are about three functions of mangrove forests, namely as follows:

1. Biological and Ecological Functions

Mangrove forests have a biological function as a breeding ground for animals and plants that live in the area. Where this function is influenced by abiotic components in the surrounding environment. Ecologically, this mangrove forest will provide benefits as a result or life for living things. That means, living things can hide from external attacks and obtain food.

2. Social and Economic Functions

Most of the people who live around the forest use mangrove forests to improve their standard of living. Plants in the mangrove forest itself can be used as a source of livelihood. Where the plants in the mangrove forest are generally used as construction materials, firewood, tourism, crafts, and so forth.

3. Physical Function

Physical function is a function related to physical environmental conditions, such as soil conditions, and so on. The physical function of mangrove forests can be used to prevent abrasion and protect ecosystems from big storms.

Benefits and Functions of Mangrove Forests

The benefits and functions of mangrove forests are actually felt by coastal communities. Various studies have been carried out and prove that mangrove forests play an important role for coastal life. The benefits and functions of the mangrove forest itself include:

1. Habitat for Endangered Animals

Mangrove forests are often the habitat of various types of wildlife. There are more than 100 species of birds growing and developing in this mangrove forest ecosystem and the vast mud plains directly adjacent to the mangrove forest is the landing place for thousands of shorebirds, including the rare Asian Blekok bird species. In addition, there are many other animals that generally exist in mangrove forests such as long-tailed monkeys, white-faced monkeys, and types of sea water animals such as shrimp, crabs, molluscs, including reptiles such as the crocodile species Caiman crocodilus (Lagarto cuajipal).

There are also other mammals including the Royal Bengal tiger (Panthera tigris), leopards (Panthera pardus) and spotted mussels (Axis axis), wild pigs (Sus scrofa) and mouse deer (Tragulus sp.), otters ( Aonyx cinerea and Lutra sp.) are also common in mangrove forests, but they are rarely seen. As for dolphins such as the Gangetic dolphin (Platanista gangetica) and the common dolphin (Delphinus delphis) we can also be found in rivers where there are mangrove forests, namely Manatees (Trichechus senegalensis and Trichechus manatus latirostris) and Dugong ( Dugong dugon), although these species are rare and in some places are threatened with extinction.

2. Protection Against Natural Disasters

Mangrove forests can prevent natural disasters, because one of the main functions of mangrove forests is to protect the coastline from abrasion and to dampen large waves which include natural disasters such as tsunamis. In addition, the existing vegetation in mangrove forests can also protect wet and dry agricultural crops or other natural vegetation from damage due to storms or salt-laden winds through the filtration process.

3. Sludge Deposition and Nutrient Enhancement

The physical properties of plants in mangrove forests can help the process of sludge deposition. Where this is closely related to the removal of toxins and also water nutrients which are often bound to the mud particles themselves. With the existence of mangrove forests, water quality will be maintained from silt deposits due to soil erosion and coastal abrasion.

4. Nutrient Enhancer

One of the physical properties of mangrove forests is to slow down the flow of water types due to the density in each tree and also its roots. So that it will make the sludge settle. The settling of the mud will certainly be very beneficial for mangrove forests because a lot of mud is carried from the rice fields. So that a lot of mud contains nutrients that can be utilized by all plant species in mangrove forests.

5. Poison Tethering

There are many poisons that enter aquatic ecosystems bound to the surface of the mud or present between the lattice molecules of water particles. These poisons may be transported from land areas through waters such as waste and garbage, then will end up in the open sea. Several plant species in mangrove forests can also actively help the process of fixing poisons brought from the mainland.

6. Sources of Germplasm

Germplasm is one of the most valuable natural resources for life and has many benefits for the improvement of commercial animal species or for maintaining the wild life population itself in the future as a support for advances in scientific technology and for supporting the development of a region.

7. Recreation as well as Tourism

Mangrove forests also have aesthetic value, both natural factors and the life in them. Where this mangrove forest will provide a tourist attraction that is different from other tourist objects. The characteristics of mangrove forests that are in transition between land and sea are considered unique for tourists. So that it becomes one of its own advantages for mangrove forests.

Tourism activities in mangrove forest areas besides being able to grow the economy of the surrounding community by providing employment opportunities and also business opportunities around mangrove forest areas and coastal ecosystems, can also maintain the balance of the environment and forest ecosystems, especially mangrove forests.

8. Educational and Research Facilities

Mangrove forests are used in an effort to develop science and technology. As a country with the largest mangrove forest area in the world, Indonesia definitely needs field laboratories that can be used for research and educational activities. Therefore, mangrove forests are used as a means for educational activities related to ecology.

9. Carbon Absorber

According to several studies, one hectare of mangrove forest can absorb 110 kg of carbon and a third of it is in the form of organic deposits in the mud. The process of photosynthesis will change inorganic carbon in the form of dioxide into organic carbon in the form of vegetation material. In most forest ecosystems, this one material will decompose and release carbon back into the atmosphere as carbon dioxide. However, mangrove forests actually contain some organic matter that does not decompose. Therefore, mangrove forests have a function to absorb carbon rather than as a source of carbon release. This is because the plants in the mangrove forest have many leaves. So it has more potential to absorb carbon in large quantities compared to other plants.

10. Maintains Microclimate

Mangrove forest evapotranspiration can maintain humidity and also rainfall in the area. So that the climate around areas with mangrove forests will be maintained by a microclimate which depends on several factors such as humidity, temperature, wind, and also sunlight. This microclimate is a factor of the physical conditions of the climate that is influenced by a relatively small area, only a few tens of meters or even only a few meters. These conditions are in the bowels of the earth or under the canopy of trees. The microclimate in the mangrove forest can also be influenced by wind, topography, and also the vegetation in the mangrove forest.

11. Growing Islands and Stabilizing Beaches

One of the roles and benefits of mangrove forests for the environment is the mangrove root system which is quite complex and dense. In addition, the thick roots of plants in mangrove forests can also trap the remains of organic matter and sediment carried by sea water from the mainland. This process keeps sea water clean and thus will be beneficial for the maintenance of seaweed or coral reefs. Because of that process, mangrove forests often grow coastline developments from time to time.

This mangrove growth can expand the boundaries of coastal ecosystems and provide opportunities for terrestrial plants to live and develop in the mainland. The roots of trees in mangrove forests can also protect the coast from the dangers of soil erosion and beach abrasion. In addition, viviparous fruit in mangrove forests are also often carried away by coastal currents and scattered into mangrove forests in new habitats. Over a long period of time, this new habitat can expand and become its own island.

12. Protects and Provides Nutrition

This mangrove forest will produce nutrients that can fertilize sea waters, both inorganic and organic nutrients. With an average high primary production of mangrove forests, mangrove forests can also maintain the sustainability of fish, shellfish and other brackish water animal populations. Apart from that, mangrove forests are also a breeding ground for several types of animals such as crabs, shrimp, and brackish water fish.

This is an explanation of the benefits and functions of mangrove forests for the environment and the people who live around them. It is necessary for us to always maintain the preservation of mangrove forests so that the balance of nature is maintained.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Who is confused about finding the formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid to complete homework from school? You need to understand that solving math problems using the pyramid surface area formula is very easy.

Limas itself has several types of pedestals with related names. For example, a rectangular pyramid at the bottom has four corners. Then the triangular pyramid is the pyramid that has a triangular base.

Come on, see the full explanation of the pyramid surface area formula and examples of problems.

Build the Limas Room

When talking about this one building, so that you can remember it all the time, try to imagine a historical building called the pyramids in Egypt. The shape of the pyramid building is basically a rectangular pyramid, you can see why it is rectangular.

Apart from the Pyramids of Giza, the shapes of these structures that we usually find in everyday life are rubrics, tents, telephones, towers, and also the top of the temple. Limas itself is a spatial or three-dimensional figure that has a base in the form of polygons or polygons, namely triangles, quadrilaterals, and pentagons.

The sides are triangular and have peaks. The name of this shape is determined based on the shape of the base.

Each spatial shape certainly has its own characteristics to distinguish it from other spatial forms, as well as pyramids. The following are the characteristics of a pyramid shape, namely:

• The top of the pyramid has a sharp point
• The lower part of the pyramid shape is flat
• The perpendicular sides of the pyramid are triangular

Limas Elements

In addition to the characteristics mentioned above, pyramids also have several elements that must be understood, including:

• The edge is the line of intersection between the 2 sides of the pyramid.
• The corner point where two or more ribs meet.
• The side plane is a plane consisting of a base plane and a vertical side plane.
• The peak point is a meeting point between the blanket and the pyramid blanket.
• The height of the pyramid is the distance between the base and the vertex.

Various Shapes of Limas

Limas has several geometric shapes based on the shape of the reason, namely:

1. Triangular pyramid

A triangular pyramid is a type of pyramid whose base is in the form of a triangle, be it an equilateral triangle, isosceles, or any triangle. The elements of a triangular pyramid are:

• 4 corner points
• 4 side planes
• 6 ribs

2. Quadrilateral pyramid

A rectangular pyramid is a type of pyramid whose base is rectangular, namely square, rectangle, rhombus, kite, trapezoid, parallelogram, and other rectangular shapes. The following are the elements in the rectangular pyramid, including:

• 5 corner points
• 5 side planes
• 8 ribs

3. The pentagonal pyramid

A pentagonal pyramid is a type of pyramid that has the shape of a pentagonal flat base, be it a regular pentagon or an arbitrary pentagon. The following are some of the elements in a pentagonal pyramid:

• 6 corner points
• 6 side planes
• 10 ribs

4. Hexagonal pyramid

A hexagonal pyramid is a type of pyramid that has a hexagonal base shape, be it a regular hexagon or an arbitrary hexagon. The following are some of the elements in the hexagonal pyramid:

• 7 corner points
• 7 side planes
• 12 ribs

The formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid

Surface area is the total area of ​​a flat shape in the form of a geometric shape. The flat shape that forms a pyramid consists of a base and a triangular upright. So, in general the formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid is as follows:

The formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid = area of ​​the base + area of ​​all vertical sides

Example of the Surface Area of ​​a Limas Problem (Part 1)

In order to better understand the concept of the surface area of ​​a pyramid, here is an example of a problem about the surface area of ​​a pyramid.

Example Question 1

A rectangular pyramid with a side length of 10 cm and a height of 12 cm, then what is the surface area of ​​the rectangular pyramid?

Is known:

area of ​​base = 10×10 = 100 cm2

pyramid height = 12 cm

asked: 

The surface area of ​​the pyramid

Completion:

area of ​​base = side x side = 10 x 10 = 100 cm2

The sum of the areas of the perpendiculars = the sum of the areas of the triangles with the perpendicular sides = 4 x the area of ​​the triangle QRT

area of ​​triangle QRT = 1/2 x QR x BT = 1/2 x 10 x 13 = 65 cm2

the sum of the area of ​​the uprights = 4 x the area of ​​the triangle QRT = 4 x 65 = 260

So, the surface area of ​​the pyramid = 100 + 260 = 360 cm2

Example Problem 2

The area of ​​the base of the rectangular pyramid is 16 cm2 and the height of the right triangle is 3 cm. Determine the surface area of ​​the triangular pyramid.

Is known:

The area of ​​the base of the pyramid = 16 cm2

height of right triangle = 3 cm

asked:

The surface area of ​​the pyramid

Completion:

The surface area of ​​the pyramid = area of ​​the base + sum of the area of ​​the perpendiculars

area of ​​base = 16 cm2

sum of area of ​​perpendiculars = 4 x area of ​​triangle = 4 x (1/2 x 4×3)= 24 cm2

So the surface area of ​​the pyramid = 16 + 24 = 40 cm2

Example Problem 3

A regular hexagon pyramid has a base area of ​​120 cm2 and a right triangle area of ​​30 cm2. Determine the surface area of ​​the hexagonal pyramid.

Is known:

area of ​​base = 120 cm2

area of ​​right triangle = 30 cm2

asked:

The surface area of ​​the pyramid

Resolution:

Surface area = area of ​​the base + sum of the area of ​​the perpendiculars

area of ​​base = 120 cm2

the sum of the area of ​​the uprights = 6 x the area of ​​the right triangle = 6 x 30 cm2 = 180 cm2

So, the surface area of ​​the hexagonal pyramid = 120 + 180 = 300 cm2

Limas Volume Formula

Limas is also included in the geometric type so that it has a volume. The following is the general formula for the volume of a pyramid.

The volume of the pyramid = 1/3 x base area x height

Example of a Limas Volume Problem

In order to better understand the use of the pyramid volume formula, here are some examples of questions to find the volume of a pyramid.

Example Question 1

Find the volume of a triangular pyramid with a base area of ​​50 cm2 and a height of 12 cm.

Is known:

area of ​​base = 50 cm2

pyramid height = 12 cm

asked:

Lime volume

Completion:

The volume of the pyramid = 1/3 x the area of ​​the base xt of the pyramid = 1/3 x 50 x 12 = 200 cm3

So, the volume of the rectangular pyramid is 200 cm3

Example Problem 2

A rectangular pyramid with a side length of 8 cm and a height of 6 cm, what is the volume of the pyramid?

Is known:

side of the quadrilateral = 8 cm

pyramid height = 6 cm

asked:

Lime volume

Completion:

The volume of the pyramid = 1/3 x the area of ​​the base xt of the pyramid = 1/3 x ( 8 x 8 ) x 6 = 128 cm3

So, the volume of the rectangular pyramid is 128 cm3 .

Example Problem 3.

A pentagonal pyramid has a known base area of ​​50 cm2 and a height of 15 cm, then what is the volume of the pentagonal pyramid?

Is known:

area of ​​base = 50 cm2

height = 15 cm

asked: 

The volume of the pentagonal pyramid

Completion:

Volume = 1/3 x base area x height

= 1/3 x 50 x 15

= 250 cm3

So, the volume of the pentagonal pyramid is 250 cm3

The formula for the surface area of ​​a triangular pyramid

A triangular pyramid has a triangular base. The shape of the base itself can be equilateral, isosceles triangle, arbitrary triangle, or other triangular shape. The triangular pyramid formula is used to find the surface area and volume.

As we have discussed above, when viewed from its shape, this triangular pyramid has the following characteristics:

• Has 4 corner points
• Has 4 sides
• Has 6 ribs.

The formula for the surface area of ​​a triangular pyramid consists of two forms, the first is used to find the surface area and the second is used to find the volume. The formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid can be symbolized by: “base area + area of ​​the vertical side”.

Meanwhile, the formula for the volume of a pyramid is “1/3 x area x height”.

Volume Formula:

Volume of triangular pyramid = 1/3 x area of ​​base x height of pyramid.

Surface Area Formula:

Area of ​​triangular pyramid = area of ​​base + area of ​​casing.

It could also be the area of ​​a triangular pyramid = the sum of the area of ​​the sides.

The formula for the surface area of ​​a rectangular pyramid

The base and blanket are the most important elements in the formula for the area of ​​a rectangular pyramid. Some of the forming components of a geometric shape, among others, are in the vertical plane. This rectangular pyramid is usually called a rectangular pyramid.

The forming components that are the dominant characteristic of this rectangular pyramid are on its five sides. The five sides are composed of the base side in a quadrilateral shape.

Then, for four upright sides with a triangular shape that becomes the corner. Not only the corners, there are also five corners, namely four at the base and one at the top.

The number of edges of this rectangular pyramid is 8, with four ribs on the base and the other four on the upright ribs. The formula for the area of ​​a rectangular pyramid is indicated by the area of ​​the base plus the total area of ​​the uprights that exist and are related to the building. You can note the formula below:

Volume Formulas

V: ⅓ x (sxs) xt

Surface Area Formula

LP: (sxs) + (4 x area of ​​the perpendicular)

There is also an easy way to determine the validity of the area formula for a rectangular pyramid, namely by determining the midpoint of the point of intersection which is usually marked with the letter o. Even though this method is actually more effective for cubes, which are a combination of six pyramids at once.

The formula for the surface area of ​​a hexagonal pyramid

This hexagon pyramid is a three-dimensional geometric figure bounded by a hexagon-shaped base and six triangular upright sides. At a glance, maybe some people will find it difficult to distinguish it from a hexagonal prism and a hexagonal pyramid. However, both have different forms.

Judging from its shape, a hexagonal prism is a three-dimensional shape bounded by a base and lid that are identical in shape to a hexagon and also to have vertical sides in a rectangular shape. That is why hexagonal pyramids have the same properties as other pyramids. The difference is only in the corner points, the following are the general properties of a hexagonal pyramid:

• It has a triangular straight side
• The side of the base is in the shape of a polygon
• Has one breaking point
• The naming of the pyramid depends on the shape of the base

Before completing the example questions related to the hexagonal pyramid. It would be better to know in advance about the formulas for pyramids, including the surface and volume formulas for pyramids.

Surface Area Formula 

Surface area = top area + sheath area of ​​the pyramid

= area of ​​base + (nx area of ​​triangle)

Volume Formulas

Volume = 1/3 x base area x height

= 1/3 x W x h

Examples of Problems Calculating the Surface Area of ​​a Pyramid (Part 2)

To make it easier to understand, here is an example of a collection of semicircle formula questions.

Complete with the formula for the circumference of a semicircle, to the area of ​​a flat circle.

1. Example Question 1

A T.ABCD pyramid. If the volume of the pyramid is 2.304 cm3 and the height of the pyramid is 27 cm. What is the surface area of ​​the pyramid?

Discussion:

It is known that the volume of pyramid T.ABCD = 2.304 cm3 and the height of pyramid T.ABCD = 27 cm

Wanted: Surface area of ​​the pyramid T.ABCD?

Answer:

• Step 1. Find the T.ABCD Volume

The volume of the pyramid = area of ​​the high base 2.304 = 1/3 x area of ​​the base xt

2.304 = 1/3 x area of ​​base xt

2.304 = 1/3 x base area x 27

Base area = 2.304 / 9

The area of ​​the base of the pyramid = 256

Thus, side of the square AB = square root of 256 = 16 cm

• Step 2. Find the surface area of ​​the pyramid

The surface area of ​​the pyramid = area of ​​the base + area of ​​the perpendicular

Lp = (sxs) + (4 x ½ xsx t. blanket)

Lp = (16 x 16) + ( 2 x 16 x 27)

Lp = 256 + 864 = 1.120 square cm

So the surface area of ​​the pyramid T. ABCD is 1.120 square cm.

2. Sample Question 2

Determine the surface area and volume of a rectangular pyramid with a square base that has a side of 14 cm and a height of 6 cm, and the height of the right triangle is 8 cm!

Discussion:

Given: The base side is 14 cm, the height of the pyramid is 6 cm, and the height of the right triangle is 8 cm.

Wanted: Surface area and volume of a rectangular pyramid

Answer:

• Step 1. Find the surface area of ​​the pyramid

The surface area of ​​the pyramid

= Area of ​​the base + 4 x area of ​​the perpendicular

= (14 cm x 14 cm) + (1/2 x 14 cm x 8 cm)

= 196 cm2 + 56 cm2

= 252 cm2

• Step 2. Find the volume of the pyramid

Lime volume

= 1/3 x base area x height

= 1/3 x 196 cm2 x 6 cm

= 392 cm2

So, the surface area of ​​the pyramid is 252 cm3 and the volume is 392 cm3.

3. Sample Question 3

The length of the base of a regular hexagonal pyramid is 8 cm.

If the height of a regular triangle is 8 cm and the height of the triangle on the right side is 15 cm. So, what is the surface area of ​​the pyramid?

Answer:

The area of ​​the base of the pyramid is determined from 6 congruent equilateral triangles, namely:

t = √8² – 4²

t =√64 – 16

t = √48

t = 6.9 cm

After getting the height of the hexagonal pyramid, here’s how to calculate the area of ​​the base of the pyramid, namely:

L = 6 x ( 1/2 x base x height)

L = 6 x (1/2 x 8 x 6.9)

L = 6 x 27.6

L = 165.6 cm²

So, the surface area of ​​the hexagonal pyramid is 165.6 cm².

Thus the discussion of the surface area of ​​the pyramid and also the formula for the volume of the pyramid. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful and also adds to Sinaumed’s’ insight.

For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about other spatial formulas, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Human

question source: https://www.orami.co.id/ and https://saintif.com/

The formula for the area of ​​a circle – In mathematics, a circle can be said to be the most different plane figure compared to a number of other shapes. The characteristics, components and also the formula for the area of ​​a circle and also the formula for the circumference of a circle are not the same as most flat shapes.

For this reason, in this article, Sinaumed’s will study the most difficult things about circular shapes, namely the formula for the area of ​​a circle and the formula for the circumference of a circle, accompanied by a number of practice questions so that your understanding of these two topics can get deeper.

Circle Features

Basically, a circle is a plane shape consisting of all points on a plane that are at a certain distance from its center. So, the shape of the sides of this circle can be concluded to be equal and symmetrical from one point to another in this flat shape.

There are several characteristics of a circle that Sinaumed’s should learn first so that you can understand the formula for the area of ​​a circle and the formula for the circumference of a circle which you will learn later. These characteristics will be discussed briefly and formed in points to facilitate understanding.

1. It doesn’t have any angles.
2. Even so, the total angle still reaches 360 degrees.
3. Has no side.
4. Thus, a circle has an infinite number of fold and rotary symmetries.
5. The length of the centerline of a circle is called the diameter, while half of the diameter is called the radius.

Circle Area Formula

After studying the characteristics above, Sinaumed’s should be able to learn and understand the formula for the area of ​​a circle that will be presented in this session. You can read and understand the formula for the area of ​​a circle in the image below

In the formula for the area of ​​a circle, Sinaumed’s needs to know that the calculation will involve the element “π” or “phi”. The value of this phi can be 22/7 or 3.14, depending on the question giver. Also, you’ll be using the radius instead of the diameter.

And the rest, the calculation to find the area of ​​this circle is the same as any other flat shape. Sinaumed’s only needs to enter all the components in the problem into the formula. Calculations regarding the area of ​​a circle may be a little more difficult, so it’s a good idea to do it carefully and slowly.

Circle Area Problems Practice

Of course, Sinaumed’s won’t stop after learning the area formula for the environment, right? In mathematics, learning theory alone is not enough. One needs to apply the theory and experiment with what they previously learned.

For that, this time you will try to do a number of problems related to the area of ​​a circle. More specifically, Sinaumed’s will find 3 questions related to this topic, arranged from the easiest to the most difficult to test your understanding.
If you are familiar with the formula for the area of ​​a circle, you may only need to look at the answers to these questions. However, for Sinaumed’s who feel they need help because they don’t really understand this material, we will work on this problem together complete with the steps for doing it.

First Question

A circle has a radius of 10.5 cm. Based on this information, calculate the area of ​​this circle (π = 22/7).
This first problem was made so that Sinaumed’s could directly test the formula for the area of ​​a circle that you previously learned with numbers. So, what you need to do now is quite simple, which is to enter all the components into this circle formula.

L = π x r²
L = 22/7 x 10.5 cm x 10.5 cm
W = 346.5 cm²

When working on problems related to circles, make sure Sinaumed’s uses the π that has been instructed so he can find the right answer. And in this first problem, the area of ​​the circle is 346.5 cm².

Second Problem

It is known that a circle has an area of ​​490.625 cm². What diameter does the circle have? (π = 3.14).
Slightly more complicated than the first question, this second question is made to test your understanding and flexibility regarding variations in questions, in this case, regarding circles. Maybe this second question will make some Sinaumed’s confused about the process.

However, what you need to remember is that the basic principle of the calculation will remain the same. So, if Sinaumed’s isn’t so sure about doing it, you can try first entering the existing components into the formula and solving it according to the circumstances.

L = π x r²
490.625 cm² = 3.14 x r²
490.625 cm² ÷ 3.14 = r²
156.25 cm² = r²
√156.25 cm = r
12.5 cm = r

Even though you have found the radius of this circle, your journey is still not finished. The last thing Sinaumed’s needs to do is convert those radii into diameters or “d”. Below is how to convert radius to diameter.

d = 2 xr
d = 2 x 12.5 cm
d = 25 cm

With this, Sinaumed’s’ work for the second problem was completed. Even though it is quite long, if you have thoroughness and patience, you will definitely be able to find the answer. So, the diameter for this circle is 25 cm long.

Third Problem

A circle has a diameter of 30 cm. Find the area of ​​the larger circle if calculated using π = 22/7 and π = 3.14 respectively.

For the third and last problem, Sinaumed’s explained earlier that using different π can produce different results. In this matter, we will prove together whether this fact is true or not.

Compared to the second question, there may be some Sinaumed’s who find this question easier. This is because basically, all you need to do is plug in the components of the formula for the area of ​​a circle and look up the final result

.
However, the calculation will be quite long and certainly requires patience and accuracy in the process. This calculation will begin by converting the diameter to the radius first so you can calculate the area of ​​a circle. Here’s how:

r = d ÷ 2
r = 30 cm ÷ 2
r = 15 cm

And after that, Sinaumed’s could try one by one the formula for the area of ​​a circle, each with a different π, namely 22/7 and 3.14. You can immediately try to calculate the area of ​​this circle and prove whether or not the final result will be different.

π = 22/7
L = π x r²
W = 22/7 x 15 cm x 15 cm
W = 707.142 cm²
π = 3.14
W = π x r²
W = 3.14 x 15 cm x 15 cm
D = 706.5 cm²

From the calculations above, it is evident that with a different π, you will also get different results for the area of ​​the circle. In this third problem, it can be concluded that the calculation using π = 22/7 will produce a larger area compared to π = 3.14.

Circle Circumference Formula

After studying the formula for the area of ​​a circle as a whole, this time Sinaumed’s will try to learn the formula for the circumference of a circle. You yourself must have understood that the area formula and the perimeter formula of a flat shape cannot be separated. You can find and learn the formula for the circumference of this circle in the image below.

Like the formula for the area of ​​a circle, the formula for the circumference of a circle also involves the element phi in it. Here, however, Sinaumed’s was able to find that the circumference of a circle required the use of a diameter instead of a radius, in contrast to calculating the area of ​​a circle.

Sinaumed’s may also have realized that calculating the circumference of a circle is very different from the circumference of a flat figure in general. Even so, if you are already fluent in this topic, you can definitely do problems related to the circumference of a circle as if you were looking for the circumference of another plane.

Circumference Practice Questions

After this, Sinaumed’s will also study a number of problems related to the circumference of a circle, just like after you learned the formula for the area of ​​a circle. When studying mathematics, you will definitely be attached to what is called practice questions.

We hope that Sinaumed’s won’t get bored quickly with the many practice questions that you will find in mathematics. After all, practice questions can help you to master a material in math lessons. In fact, if you rarely work on questions, your understanding of a topic cannot be proven.

In this question practice session, Sinaumed’s will get 3 different types of questions like the previous question practice session. The types of questions will be sorted from the easiest to the most difficult. You can try to work on these questions as much as possible and see the steps if you feel confused.

First Question

The diameter of a circle reaches 20 cm. Based on this information, please determine the circumference of this circle (π = 3.14).
As always, this first problem should be fairly easy for Sinaumed’s to work on. You’ve found all the necessary components into the circumference formula to find the answer to this problem. The calculation will more or less be like this.

K = π xd
K = 3.14 x 20 cm
K = 62.8 cm

Don’t forget to remind Sinaumed’s to always use the π listed in the questions so he can find the right answer. With this, the answer to the first question is 62.8 cm.

Second Problem

It is known that the circumference of a circle is 77 cm. Based on this information, determine the radius of this circle. (π = 22/7).
In this second problem, Sinaumed’s received an order to find the radius of the circle. At first glance, the second problem regarding the circumference of a circle is similar to the second problem that you have done earlier regarding the area of ​​a circle. For some of you, the second question above might be quite difficult to do.

However, in this second question, Sinaumed’s doesn’t need to worry too much about the difficulty level of this question. Because believe it or not, calculations regarding the circumference of a circle are no more complicated than calculations related to the area of ​​a circle. Try to see the calculation below.

K = π xd
77 cm = 22/7 xd
77 cm ÷ 22/7 = d
24.5 cm = d

Calculations regarding the diameter of the circle for the second problem are already over. However, Sinaumed’s still has to find the radius of this circle, according to the question’s request. So, you have to convert the diameter of the circle into the radius of the circle in the following way.

r = d ÷ 2
r = 24.5 cm ÷ 2
r = 12.25 cm

How about it, Sinaumed’s? Calculations regarding the second problem regarding the circumference of a circle are not as difficult as the second problem regarding the area of ​​a circle, right? And you have managed to find the answer to this problem, where the radius of the circle above is 12.25 cm.
Third Problem

A circle has a circumference of 86.35 cm. Based on this information, what area does this circle have? (π = 3.14)
This third problem will test Sinaumed’s’ understanding not only regarding the circumference of a circle, but also knowledge about the area of ​​a circle. From the questions above, although the information found is about the circumference of a circle, the final question is about the area of ​​a circle.

It could be that the lack of information provided and the thought that Sinaumed’s has to do the third question through a long process will make some of you feel confused before starting to work on it. In fact, believe me, this problem is not as difficult as you think.

Keep in mind that even with the slightest information, Sinaumed’s can still work on this problem if you already understand the formulas and components of the related plane shapes. Let’s try to prove together whether or not this problem is easy to do.

K = π xd
86.35 cm = 3.14 xd
86.35 cm ÷ 3.14 = d
27.5 cm = d
The first step of working on this third problem is complete. And for the rest, Sinaumed’s should be able to continue working on this problem using an understanding of the formula for the area of ​​a circle. This can be started by converting the diameter to the radius first.

r = d ÷ 2
r = 27.5 cm ÷ 2
r = 13.75 cm

After getting the radius of the circle, Sinaumed’s was able to calculate the area of ​​the circle asked in this third problem. You only need to enter all the components that you have got and calculate it slowly, you can definitely find the answer to this problem.

L = π x r²
D = 3.14 x 13.75 cm x 13.75 cm
W = 593.656 cm

Thus, Sinaumed’s’ calculation for the third problem is complete. The answer sought from this problem, namely the area of ​​this circle, is 593,656 cm².

The discussion of this third question is the closing of this article. Hopefully, after reading this article, Sinaumed’s will be able to get the understanding you need about circles, especially regarding the formula for the area of ​​a circle and the formula for the circumference of a circle. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has information #MoreWithReading.

Author: M. Adrianto S.

Salat is an important worship for Muslims. It is the foundation of religion, including the 5 pillars of Islam. Prayer provides peace of mind for those who practice it as well as physical health. However, the 5 daily prayers are often not performed completely. There is some missing time.

In surah Al Baqarah verse 43 it is explained regarding the obligation to pray as follows.

وَاَقِيْمُوا الصَّلٰوةَ وَاٰتُوا الزَّكٰوةَ وَارْكَعُوْا مَعَ الرَّاكِعِيْنَ

Meaning: “And carry out the prayers, pay zakat, and bow with those who bow.”

Meanwhile, the obligation to pray 5 times is explained in surah An Nisa verse 103 as follows.

In the following, we will discuss the reading of prayers from takbir to greetings. Each change of prayer movement is marked by reciting takbir ( Allaahu Akbar ) and at certain shifts it is accompanied by raising both hands like takbiratul ihram. The readings below have been summarized from various sources on the internet.

Takbiratul Ihram reading

The following is the reading of takbiratul ihram.

اللَّهُ أَكْبَرُ

Allahu Akbar

Meaning: Allah is Great

Iftitah reading

After carrying out the takbiratul ihram, it is sunnah for Sinaumed’s to read the iftitah prayer. As conveyed in the hadith, Rasulullah SAW said,  “A person’s prayer is not perfect until he recites the takbir, praises Allah and praises Him, then reads the Quran which is easy for him.”  (Narrated by Abu Dawud and Hakim).

Iftitah prayer is not sacred only one. Here are some iftitah prayers taught by the Prophet.

Iftitah reading 1

اَللَّهُمَّ بَاعِدْ بَيْنِى وَبَيْنَ خَطَايَاىَ كَمَا بَاعَدْتَ بَيْنَ الْمَشْرِقِ وَالْمَغْرِبِ ، اللَّهُمَّ نَقِّنِى مِنَ الْخَطَايَا كَمَا يُنَقَّى الثَّوْبُ الأَبْيَضُ مِنَ الدَّنَسِ ، اللَّهُمَّ اغْسِلْ خَطَايَاىَ بِالْمَاءِ وَالثَّلْجِ وَالْبَرَدِ

Alloohumma baa’id bainii wa baina khothooyaaya kamaa baa’adta bainal masyriqi wal maghribi. Alloohumma naqqinii minal khothooyaa kamaa yunaqqots tsaubul abyadlu minad danas. Alloohummaghsil khothooyaaya bil maa’i wats tsalji wal barod.

Meaning:
O Allah, keep me away from my sins as you keep me away from east and west. O Allah, cleanse me from my sins as white clothes are clean from dirt. O Allah, wash me from my sins with water, snow and dew. (Narrated by Bukhari and Muslim)

Iftitah reading 2

O Lord

Alloohu akbar kabiirow wal hamdu lillaahi katsiiroo wasubhaanalloohi bukrotaw wa-ashiilaa.

Meaning:
Allah is the greatest with the greatest, all praise be to Allah with much praise. Glory be to Allah in the morning and evening. (HR. Muslim)

Iftitah reading 3

إِنِّى وَجَّهْتُ وَجْهِىَ لِلَّذِى فَطَرَ السَّمَوَاتِ وَالأَرْضَ حَنِيفًا وَمَا أَنَا مِنَ الْمُشْرِكِينَ إِنَّ صَلاَتِى وَنُسُكِى وَمَحْيَاىَ وَمَمَاتِى لِلَّهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِينَ لاَ شَرِيكَ لَهُ وَبِذَلِكَ أُمِرْتُ وَأَنَا أَوَّلُ الْمُسْلِمِينَ

Innii wajjahtu wajhiya lilladzii fathoros samaawaati wal ardlo haniifaa wamaa ana minal musyrikiin. Inna sholaatii wa nusukii wamahyaa wa mamaatii lillaahi robbil ‘aalamiin. Laa syariikalahu wa bidzaalika umirtu wa ana awwalul muslimiin.

Meaning:
Verily, I turn my face to Allah, Who has created the heavens and the earth in a state of submission, and I am not from among the polytheists. Verily, my prayer, my worship, my life and my death are only for Allah, the Lord of the worlds. There is no partner for Him. And thus I was ordered. And I was the first to surrender. (Narrated by Ibn Majah)

Iftitah reading 4

Allah

Alhamduli lillaahi hamdan katsiiraan thoyyiban mubaarokan fiih.

Meaning:
Praise be to Allah with lots of praise, good and full of blessings (HR. Muslim)

Reading Surah Al-Fatihah

Surah Al-Fatihah is read in every cycle of prayer. The following is the reading of Al-Fatihah.

بِسْمِ اللّٰهِ الرَّحْمٰنِ الرَّحِيْمِ – ١

bismillahir rahmanir Rahim

In the name of Allah, the Most Gracious, the Most Merciful.

اَلْحَمْدُ لِلّٰهِ رَبِّ الْعٰلَمِيْنَۙ –  ٢

All praise is due to Allâh, the Lord of the Worlds

Praise be to Allah, Lord of all the worlds,

الرَّحْمٰنِ الرَّحِيْمِۙ -٣

ar-raḥmānir-raḥīm            

Most Gracious, Most Merciful,

مٰلِكِ يَوْمِ الدِّيْنِۗ – ٤

Sovereign of the Day of the Judgment

Owner of the Day of Judgment.

اِيَّاكَ نَعْبُدُ وَاِيَّاكَ نَسْتَعِيْنُۗ – ٥

iyyāka na’budu wa iyyāka nasta’īn

Only to You we worship and only to You do we ask for help.

اِهْدِنَا الصِّرَاطَ الْمُسْتَقِيْمَ ۙ – ٦

ihdinaṣ-ṣirāṭal-mustaqīm

Show us the straight path,

صِرَاطَ الَّذِيْنَ اَنْعَمْتَ عَلَيْهِمْ ەۙ غَيْرِ الْمَغْضُوْبِ عَلَيْهِمْ وَلَا الضَّاۤلِّيْنَ ْ

ṣirāṭallażīna an’amta ‘alaihim gairil-magḍụbi ‘alaihim wa laḍ-ḍāllīn

(namely) the way of those whom You have bestowed favors on; not (the way) of those who are angry, and not (the way) of those who go astray.

Reading Verses of the Koran

In this section, Sinaumed’s is free to recite verses in the Koran. The verses of the Koran are read only in the first and second cycles. In the next cycle, it is enough to recite Alfatihah.

Ruku’s reading

Here are some bowing readings taught by the Prophet Muhammad SAW, Sinaumed’s can choose them.

Ruku’ reading 1

Reading bowing to the history of Imam Muslim, Abu Dawud, Ibn Majah, Ahmad, and Thabrani. The following is the pronunciation and its meaning:

سُبْحَانَ رَبِّىَ الْعَظِيمِ

Subhaana robbiyal ‘adhiimi 3x

Meaning: Glory be to my Lord, the Most High

Ruku’ reading 2

This bowing reading is based on the narrations of Abu Dawud, Ahmad, Baihaqi, Thabrani, Daruquthi.. The following is the pronunciation and its meaning:

سُبْحَانَ رَبِّىَ الْعَظِيمِ وَبِحَمْدِهِ

Subhaana robbiyal ‘adhiimi wabihamdih 3x

Meaning: Glory be to my Lord, the Most Great and all praise be to Him

Ruku’ reading 3

The bowing prayer is recorded in the authentic hadith of Imam Bukhari and Imam Muslim. The following is the pronunciation and its meaning.

Amen

Subhaanaka alloohumma robbanaa wa bihamdika alloohummaghfirlii

Meaning: Glory be to You, O Allah, our Lord and all praise be to You. O Allah forgive me.

Ruku’ reading 4

The reading of the fourth bow is narrated in detail by Imam Muslim. The following is the pronunciation and its meaning:

سُبُّوحٌ قُدُّوسٌ رَبُّ الْمَلاَئِكَةِ وَالرُّوحِ

Subbuuhun qudduusun robbul malaa-ikati war ruuh

Meaning: Glory be to You and Glory to God the angels and spirits

Ruku’ reading 5

The reading of this fifth bow was narrated by Abu Dawud, An Nasa’i, Tirmidhi, Ahmad. The following is the pronunciation and its meaning:

اللَّهُمَّ لَكَ رَكَعْتُ وَبِكَ آمَنْتُ وَلَكَ أَسْلَمْتُ خَشَعَ لَكَ سَمْعِى وَبَصَرِى وَمُخصِّى وَعَظِ

Alloohumma laka roka’tu wabika aamantu wa laka aslamtu khosya’a laka sam’ii wa bashorii wa mukhkhii wa ‘adhmii wa ‘ashobii

Meaning: O Allah, only to You I bow, only to You I believe and only to You I surrender. Only to You do my hearing, my sight, my brain, my bones, and my nerves submit.

Ruku’ reading 6

The reading of this sixth bow is in the history of An Nasa’i, Tirmidhi and Ahmad. The following is the pronunciation and its meaning:

اللَّهُمَّ لَكَ رَكَعْتُ وَبِكَ آمَنْتُ وَلَكَ أَسْلَمْتُ وَعَلَيْكَ تَوَكَّلْتُ أَنْتَ رَبِّي خَشَعَ سَمْعِي وَبَصَرِي وَدَمِي وَلَحْمِي وَعَظْمِي وَعَصَبِي لِلَّهِ رَبِّ الْعَالِمِينَ

(Alloohumma laka roka’tu wabika aamantu wa laka aslamtu khosya’a laka sam’ii wa bashorii wa mukhkhii wa ‘adhmii wa ‘ashobii lillaahi robbil ‘aalamiin)

Meaning: O Allah, only to You I bow, only to You I believe and only to You I surrender. My hearing, my sight, my brain, my bones, and my nerves are subject to Allah, the Lord of the worlds.

Ruku’ 7 reading

The reading of the seventh bow was narrated by Abu Dawud and An Nasa’i. The following is the pronunciation and meaning:

Amen

Subhaana dzil jabaruuti wal malakuuti wal kibriyaa-i wal ‘adhiimah

Meaning: Glory be to the One who has power, kingdom, greatness and majesty

I’tidal reading

Here are some choices of i’tidal readings, Sinaumed’s can choose them.

I’tidal reading 1

After bowing, the Prophet did not recite the takbir but read the following readings.

سَمِعَ اللَّهُ لِمَنْ حَمِدَهُ

Sami’alloohu liman hamidah

Meaning: Allah is All-Hearing those who praise Him. (Narrated by Bukhari and Muslim)

After standing straight, then he continued by reading:

رَبَّنَا وَلَكَ الْحَمْدُ

Robbana walakal hamdu

Meaning: O our Lord, to You is all praise. (Narrated by Bukhari and Muslim)

I’tidal 2 reading:

رَبَّنَا لَكَ الْحَمْدُ مِلْءَ السَّمَوَاتِ وَالأَرْضِ وَمِلْءَ مَا شِئْتَ مِنْ شَىْءٍ بَعْدُ

Robbanaa lakal hamdu mil’as samaawaati wal ardli wa mil-a maa syi’ta min syai’in ba’du

Meaning: O our Lord, all praise be to You, the fullness of the heavens and the fullness of the earth and all that You will after that

I’tidal 3 reading:

اللَّهُمَّ رَبَّنَا لَكَ الْحَمْدُ مِلْءَ السَّمَوَاتِ وَمِلْءَ الأَرْضِ وَمِلْءَ مَا شِئْتَ مِنْ شَىْءٍ بَعْدُ أَهْلَ الثَّنَاءِ وَالْمَجْدِ لاَ مَانِعَ لِمَا أَعْطَيْتَ وَلاَ مُعْطِىَ لِمَا مَنَعْتَ وَلاَ يَنْفَعُ ذَا الْجَدِّ مِنْكَ الْجَدُّ

Allohumma robbanaa lakal hamdu mil’as samaawaati wal ardli wa mil-a maa syi’ta min syai’in ba’du, ahlats tsanaa’i wal majdi laa maani’a limaa a’thoita wa laa mu’thiya limaa mana’ta wa laa yanfa’u dzal jaddi minkal jadd

Meaning: O Allah, our Lord, praise be to You, as full as the heavens and as full as the earth and as full as you wish after that. You are worthy of praise and glory. You are the one who has the right to what Your servant says. Thursday all are Your servants. Nothing can hinder what You give and nothing can give what You withhold. A person’s glory does not hinder Your actions.

I’tidal 4 reading:

لِرَبِّيَ الْحَمْدُ لِرَبِّيَ الْحَمْدُ

Lirobbiyal hamdu, lirobbiyal hamdu

Meaning: All praise is for my Lord, All praise is only for my Lord

I’tidal 5 reading:

رَ بَّنَا وَلَكَ الْحَمْدُ ، حَمْدًا كَثِيرًا طَيِّبًا مُبَارَكًا فِيهِ

Robbanaa walakal hamdu hamdan katsiiron thoyyib mubaarokan fiih

Meaning: O our Lord, all praise is only for you, I praise you with many praises, which are good and full of blessings

Sujud reading

Here are some readings of prostration, Sinaumed’s can choose one of them.

prostration reading 1

سُبْحَانَ رَبِّىَ الْأَعْلَى

Subhaana robbiyal ‘a’la 3x

Meaning: Glory be to my Lord, the Most High

prostration reading 2

سُبْحَانَ رَبِّىَ الْأَعْلَى وَبِحَمْدِهِ

Subhaana robbiyal ‘a’la wabihamdih 3x

Meaning: Glory be to my Lord, the Most High and all praise be to Him

prostration prayer 3

Amen

Subhaanaka alloohumma robbanaa wa bihamdika alloohummaghfirlii

Meaning: Glory be to You, O Allah, our Lord and all praise be to You. O Allah forgive me.

prostration reading 4

سُبُّوحٌ قُدُّوسٌ رَبُّ الْمَلاَئِكَةِ وَالرُّوحِ

Subbuuhun qudduusun robbul malaa-ikati war ruuh

Meaning: Glory be to You and Glory to God the angels and spirits

prostration reading 5

O Allah, Allah, bless us

Alloohumma laka sajadtu wabika aamantu wa laka aslamtu khosya’a laka sam’ii wa bashorii wa mukhkhii wa ‘adhmii wa ‘ashobii

Meaning: O Allah, only to You I prostrate, only to You I believe and only to You I submit. Only to You do my hearing, my sight, my brain, my bones, and my nerves submit.

Reading Sitting Between Two Prostrations

Here are some readings sitting between two prostrations, Sinaumed’s can choose one of them.
O Lord

Allohummaghfirlii warhamnii a’aafinii wahdinii warzuqnii

Meaning: O Allah, forgive me, have mercy on me, protect me, guide me and give me sustenance (Abu Dawud)

O Lord

Allohummaghfirlii warhamnii wajburnii wahdinii warzuqnii

Meaning: O Allah, forgive me, have mercy on me, fulfill my needs, give me guidance and give me sustenance (Abu Dawud)

رَبِّ اغْفِرْ لِى وَارْحَمْنِى وَاجْبُرْنِى وَارْزُقْنِى وَارْفَعْنِى

Robbighfirlii warhamnii wajburnii warzuqnii warfa’nii

Meaning: O Allah, forgive me, have mercy on me, fulfill my needs, guide me and increase me (Abu Dawud)

Early Tahiyat Reading

لتَّحِيَّاتُ الْمُبَارَكَاتُ الصَّلَوَاتُ الطَّيِّبَاتُ لِلَّهِ السَّلاَمُ عَلَيْكَ أَيُّهَا ​​النَّبِىُّ وَرَحْمَةُ اللَّهِ وَبَرَكَاتُهُ السَّلاَمُ عَلَيْنَا وَعَلَى عِبَادِ اللَّهِ الصَّالِحِينَ أَشْهَدُ أَنْ لاَ إِلَهَ إِلاَّ اللَّهُ وَأَشْهَدُ أَنَّ مُحَمَّدًا رَسُولُ اللَّهِ

Attahiyyaatul mubaarokaatush sholawaatuth thoyyibaatu lillaah. Assalaamu ‘alaika ayyuhan nabiyyu wa rohmatulloohi wa barokaatuh. Assalaaamu’alainaa wa ‘alaa’ibaadillaahish shoolihiin. Asyhadu allaa ilaaha illallooh wa asyhadu anna Muhammadar rosuulullooh

Meaning: All honors, blessings, blessings and kindness are only for Allah. May peace be upon you, O Prophet, as well as God’s mercy and blessings and may peace be upon us and God’s righteous servants. I testify that there is no god but Allah and I testify that Muhammad is the messenger of Allah (HR. Muslim)

Final Tahiyat Reading

التَّحِيَّاتُ الْمُبَارَكَاتُ الصَّلَوَاتُ الطَّيِّبَاتُ ِللهِ ، السَّلاَمُ عَلَيْكَ أَيُّهَا النَّبِيُّ وَرَحْمَةُ اللهِ وَبَرَكاَتُهُ السَّلاَمُ عَلَيْنَا وَعَلَى عِبَادِ اللهِ الصَّالِحِيْنَ . أَشْهَدُ أَنْ لاَ إِلَهَ إِلاَّ الله وَأَشْهَدُ أَنَّ مُحَمَّدًا رَسُوْلُ الله. اَلَّلهُمَّ صَلِّ عَلَي سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمّدْ وعلى آلِ عَلَي سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّد كَمَا صَلَّبْتَ عَلَى إِبْرَاهِيْمَ وَعَلَى آلِ إِبْرَاهِيْمَ وَبَارِكْ عَلعَلَي سَيِّدِنَا مُحَمَّدٍ وَعَلَى عَلَي سَيِّدِنَا آلِ مُحَمَّدٍ كَمَا بَارَكْتَ عَلَى إِبْرَاهِيْمَ وَعَلَى آلِ إِبْرَاهِيْمَ فِيْ الْعَالَمِيْنَ إِنَّكَ حَمِيْدٌ مَجِيْد. اَلْلَّهُمَّ إِنِّيْ أَعُوْذُبِكَ مِنْ عَذَابِ جَهَنَّمَ وَمِنْ عَذَابِ القَبْرِ وَمِنْ فِتْنَةِ المَحْيَا وَالمَمَاتِ وَمِنْ شَرِّ فِتْنَةِ المَسِيْحِ الدَجَّالِ.

“Attahiyyaatul mubaarakaatush shalawaatuth thayyibatul lillaah, Assalaamu’alaika ayyuhan nabiyyu warahmatullaahi wabarakaatuh, Assalaamu’alainaa wa’alaa ‘ibaadillaahish shaalihiin. Asyhadu allaa ilaaha illallaah, Waasyhadu anna Muhammadar rasuulullaah. Allahhumma shalli ‘alaa Muhammad wa ‘alaa aali Muhammad, kamaa shallaita ‘alaa Ibraahim, wa ‘alaa aali Ibraahim. Wabaarik ‘alaa Muhammad, wa ‘alaa aali Muhammad, kamaa baarakta ‘alaa Ibraahim, wa ‘alaa aali Ibraahim. Fil ‘aalamiina innaka hamiidum majiid. Allaahumma innii a’uudzubika min ‘adzaabi jahannama wamin ‘adzaabil qabri wamin fitnatil mahyaa wamamaati wamin fitnatil masiihid dajjaal.”

Meaning: “All honor, blessings, happiness and goodness to Allah, greetings, mercy, and blessings I pray to you, O Prophet (Muhammad). Greetings of safety, may it remain for all of us, pious servants. I testify that there is no god but Allah. and I testify that the Prophet Muhammad is the Messenger of Allah.

Dear Allah! Give mercy to the Prophet Muhammad. As You once gave mercy to Prophet Abraham and his family. And bestow blessings on the Prophet Muhammad and his family. As You gave blessings to Prophet Abraham and his family.

In the entire universe, You are the praiseworthy, and the Glorious. O Allah, I seek refuge in You from the torment of hell and the torment of the grave and from the slander of life and death and from the evil slander of the Dajjal.”

 

The factors that cause scarcity are – In economics the term scarcity is definitely very common to hear. Scarcity itself is a serious problem whose impact can hamper the smooth running of a country’s economic activities. The term scarcity itself refers to the absence of supplies of the goods sought. This is because any goods and services that are made to meet human needs are not enough to meet human needs.

The factors that cause this scarcity need to be understood by everyone. The problem is, this will affect every person and also the country. There are several factors that cause scarcity and the types of scarcity itself. To be able to understand more about the factors that cause scarcity, Sinaumed’s can listen to the article below.

Definition of Scarcity

In general, scarcity is a condition where humans will be faced with limited economic resources to be able to meet unlimited needs. In other words, scarcity is a condition where humans need something but it takes effort or sacrifice to get it.

According to the source.belajar.kemendikbud.go.id page , scarcity is a gap between limited economic resources and an unlimited number of necessities of life.

The definition of scarcity according to economics is a situation where the number of means of satisfying needs is less than the number of needs for these means of satisfaction. This situation will make humans make a choice among various profitable alternatives.

In economic theory it is said that resources have a value of zero or are worthless so that they can be said to be scarce. This means that the rarer an item is, the more valuable the sacrifice or price that must be paid to get it.

Characteristics of Rarity

You can detect whether an item currently on the market is experiencing scarcity or not with the following characteristics:

1. Resources are insufficient or goods and services are limited.
2. Human wants or needs are unlimited.
3. The number of tools that meet your needs is very limited so it’s hard to get.
4. The asking price will increase dramatically when compared to the usual price due to limited quantities and high demand for goods.
5. customers or consumers must make sacrifices to be able to obtain goods or services, even sacrificing the needs of others to meet their more important needs.

Types of Scarcity

Scarcity itself has several types that can occur from several resources, including:

1. Scarcity of Human Resources

An economic activity definitely requires humans, humans do not only act as resources or producers but also as users of the results of these economic activities or commonly referred to as consumers.

An example of a scarcity of human resources is a shortage of labor in a company or an industry. This deficiency can be in the form of quantity or shows a physical amount or it can also be a lack of qualities such as the ability to think or skills.

In order to be able to deal with this problem properly, the community needs to improve thinking skills such as improving the quality of education, knowledge, expertise, insight and mastery of technology so that they can become skilled and qualified workforce candidates.

2. Scarcity of Natural Resources

All industrial process activities and services certainly require natural resources to be used. Natural resources are everything that exists in nature, including biotic resources (animals and plants) and abiotic resources (air, water, soil, climate and minerals). These resources will later be explored until finally they can be used by humans.

However, continuous use of natural resources and not re-using them will cause the existing resources to dwindle. Especially non-renewable natural resources and this will lead to scarcity of natural resources later.

An example is mining natural resources such as oil. When a paper factory needs oil to be able to operate a machine for making paper but the existing oil cannot meet the needs of the paper factory, so in the end the paper factory has to buy oil from abroad which will certainly cause transportation costs and more expensive costs.

3. Scarcity of Entrepreneurship Resources (entrepreneurship)

Entrepreneurial resources are one of the factors of production whose functions and duties regulate and combine other factors of production such as (power, natural and capital), so that they can produce goods and services for human needs.

Qualified entrepreneurs can use existing resources to be able to create quality products that are very popular among consumers. However, if the number of people who are self-employed is still limited, it will also be very limited.

The way that can be done to overcome this problem is to have an entrepreneurial spirit by studying the success stories of entrepreneurs or increasing skills by taking other entrepreneurial classes.

4. Scarcity of Capital Resources

Capital resources are all man-made resources that can be used to facilitate the implementation of the production process. From these capital resources can produce goods or products that have value benefits to meet a human need.

The form of capital resources can be in various forms, such as cash or physical capital, such as raw materials, buildings, equipment and machinery. Weak capital resources will generate interest and skills in workers or human resources.

One way to overcome this is to have a strong desire to work and try hard and build and enhance creativity.

Causes of Scarcity

Well, Sinaumed’s is an explanation of the meaning of scarcity and also the types of scarcity that you need to know before knowing the causes of scarcity.

1. Population growth

The first factor is population growth and is a factor that must be an important concern. Rapid population growth means more needs to be met. If this need cannot be met properly, it will cause scarcity.

2. Differences in geographic location

The different geographic locations cause the distribution of resources in different areas. There are areas that have fertile soil, but there are some areas that do not have fertile soil but are barren and lack clean water.

3. Damage to natural resources

Even though all aspects of production will require natural resources, there are still natural resources that are damaged by human activities. Many elements finally let go of responsibility and do not care about the preservation of natural resources.

Examples that we can observe are illegal logging, land clearing and forest burning. Not only will it have an impact on the production process which will be difficult because the forest is already scarce, but it will have an impact on the environment such as the animals that live in the forest and there will be global warming.

4. Low production capacity

Production capability will be determined by factors of production in the form of labor, capital, natural resources, and also entrepreneurship. Production capability greatly influences the availability of goods or services as a means of fulfilling human needs.

Low and limited production capabilities will result in low production quantities. This can lead to unfulfilled human needs.

5. The slow development of technology

The technology used by manufacturers in the production process greatly affects the ability of the production process itself. If the process is slow and the application of technology is slow, it will result in not fulfilling human needs to the fullest.

6. Natural Disasters

Natural disasters such as floods, earthquakes, landslides, volcanic eruptions and other natural disasters will cause scarcity. This is one of the factors of scarcity that cannot be predicted by humans. After a natural disaster occurs, there will be damage to buildings, infrastructure and other natural resources which will be damaged and even cause casualties.

7. Pandemic

From 2020 to 2021 we have already felt the effects of the pandemic which has had such a negative impact on all levels of society. The pandemic occurred and caused an unpredictable scarcity. An example of the Covid 19 pandemic where there is a scarcity of hand sanitizers and masks so that their prices have skyrocketed.

This is also due to restrictions on community activities which cause the production of all goods to also stop. Therefore, it can lead to limited users of goods or services, human resources are also limited because many people become victims.

8. War

Apart from pandemics and natural disasters, war can also cause scarcity. A state of war will disrupt economic activities such as production, consumption, and distribution. This can also be felt today, namely during the war between Russia and Ukraine.

Impact of Scarcity

The scarcity that occurs will certainly have an impact that will be felt by the community. Here are the effects of scarcity that can be felt.

1. Price Increase

If demand is great and resources are few then prices will increase far from usual. This happens because whoever is fast then he who can and dares to pay higher will also get it. For example, during a pandemic, the prices for tissue and other basic necessities were still reasonable, but after the Covid pandemic, the need for food will increase and prices will become expensive because there is panic buying, so that many residents end up buying goods in large quantities and leaving scarcity for residents who other.

2. Non-fulfillment of desires

If there is scarcity, it will prevent humans from fulfilling all their desires, in the end this condition will make them limit their spending to buy or use means of satisfying their needs.

3. Decreased social welfare

Scarcity will increase the price of production and the price of basic needs will increase. This can lead to a decline in social welfare. If it is not handled properly, it will increase the poverty rate and it will be difficult for the country to progress.

4. The unemployment rate is increasing

Means of satisfying needs are generated through production activities, distributed by distributors, then consumed. If scarcity occurs, it means there is a problem in its economic activities.

For example, the scarcity of cooking oil hampers the food production process. This problem can increase the unemployment rate. Due to the scarcity of resources, there is also a lack of income to pay for human labour.

5. Increased crime

If scarcity occurs and the community cannot meet their needs, it will result in people doing everything they can to meet their needs. In this condition, it has an impact on the potential for crime. This is because the business being carried out, if it is not proportional to the availability of jobs, then this business will not generate exchange rates.

6. The poverty rate has increased

The lack of resources capable of providing purchasing power results in an inability to meet needs. Unpurchased means of satisfying basic needs can be indicated as the emergence of poverty. The poverty rate that arises due to scarcity, has an impact on the difficulty of developing a developing country.

How to Prevent Resource Scarcity

After knowing several factors that cause scarcity and the impact that occurs when the scarcity occurs. The following is how to prevent scarcity because of course it will be easier to prevent scarcity than having to overcome scarcity.

1. Develop a priority scale

It is important for us as humans to set priorities and make plans. Planning is arranged based on a priority scale from the most important to the least important. By compiling this priority scale, it is a good step to overcome scarcity.

2. Save the use of natural resources

As explained above that all economic activities will require natural resources in the production process. Even though natural resources are abundant, if their use is not limited, they will be depleted and run out slowly. So that we as humans are expected to be wise in utilizing natural resources properly and not arbitrarily.

3. Maintaining Nature Conservation

Of course preserving nature is our obligation as citizens, especially the preservation of our country’s nature. This requires awareness in every human being in order to preserve natural resources. For example not littering in natural areas and replanting forests so that deforestation does not occur.

4. Improving the management of various natural resources

There are many ways we can improve natural resource management. For example, planting more trees and not hunting rare plants and animals, as well as selective logging in land clearing.

5. Creating substitute goods or substitute goods

These substitute goods are substitute goods that will replace other goods but do not eliminate the useful value of the goods being replaced. An example is replacing electricity with natural resources, namely sunlight.

6. Improving the quality of human resources

If quality human resources are reduced, it will cause minimal absorption of productive human resources. This will increase the unemployment rate and if there are many people who are less qualified then production development will also be hampered.

The way to overcome this problem can be done by providing new training for workers so that they can improve their abilities.

7. Manage capital resources properly

Managing capital resources, will relate to a person’s ability to set priorities in meeting needs. When managing capital resources goes hand in hand with setting priorities, this really helps someone manage their expenses properly and correctly.

For an entrepreneur, this can streamline operational costs, the hope is that with minimal capital, they can get maximum profits. This is what is called managing capital resources effectively.

Well, Sinaumed’s is an explanation of the factors that cause scarcity. We can start to save and also make good use of resources so that there is no scarcity. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you, Sinaumed’s.

If Sinaumed’s wants to read about books about scarcity or natural resources or other books, then Sinaumed’s can read and buy his books at sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Christin Devina

 

Reference :

• https://sinaumedia.com/literasi/pengertian-kelangkaan/
• https://www.kompas.com/skola/read/2022/09/08/113354569/kelangkaan-pengertian-dan-Factor-Cause?page=all
• https://roboguru.ruangguru.com/question/ Factor-Factor-Cause-Langkakan-Ada-_QU-PYACW871
• https://katadata.co.id/agung/berita/626264b18f60c/kelangkaan-Jadi-Jadi-Terbatasnya- Sumber-daya-ini-pembebabnya
• https://hot.liputan6.com/read/4979568/Jadi
• https://www.merdeka.com/sumut/pahami-Factor-Cause-Langkakan- Sumber-daya-alam-dan-cara-meprevent-kln.html
• https://tirto.id/apa-saja-Factor-yang-mebabkan-kelangkaan- Sumber-daya- Ekonomi-gin9

Charity Registrar Angels – Angels are one of God’s creatures created from light. Angels are assigned by God with various tasks. There are those who are in charge of guarding heaven, guarding hell, and delivering sustenance to God’s servants. Among the angels there is also a duty to record charity.

Whether a good deed or a bad deed, Allah has commanded His angels to always watch over the movements of human deeds. Humans cannot be separated from the angels who record their deeds.

Angels as God’s Creation

Angels are God’s creatures who are given charity but are not given lust. So that angels will always obey whatever Allah SWT commands. Angels neither drink nor rest nor sleep. In the task of being a charity recorder, angels are consistent without ever violating God’s commands.

Angels were created to manage all affairs as in the Qur’an it is said ” wa al mudabbinati amra ” (qs. AN-Nazi’at 97:4) and ” tanazzalul mala’ikatu warruhu fihaa bi idzni rabbihi min kulli amr ” (al -Qadar:97:4), then Allah created them with full power and each functioned in its task. Likewise with humans who God chose as the most perfect creation compared to other creations.

Angels are beings who have the duty to control nature in a physical sense. This understanding shows that the spiritual task of angels is as an intermediary / mission between God and humans. Malak/Angel is a creature whose duty is to convey something from Allah SWT to His creatures.

In addition, angels are supernatural beings created by Allah from light who are given various forms by Allah and have wings numbering two, three and four, to the point of being countless.

According to the opinion of scholars, angels are spirits created by Allah from light that have the power to transform themselves into other creatures, who obey Allah’s orders and never in the slightest argue with what Allah has ordered.

Angels are supernatural beings who live in their occult and must be believed by every Muslim in their existence, even though they are not known in essence.

This is because human reason is limited, so that the soul that is in him cannot be known for certain. The creation of angels by Allah is solely determined by Allah himself, this kind of condition will not reduce his power which has made angels as His representatives, because the creation of angels is essentially the same as the creation of humans, they were created to serve and worship Him.

Angels and jinn were created long before Allah created humans, even though angels and jinn live in the same realm but they live in different dimensions. On the one hand angels can see jinn but jinn cannot see angels, the number of angels is also more than the jinn and the number of jinn is more than humans

All of them had a margin of nine to one. This comparison 9:1 occurs between spirits and angels, angels and jinns, also jinns and humans whose difference is more jins than humans.

 

The Urgency of the Creation of Angels 

1. Creation of Angels

Regarding angels, in the Qur’an it is not clearly explained how the process of creating angels took place, but in the hadith of the Prophet it is told that angels were created from light.

It is not known exactly how this process occurs and from what kind of light they are created, all that can be known is that angels were created before Allah created humans.

2. Worship of angels

Basically the creation of angels by Allah SWT is the same as humans and jinns, namely to worship Allah. If the angels worship by carrying out God’s commands continuously and there is no element of disobedience, humans and jinns can make mistakes in worship.

The angels who never get tired of glorifying day and night indicate that the glorification of angels is a form of obedience and obedience in carrying out God’s commands without any slight development.

 

 

Angel Abilities and Traits

Angel Ability

The angels enshrined in the Koran show that each angel has their own position and status. These positions and positions are stratified according to the duties and responsibilities of angels. Likewise with the power that each of them has, this power is positioned in one position in the sight of Allah, they have different positions.

In addition, in the Al-Qur’an it is also stated that there are two general abilities possessed by each angel. Physical ability is an ability that is beyond the substance of angels and is only related to the problem of personal angelic potentials.

Another ability possessed is the ability to move and move quickly. This ability cannot be ascertained with one count of time. In fact, the movement speed of angels cannot be measured even with advanced technology. Humans in this case can only predict the speed of angels through the calculation of time in the world.

People only know that because angels are creatures created from light, logically the speed of angels is calculated at the speed of light. While the non-physical abilities of angels are important angelic abilities or characteristics, these abilities are related to the functional substance of angels.

Functions and Duties of Angels

Allah created angels as the most creatures, no creature can know the number of angels even the angels themselves except Allah as the creator. So to find out as a form of faith for faithful Muslims, Islam gives a name and assignment for each of them which represents the many angels with the number of angels that must be believed.

These angels functionally represent all existing angels and are directly related to the existence of nature in general and humans in particular.

1. Archangel Gabriel

Archangel Gabriel is his trusted angel or ambassador. Jibril as the agent of Allah’s revelation and the most trusted messenger and has a high position. Thus, since the sending of the first prophet to the last prophet, the process of giving revelation always passes through the angel Gabriel.

The angel Gabriel is the archangel of the angels, he is the leader of all the angels and he is the great and most powerful angel of Allah, who is highly obeyed in the angelic world. The angel Gabriel is in charge of maintaining fire and ripening fruits, and as the ruler of the winds and his army.

2. Archangel Michael 

Angel Mikail is in charge of managing and controlling raindrops and things caused by water droplets such as plants, animals, humans and other ecosystems. It is true that from the water comes a life and from that life the angel Mikail acts as an angel who regulates its sustenance.

3. Angel Israfil

Angel Israfil served as a trumpet blower twice. The first blast is to kill all creatures both in the heavens and on earth, while the second blast is to revive all creatures.

The trumpet is a tool that is blown by the angel Israfil resembling a trumpet later before the start of a new life, namely the beginning of the afterlife.

4. Angel Azrael

The angel Azrael is tasked with determining the end of something in this world, both in the heavens and on earth. The taking of the lives of the believers gently is the opposite of the condition of the disbelievers.

5. Guardian Angel

The guardian angel is also called al-mu’aqqibat. In charge of guarding humans during the day and night, when humans are still and moving, and in all human conditions. They guard humans from in front and behind, from wild animals and from disturbances by jinns and demons.

God sends guardian angels to humans as a form of God’s mercy to humans. The nature of Rahman is a trait that is given to every human being without distinguishing Muslims or not. No one can take care of humans at all times, both at night and during the day under any circumstances, except only Allah SWT.

6. Angel Ridwan

In Islam, the angel Ridwan is known as an angel who is friendly and gentle and has high affection. He is in charge of taking care of heaven which is wide between heaven and earth, then serving those who enter it. He also has assistants in his duties.

The guardian angel of heaven always greets those who enter it as a sign of respect for those who have been patient in facing all the tests and trials while living on earth.

7. Angel Malik

Angel Malik is in charge of guarding hell, he also has assistants in guarding the inhabitants of hell. There are nineteen guardian angels, but it is not explained concretely the interpretation of the number nineteen, whether the number has an unlimited meaning, so that the interpretation of the nineteen angels has an unlimited number for the guardians of hell.

8. Angel Raqib and Angel Atid

Angels Raqib and Angels Atid are angels who look after humans and record all their deeds while living in the world. This angel’s record is authentic evidence for everyone in the hereafter. As with other angels, Raqib and Atid also have other angels as assistants.

Allah explains that the task assigned to these two angels is that not a single utterance is uttered by a person without an angel beside him (Raqib and Atid), who watches over and is always present to record his deeds which are rewarding and deeds which cause sin.

Although Allah knows every action of a person and is closer than a person’s pulse, Allah also sent two angels to record all the words and deeds of his servants.

God has given pleasure to humans, so God created it in a good and perfect form. Then Allah gives pleasure to humans by sending two guardian angels who always guard and record their deeds, so they can give a perfect reward.

9. Munkar Angels and Nakir Angels

Munkar Angel and Nakir Angel are in charge of asking several questions to the corpse in the grave.

 

The task of Angel Raqib and Angel Atid

In more detail, we will consider the duties of the angel of record of charity. The angels who record good and bad deeds are named Raqib angels and Atid angels. Angel Raqib is the angel who records good deeds on our right shoulder, while Angel Atid is the angel who records bad deeds on our left shoulder.

These two angels always accompany us wherever we go. Angels Raqib and angels Atid always watch over humans and are present wherever humans are. So there are many angels Raqib and angels Atid, as many as there are humans in this world.

The angels Raqib and Atid always accompany humans and in carrying out their duties these two angels use their qorin which is placed for every human being.

The angel Raqib is in charge of recording all human good deeds, while the angel Atid is in charge of recording all human evil deeds. Angel Raqib is always side by side with Angel Atid in carrying out his duties.

The angels Raqib and Atid are very honest and never disobey Allah SWT, they record them very carefully so that not a single good or bad practice escapes their notes. They are not tasked with passing judgment on humanity, but simply taking notes. All decisions are returned to Allah SWT.

For example, when we do a good deed, even if it’s small, even with the intention of doing good, the angel Raqib will record it as a charity. If we help our friends who are in trouble, help disaster victims, fast sunnah Monday-Thursday, obligatory prayers and sunnah prayers, and all other good deeds even if only removing thorns from the road.

However, if we do bad deeds, such as stealing, lying, being arrogant, leaving prayer and others, then our bad deeds will be recorded by the angel Atid. The difference is, if it’s just an intention and hasn’t done it, the angel Atid won’t record it.

Therefore, whatever actions we do, remember that there will be two angels who are always watching and present to record our actions as humans. These recorded deeds will later be counted, revealed, and weighed on the Day of Judgment. Not only will our deeds be recorded, but every word that we utter and do will also be recorded by the supervising angel / angel Raqib and the angel present / angel Atid.

There is nothing wrong with doing good even though no one is watching and you are afraid to do bad things in silence. Because we as humans are not alone, there are two angels who will continue to watch over and be present to record good deeds and bad deeds.

The Wisdom of the Angel of Charity Recorder 

Sometimes the wisdom in the creation of the charity recording angel is beyond human reason. The lesson is that Allah SWT has arranged and managed everything and directed it as well as possible.

Allah SWT specifically pays attention to His creatures by representing angels who record deeds even though Allah knows best what is done. All this is done to explain the perfection of Allah SWT and his concern for humans and the perfection of His care.

After learning about this charity recording angel, it is hoped that there will be a sense of always being watched over by Allah SWT in all of us and will foster enthusiasm to continue doing good deeds. If Sinaumed’s still wants to know everything about the angel of charity, you can visit https://sinaumedia.com/ to get his books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia will always provide the best and latest information.

Isra Mi’raj Events – The facts contained in the brief history of Isra Mi’raj in the Hadith in Islam are important history for Muslims to know. There are so many lessons to be learned in the events and history of Isra Mi’raj.

The incident that took place on 27 Rajab in the eighth year of prophethood is an event of the holy journey of the Prophet Muhammad SAW. It was carried out from the Grand Mosque to the Aqsa Mosque in Palestine, until it rose to Sidratul Muntaka in the seventh heaven in one night.

If you think about using logic it doesn’t make sense, but Muslims must believe in it because there is information from authentic hadiths and also the Qur’an. The understanding of the Isra Mi’raj event notes, based on the studies of most commentators, that the Isra Mi’raj event is a very special and supreme event.

Because at the beginning of the verse Allah SWT says it begins with the word ‘subhana’ which means ‘most holy’, not found in 113 other letters in the Qur’an. This can represent proof of His love and affection for His beloved servant, the Prophet Muhammad SAW.

This is also a very powerful event because humans have never experienced it before. Rasulullah SAW traveled as fast as lightning and then ascended to the sky until Sidratul Muntaka.

الإِسْـcturetonded&NDAH: هُوَ تَوَجُّهُ النَّبِيِّ ﷺ لَيْ wait wait.

Isra or sara ‘سرى’ means traveling at night. In terms, Isra is the journey of Rasulullah SAW one night from the Grand Mosque in Mecca to the Aqsa Mosque in Palestine. This event is mentioned by Allah SWT in the Qur’an:

سُبۡحَٰنَ ٱلَّذِيٓ أَسۡرَىٰ بِعَبۡدِهِۦ لَيۡلٗا مِّنَ ٱلۡمَسۡجِدِ ٱلۡحَرَامِ إِلَى ٱلۡمَسۡجِدِ ٱلۡأَقۡصَا ٱلَّذِي بَٰرَكۡنَا حَوۡلَهُۥ لِنُرِيَهُۥ مِنۡ ءَايَٰتِنَآۚ إِنَّهُۥ هُوَ ٱلسَّمِيعُ ٱلۡبَصِيرُ

Meaning: “Glory be to Allah, who has defended His servant one night from Al Masjid Al Haram to Masjid Al Aqsa which We have blessed around him so that We show him some of Our signs (greatness). Verily, He is All-Hearing, All-Knowing . ” ( QS Al Isra: 1 )

الctureمِعْicipcturetontonرَاجُ: هُوَ صُعُوْدُ النَّبِيِّ ﷺ إِلَى الْعَالَـمِ الْعُلْوِيِّ وَ فِيْect

Mi’raj literally means going up. In terms of the rise of Rasulullah SAW to Sidratul Muntaka. In the Qur’an, Miraj is alluded to in Surah An-Najm.

وَلَقَدۡ رَءَاهُ نَزۡلَةً أُخۡرَىٰ ١٣ عِندَ سِدۡرَةِ ٱلۡمُنتَهَىٰ ١٤ عِندَهَا جَنَّةُ ٱلۡمَأۡوَىٰٓ ١٥ إِذۡ يَغۡشَى ٱلسِّدۡرَةَ مَا يَغۡشَىٰ ١٦ مَا زَاغَ ٱلۡبَصَرُ وَمَا طَغَىٰ ١٧ لَقَدۡ رَأَىٰ مِنۡ ءَايَٰتِ رَبِّهِ ٱلۡكُبۡرَىٰٓ ١٨

Meaning: “And indeed Muhammad saw Jibril (in his original form) at another time, (namely) at Sidratul Muntaka. Nearby is a paradise where he lives,(Muhammad saw Jibril) when Sidratul Muntaka was covered by something that covered him. His (Muhammad’s) vision did not turn away from what he saw and did not (also) go beyond it. Indeed, he has seen some of the greatest signs (power) of his Lord “ . ( QS An-Najm: 13-18 )

A Brief History of the Events of Isra Mi’raj in Hadith

According to Syekh Muhammad Khudori in Nur Al Yaqin fi Sirati Sayyidil Mursalin, explained that the things that triggered the Isra and Mi’raj events were as a form of tasliyah (entertainment) that Allah SWT gave to his girlfriend (Prophet Muhammad SAW) because he was left by two people he loved namely Khadijah the wife and Abu Talib the uncle. This event occurred precisely in the 11th year of prophethood (the Prophet Muhammad SAW was 51 years old at that time) or commonly referred to as ‘amul huzn (year of sorrow).

One night after the evening prayer, Rasulullah SAW rested for a while while lying in the Grand Mosque. Then he was visited by the angel Gabriel and his chest was split open.

“Then my heart was taken out and washed with ZAM ZAM water, then returned to its place by filling it with faith and wisdom . ” ( Narrated by Bukhari )

After that, the buraq was brought which became his vehicle during the Isra. Buraq is one root word with barq which means lightning.

“Buraq-namely a white mount was brought to me, tall, taller than a donkey and shorter than a bighal, he put his steps as far as he could see . ” ( HR Muslim )

Upon arrival at the Aqsa Mosque, he prayed two rak’ahs leading the spirits of the Prophets. After praying and leaving the Aqsa Mosque, the Angel Gabriel came carrying two containers of drinks. One contains milk and the other contains khamar. Rasulullah SAW also chose milk.

“Indeed you have chosen chastity,” said Gabriel in the continuation of the hadith. Mi’raj began. The Prophet ascended the buraq with Jibril until he arrived at the first sky. In the follow-up to the authentic Bukhari hadith from Malik bin Sha’sha’ah, the continuation is explained.

‘Then I carried it on the back of Buraq and Jibril went with me until I reached the sky of the world and then he asked to open the door of heaven.”

Until he passed through the gates of the sky inhabited by the spirits of the Prophets. In the seventh heaven, Rasulullah met Prophet Ibrahim who was leaning his back on Baitul Makmur. Where that place is entered every day by 70,000 angels and they don’t come back after that. Then the Buraq went with me to Sidratul Muntaka whose leaves were as wide as the ears of an elephant and as large as their fruits were like large jugs.

When the order of Allah SWT fulfilled Sidratul Muntaka. Sidratul Muntaka changed and no one from Allah’s creatures could explain the characteristics of Sidratul Muntaka because of his beauty. So Allah gave Revelation and made it obligatory for me to pray fifty times a day and night. After being assigned to pray fifty times a day, the Prophet came down and met Prophet Musa.

“What has your Lord made obligatory upon your people?” asked Prophet Musa. I replied, “At 50 times”.

Musa said, “Go back to your Lord, ask for relief because your people will not be able to do that. Truly I have tested the Children of Israel and I have known how their reality “. “I will return to my Lord.” Then I begged, “O Lord, give relief from five prayers. Then I returned to Musa ‘alaihis salam. I said to him, “Allah has given relief five times”. Musa said, “Surely your people will not be able to do that, so return to your Lord and ask for relief.” I kept going back and forth between my Lord with ease until my Lord said:

“O Muhammad, in fact it is obligatory to pray five times a day and night. Each prayer is rewarded 10 times, so 5 prayers equals 50 prayers. Whoever intends to do a good deed that he does not carry out, then it is recorded for one good deed. And if he does it then it is recorded for yes ten goodness. Whoever intends to do a bad thing but he does not do it, the bad thing is not recorded at all.

And if he does, it is recorded as an ugliness.” Then I went down to meet Prophet Musa and I told him. So he said, “Go back to your Lord and ask for relief again.” I replied, “I have repeatedly returned to my Lord until I feel ashamed of Him.”

On the way to Sidratul Muntaka the Prophet Muhammad SAW and the Angel Gabriel stopped at the seven layers of heaven, namely:

1. The first sky, Rasulullah SAW met Prophet Adam as
2. The second sky, Rasulullah SAW met Prophet Yahya as and Prophet Ishaq as
3. The third sky, the Prophet Muhammad met with the Prophet Yusuf as
4. The fourth heaven, Rasulullah SAW meets Prophet Idris as
5. The fifth heaven of the Prophet SAW met the Prophet Harun as
6. The sixth sky, the Prophet Muhammad met with the Prophet Musa as
7. The seventh heaven of Rasulullah SAW met Prophet Ibrahim AS

When he had finished receiving the prayer order, the Prophet Muhammad SAW returned to riding his buraq to return to Mecca accompanied by the Angel Gabriel. “According to a story, Buraq was so fast when the Prophet Muhammad SAW came home, it was said that the Prophet’s bed was still warm . ” (Abi Rachman/Nashih).

 

 

The Facts Behind the History of the Isra Mi’raj Event in Islam

Summarized from several sources, there are several things that need to be known in the Isra’ Mi’raj event. Among them:

1. Prophet Muhammad SAW ascended into the sky with his Spirit and Body Prophet Muhammad SAW was traveled by Allah SWT to the sky with his Body and Spirit. And his body is still in its original form, not turning into light.
2. Understanding the Obligation of Prayer. The meaning of the Isra Mi’raj celebration is to glorify and enliven the Sunnah of the Prophet Muhammad SAW because the Isra Mi’raj celebration will always raise the theme of the story of the Prophet’s Isra Mi’raj, with extensive discussion and an emphasis on understanding the obligation to pray.
3. The Prophet Muhammad SAW saw Allah SWT with the eyes of his heart when the Prophet Muhammad SAW was Mi’rajkan by Allah SWT, it was stated that he spoke directly to Allah SWT. However, according to the majority of scholars, the Prophet Muhammad at that time did not see it with his own eyes, but saw Allah SWT with the eyes of his heart.
4. Allah SWT does not need a place. The Prophet Muhammad SAW spoke with Allah SWT above the Mustawa. But don’t dream that Allah SWT is above the sky. So what needs to be known is that over Mustawa is not the place of Allah SWT, but the place of the Prophet Muhammad SAW.
5. The Prophet Muhammad saw the Prophets and Apostles. The Prophet Muhammad SAW when he was alive met with the Prophets and Apostles who had passed away and talked. It is a miracle and what the scholars understand is that people who are alive today could have met the Prophet Muhammad SAW as a karomah given by Allah SWT. Even though the Isra Mi’raj event may not occur to ordinary human reason, it is obligatory for Muslims to believe in it.

The Tajdid Journal of Ushuludin Science, UIN Jambi, noted that based on the study of most commentators, the Isra Mi’raj event was a very special and very great event. Because at the beginning of the verse Allah SWT says it begins with the word ‘ Subhaan ‘ which means ‘Glorious’, it is not found in 113 other letters in the Al-Qur’an.

This can represent proof of His love and compassion for His beloved servant, the Prophet Muhammad SAW. This is also a very powerful event because humans have never experienced it before. Rasulullah SAW traveled as fast as lightning and then ascended to the sky until Sidratul Muntaka.

Wisdom Events Isra Mi’raj

From the events of Isra Mi’raj, we certainly need to understand the wisdom of this journey. There are so many lessons and lessons that we can get from the journey of the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Isra and Mi’raj are things that are very clear and explicitly mentioned in the Qur’an, an event that must happen, must be true and there is no doubt at all even though the human mind cannot reach it.

Before the Isra Mi’raj journey began, Rasulullah SAW first opened his heart by the angels Gabriel and Mikail and then washed it with Zam-zam water three times and filled that noble heart with wisdom and faith. This surgery was carried out before entering the heart of the journey of the Prophet Muhammad SAW from the Grand Mosque to the Aqsa Mosque, to be continued until Sidratul Muntaka. From this surgery on the heart of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, you get the lesson that the heart is the most important thing in human beings.

The liver is the center of metabolism of faith and piety. Whereas now many people only rely on their brains with logic and ratios and overflow the role of this very important heart. In fact, various considerations of justice and truth originate from the heart, not the brain. The heart leads us to universal goodness, while the brain will only lead you to partial goodness, goodness that has been mixed with various interests.

The Isra and Mi’raj events of the Prophet Muhammad SAW in a short time have been widely reported in the people of Mecca. Regarding this event, the Quraysh infidels increasingly hated and ridiculed and ridiculed the Prophet Muhammad. Abu Jahl challenged the Prophet Muhammad SAW to tell the event to the people of Mecca, after the people of Mecca gathered, the Prophet Muhammad SAW told the event in detail and nothing was missed. Hear stories

Prophet Muhammad SAW for Muslims who are still weak in their faith, many become apostates but for those whose faith is strong they remain unshakable and unaffected by the ridicule, because they are convinced of the truth of the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Another story from this event regarding what Abu Bakar Ash Shiddiq did, he had a different attitude from the others, after he came to people who were still unsure about the Isra Mi’raj incident.

Abu Bakr came to Rasulullah SAW and asked for a direct explanation. After hearing it from Rasulullah SAW himself, Abu Bakr Ash Shiddiq immediately accepted it, therefore the Prophet Muhammad SAW called him “Ash-Shiddiq”. From this explanation, it can be learned that the Isra Miraj event should increase and strengthen faith and devotion to Allah SWT by carrying out His commands, namely carrying out the five daily prayers.

The Isra Miraj event can be learned by Sinaumed’s by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always tries to give its best so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

The prayer that is most feared by jinns and demons is important for every Muslim to know. In addition to practicing dhikr readings, there are special prayers that can expel jinns from both our bodies and those around us.

Prayers to exorcise jinn and demons generally come from verses of the Koran. Apart from that, there is also the most powerful prayer which was even taught directly by the angel Gabriel to the Prophet Muhammad SAW.

In addition to the prayers that have been taught by the angel Gabriel, in the Al-Quran there are also several verses that are also very feared among the jinn. Want to know the reading of the prayer and the story behind the efficacious prayer to burn and expel the jinn? Come on, see the review below.

Signs of People Bullied by Jin

In everyday life, we sometimes encounter houses, offices or places that are disturbed by jinns, demons or other supernatural beings. In fact, there are also jinn who disturb humans, both to others and to themselves, both visibly like being possessed or not, which is usually marked by the appearance of symptoms of anxiety, restlessness, lazy worship, slurred speech, unclear illness, and other strange symptoms.

In such conditions, we can carry out expulsion efforts such as reciting verses from the Koran and so on. However, there are times when reciting the verses of the Koran does not work to drive it away, as the Prophet saw experienced during the jinn’s night, the night when the jinns heard the Koran.

As told by Ibn Mas’ud, that night, the Prophet SAW was visited by an Ifrit genie who was carrying a fiery torch in his hand. There are also those who argue that the Prophet visited by the genie Ifrit on the night of isra-mi’raj. At that time, he then read the verses of the Koran.

However, there was no reaction except that the genie was getting closer. So, the angel Gabriel offered him, “Shall I teach you some sentences that if you read them, they will fall down and the torch will die?” (Narrated by Malik, an-Nasa’i, ath-Thabrani, and others).

In human life, you must have heard or seen disturbances by jinn against mankind. This cannot be denied.

For that, it’s a good idea to equip yourself as a form of defense to help yourself or others in need. There will always be jinn that disturb humans, both visually and through the subconscious.

You should memorize the prayer for exorcising jinn in Islam just in case you need it one day.

The Elixir Prayer Burns and Exorcises the Jinn 

The Prayer Taught by the Angel Gabriel to Rasulullah SAW

This story is told in several books such as the Book of An-Nur Al Wahhaj Fi Qishati Al Isra wal Mi’raj, the Book of Al-Anwar Al-Bahiyyah, the Book of Wa Huwa bil Ufuq Al-A’la, and many others. During the Isra Mi’raj journey, the Prophet was given a miracle by Allah, namely being able to see the jinn.

While on the way, there were lots of Ifrit genies who wanted to attack him with fire in their hands. At that moment, the angel Gabriel came to the Prophet and said, “Would you like me to teach you a sentence, if you say it, the fire will go out and he will fall down on his face?”

Prayer to Exorcise Jin Taught by the Archangel Gabriel

The angel Gabriel then taught several sentences which, after being read by the Prophet, the Ifrit genie immediately fell down and the torch he was carrying immediately went out. The following is a prayer taught by the angel Gabriel to the Prophet to expel the most powerful jinn.

The Prophet then said, ” Teach me O Jibril”. Then, the angel Gabriel replied,

 أَعُوذُ بِوَجْهِ اللَّهِ الْكَرِيمِ، وَبِكَلِمَاتِ اللَّهِ التَّامَّاتِ الَّتِي لَا يُجَاوِزُهُنَّ بَرٌّ وَلَا فَاجِرٌ مِنْ شَرِّ مَا يَنْزِلُ مِنَ السَّمَاءِ، وَمِنْ شَرِّ مَا يَعْرُجُ فِيهَا. وَمِنْ شَرِّ مَا ذَرَأَ فِي الْأَرْضِ، وَمِنْ شَرِّ مَا يَخْرُجُ مِنْهَا، وَمِنْ شَرِّ فِتَنِ اللَّيْلِ وَالنَّهَارِ، وَمِنْ شَرِّ طَوَارِقِ اللَّيْلِ، وَمِنْ شَرِّ كُلِّ طَارِقٍ إِلَّا طَارِقًا يَطْرُقُ بِخَيْرٍ يَا رَحْمَنُ.

A’udzu bi wajhillahil karim wa bi Kalimatillahit tammati lati la yujawizuhunna barrun wala faajirun min syarri maa yanzilu minas sama’i, wa min syarri ma ya’ruju fiha, wa min syarri ma dzara’a fil ardhi, wa min syarri ma yakhruju minha , wa min fitanil laili wan nahari, wa min thoriqil laili wannahari, illa thariqan yanthiqu bi khairin, ya rahman.

Meaning: “I seek refuge with the face of Allah, the Most Honorable and with the perfect words of Allah, which no good person and no ungodly person can surpass, from any evil that descends from the sky and from any evil that rises to sky; from whatever evil enters the earth and from whatever evil comes out of the earth; from slander during the night and during the day; from the disasters of the night and the day, except those that come with good, O Most Merciful One.”

After Rasulullah SAW read the prayer, the Ifrit jinn immediately fell down and the fire he had brought to attack Rasulullah SAW was immediately extinguished. Then, Rasulullah SAW continued his glorious journey back.

The Throne Verse

Apart from the prayer above, here are the verses of the Qur’an that Jin and Satan fear the most. This verse is very famous and has great virtue, namely Ayat Kursi. Rasulullah SAW said: “Indeed it (Verse of Chairs) is a very great verse contained in the Qur’an.”

Ayat Kursi is found in Surah Al-Baqarah Verse 255, which contains the oneness of Allah and His absolute power. It was narrated from Abdullah bin Ubay bin Ka’ab, his father (Ka’ab) once told him that he had a large container filled with dates.

His father used to look after the barrel of dates, but he found it running low. One night, when he was guarding it, suddenly he saw an animal that looked similar to a baligh boy.

Then Ka’ab greeted him. The creature also answered Ka’ab’s greeting. “Who are you, Jin or human?” asked Ka’ab. “I’m Jin,” he replied. “Take your hand in mine.” The creature reached out to Ka’ab, and it turned out that its hands were like dog paws and so was its fur. “Is that really the form of the Jinn?” asked Ka’ab again. “You now know Jin. Among them, there is no one stronger than me.”

“What prompts you to do this?” “It has come to me that you are a human being who likes to give charity, so we want to get some of your food.”

“What can protect us from your interference?” The genie said: “This verse, namely Ayat Kursi.”

The next day, Ka’ab went to meet the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam and told him about it. The Prophet said: “It is true what the evil one said.” (Reported by Hakim, quoted by Ibn Kathir when interpreting Ayat Kursi)

In another history, it is told the story of Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu ‘anhu who managed to catch a thief in the zakat warehouse during the month of Ramadan. When the thief was caught, he taught the great sentence to Abu Hurairah so that he would not be taken prisoner.

“When you sleep, recite Ayat Kursi: Allahu laa Ilaaha illaa Huwal-Hayyul Qayyum… until the end of the verse. And he also said: “If you read that, then you will always be guarded by Allah, and Satan will not approach you until morning.” Rasulullah SAW told Abu Hurairah that the thief was a devil in disguise.

Quoted from the Muslim Fiqh page, one of the most effective prayers to expel jinns and demons is QS. Al-Baqarah verse 255 or often known as Ayat Kursi. In a history from Ubay bin Ka’ab, this verse is even called the most glorious verse in the Al-Quran. It contains none other than the oneness and absolute power of Allah over all things. The following are Arabic and Latin readings and their meanings:

اَللهُ لآَإِلهَ إِلاَّهُوَالْحَىُّ الْقَيُّوْمُ ج لاَتَأْخُذُه سِنَةٌ وَلاَنَوْمٌ ط لَهُ مَافِى السَّموَاتِ وَمَافِى اْلاَرْضِ قلى مَنْ ذَالَّذِيْ يَشْفَعُ عِنْدَه اِلاَّبِاِذْنِه ط يَعْلَمُ مَابَيْنَ اَيْدِيْهِمْ وَمَاخَلْفَهُمْ ج وَلاَيُحِيْطُوْنَ بِشَيْئٍ مِنْ عِلْمِه اِلاَّبِمَاشَآءَ ج وَسِعَ كُرْسِيُّهُ السَّموَاتِ وَاْلاَرْضَ ج وَلاَيَؤدُهُ حِفْظُهُمَا وَهُوَالْعَلِيُّ الْعَظِيْمُ

“Allahu laa ilaaha illaa huwal hayyul qayyum. Laa ta’khudzuhuu sinatuw wala naum. Lahuu maa fissamaawaati wa maa fil ardh. Man dzal ladzii yasfa’u ‘ indahuu illaa bi idznih. Ya’lamu maa baina aidiihim wamaa khalfahum. Wala yuhituna bi syai-in min ‘ilmihi illa bi maa syaa-a. Wasi’a Kursiyyuhus samaawaati wal ardha walaa ya-uuduhuu hifzhuhumaa Wahuwal ‘aliyyul ‘azhiim.”

Meaning: “Allah, there is no God (who has the right to be worshiped) but He Who is eternally alive and continuously takes care of (His creatures); not sleepy and not sleeping. To Him belongs what is in the heavens and on earth. Nothing can intercede with Allah without His permission? Allah knows what is before them and behind them, and they know nothing from Allah’s knowledge except what He wills. Allah’s chair covers the heavens and the earth. And Allah does not find it hard to care for both of them, and Allah is Most High, Most Great.”

Surah Al-Mu’minun Verses 97-98

The next prayer is QS. Al-Mu’minun Verses 97-98 which basically contains about asking Allah SWT for protection from the whispers of jinns and demons.

رَّبِّ اَعُوْذُ بِكَ مِنْ هَمَزٰتِ الشَّیٰطِیْنِۙ وَ اَعُوْذُ بِكَ رَبِّ اَنْ یَّحْضُرُوْن

“Robbi a’uudzubika min hamazaatisy-syayaathiin wa a’udzubika robbi ayyahdhuruun.”

Meaning: “O my Lord, I take refuge in You from the whispers of satan and I also take refuge in You, O my Lord, so that they do not come near me.”

Say Taawudz

Audzubillah himinas syaiton nirojim

Meaning: “I seek refuge in Allah from the temptations of the accursed Satan.”

Surah Al-Falaq

Qul a’udzu birabbil-falaq. Min syarri ma khalaq. Wa min syarri gasiqin iza waqab. Wa min syarri-naffasati fil-‘uqad. Wa min syarri hasidin idza hasad.

Meaning : “Say, ‘I seek refuge in God who controls the dawn (dawn), from the evil (creature) created, and from the evil of the night when it is pitch dark, and from the evil (women) witches who blow on knots ( rope), and from the evil of an envious person when he is envious.”

Surah An-Nas

Surah An-Nas can also be used as a practice to expel demons. Besides that, if you read the meaning of this letter, the point is actually in our hearts. Satan and jinn usually enter through our hearts and affect humans and make them afraid.

For this reason, from now on we can use it as remembrance and prayer to expel demons and jinn from our homes.

Qul a’udzu birabbinnas. Malikin-nas. Ilah-nas. Min syarril-waswasil-khannas. Alladzi yuwaswisu fi sudurin-nas. Minal-jinnati wannas.

Meaning: “Say, “I seek refuge in the Lord of humans, the King of humans, the worship of humans, from the evil (whispering) of the devil hiding, who whispers (evil) into the human bosom, from (groups of) jinns and humans.”

QS. Shaad verse 41

رَبَّهُ أَنِّي مَسَّنِيَ الشَّيْطَانُ بِنُصْبٍ وَعَذَابٍ | رَّبِّ أَعُوذُ بِكَ مِنْ هَمَزَاتِ الشَّيَاطِينِوَأَعُوذُ بِكَ رَبِّ أَن يَحْضُرُونِ | وَحِفْظاً مِّن كُلِّ شَيْطَانٍ مَّارِدٍ

Rabbi Annii Massaniya as-SYaithoonu binusybin Wa Adaba, Rabbi A’udzu bika min Hamazaati-s-I am Thiini, Wa A’udzubika Rabbi an Yahdhurun. Wa khifzhon min kulli Syaithoonin Maarid.

Meaning: ” Indeed, I was disturbed by Satan with great discomfort and suffering . “

Al Mukminun verses 97-98

رَّبِّ اَعُوْذُ بِكَ مِنْ هَمَزٰتِ الشَّیٰطِیْنِۙ وَ اَعُوْذُ بِكَ رَبِّ اَنْ یَّحْضُرُوْن

“Robbi a’uudzubika min hamazaatisy-syayaathiin wa a’udzubika robbi ayyahdhuruun.”

Meaning: “O my Lord, I take refuge in You from the whispers of satan and I also take refuge in You, O my Lord, so that they do not come near me.”

QS. As-Shaffat verse 7

وَ حِفْظًا مِّنْ كُلِّ شَیْطٰنٍ مَّارِدٍ

Latin: “Wa hifzhon min kulli syaithoonin maarid”.

Meaning: “And (We) have guarded it from every rebellious devil.” (As-Saffat Verse 7)

call to prayer

In Imam Nawawi’s Adzkar book, it is stated that the call to prayer can be effective in expelling these spirits. This comes from the hadith of the Prophet SAW.

Idaza taggolawat Lakumul ghollanu fanaaduu bil adzani

Meaning: “If spirits bother you, then call to prayer.”

Basmalah

Besides the Seat Verse, the most feared and hated verse by Jin and Satan is the first verse that opens Surah Al-Fatihah, namely the sentence “Basmalah”.

بِسْمِ ٱللَّهِ ٱلرَّحْمَٰنِ ٱلرَّحِيمِ

Bismillahir rahmanir Rahim

Meaning: “In the name of Allah, Most Gracious, Most Merciful.” (QS Al-Fatiha Verse 1)

This verse can provide protection from Satan when read, with Allah’s permission. Reciting Bismillah is not only useful for preventing the entry of demons, but can also expel the devil itself.

One of the virtues of Basmalah is that the devil shrinks if we recite “Bismillah” in every thing we do.

Prophet Solomon’s prayer

This prayer of Prophet Sulaiman is found in Surah An-Naml verses 30-31 which reads as follows.

بِسْمِ اللهِ الرَّ حْمَنِ الرَّ حِيْمِ , اَلَّا تَعْلُوا عَلَىَّ وَاْتُونِى مُسْلِمِيْنَ

Meaning: “In the name of Allah, Most Gracious, Most Merciful. Don’t be arrogant towards me, and come to me as someone who has surrendered.”

How to Overcome Fear of Jinn and Satan

Satan and jinn will never stop to harass humanity. In fact, not infrequently the disturbances they do actually have a bad impact on humans.

Therefore, in order for us to avoid being disturbed by Satan, we should often read the holy verses of the Koran with the intention of keeping ourselves safe. There are several prayers to expel demons from the human body that you can try reading.

Satan consists of various types and there are good and bad as well. Usually it is these evil demons that tend to annoy humans and have misleading goals. However, often we are not aware of this disturbance from Satan.

When you are at home and feel that you are being disturbed by a genie or a demon which creates excessive fear, start with calm and think clearly. If we are sure that there are no disturbing or disturbing things, then there is no reason to be afraid of being disturbed by jinns and demons.

Pray more and if we always remember the existence of Allah, jinns and demons will not disturb us excessively. Jinn and satan disturbances are more in the form of encouragement to do negative things that arise from within us.

However, for people who are always anxious, there is no guarantee that their fear will disappear, unless they really believe that they will always be protected by Allah SWT whenever and wherever they are.

Thus the discussion about the efficacious prayer of burning and expelling the jinn. Hopefully after reading this article to the end, you will be braver against jinn and demons.

Sinaumed’s can get more information by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantik Sukma Divine

 

 

State Elements – Currently, there are already many countries in a continent. Even though there are already many countries on this earth, countries cannot be formed just like that. In other words, a new state can be formed if it already has elements of the state. Then, what are the elements of the state?

Before discussing further about the elements of the state, it is better for us to discuss the meaning of the state first.

Definition of Country

A region is said to be a country if it has people, permanent territory, and sovereign government. The definition of the state is the form of organization of society or groups of people who have the power to regulate relations by administering order and setting the goals of life together.

Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, the notion of a state is as an organization in an area that has the highest legal authority and is obeyed by the people. In addition, the notion of the state is a social group that occupies a certain territory or area that is organized under effective political and governmental institutions, has political unity, is sovereign, so that it has the right to determine its national goals.

A region can be said to be a country if the region has fulfilled the various elements needed by a country in it. Until now, the number of countries around the world has reached 195 countries. Each of these countries has a form of government that is different from one another.

The establishment of a country is influenced by four important elements, namely people, territory, government, and recognition from other countries. The most important state elements for the establishment of a state are the people. However, that does not mean the other three elements are not important. Because, the establishment or formation of a state must indeed fulfill these four elements.

Reporting from the journal Constitution as a Benchmark for the Existence of a Modern Law State (2018) written by Indah Sari, the four important elements for the establishment of a state are in line with Article 1 of the Montevideo Convention in 1933.

Definition of the State According to Experts

The following is the meaning of the state according to experts, namely:

1. Aristotle

According to Aristotle, the notion of the state comes from the merging of families into larger groups.

Later, these groups merged with each other and became a village, and so on until it became a country. The country referred to by Aristotle is still the same as a city or polis.

2. Jellinek

The definition of a state is an organization that gets power from the community and already has a certain territory.

3. Immanuel Kant

Immanuel Kant said that the notion of the state is an organization that functions to carry out the public interest in the jurisdiction, within the limits set by law, which have been mutually agreed upon.

4. Max Weber

According to Max Weber, the state is a group of people who monopolize the use of physical violence in certain areas. The state as an obligatory political organization with a centralized government maintains a monopoly on the lawful use of force within a given territory.

5.Mac Iver

According to Mac Iver, the state is an association that creates public order in a certain area by using a legal system, where to realize this situation, there is the granting of coercive power.

6. Miriam Budiardjo

According to Miriam Budiardjo, the notion of the state is an area where there are people and these people are governed by officials so that these people comply with legal regulations. The order is based on sovereign power.

 

Theory of State Formation

1. The Occupational Theory

The theory of the formation of a state in which a free area is then occupied by a nation which then establishes a state in the area is called the theory of occupatie or conquest. Occupatie is the occupation of an area that was originally no man’s land by humans or a nation, which then establishes a state in that area.

An example of the occupatie or conquest theory is the occupation of Liberia by Negro slaves who were liberated in 1847. Another example is the countries that existed in the era of Ancient Greece and Ancient Rome.

Apart from the theory of occupatie or conquest, based on a factual approach, states can also be formed due to:

• Separatie
  Separation from the mother country and declaring its own independence.
• Function
  Merging several countries into one new country.
• Innovation
  A country that disappears then a new country appears on top of its former territory.
• Cessie
  Submission of an area to another country.
• Anexatie
  Conquest of a territory that allows the establishment of a state in that region after 30 years without any reaction from the local population.
• Proclamation
  Declaration of independence after the success of reclaiming the colonized territories.

2. Theory of God

This divine theory is also often referred to as theocracy. According to the Ministry of Education and Culture (Kemdikbud) website , this theory believes that the state is formed because of God’s will rather than struggle or revolution.

Monarchy countries generally believe that a country is formed because of God’s sovereignty. For example the UK. The principle of God’s sovereignty is not only in terms of the theory of the formation of the state, but also in the moral and legal foundations of government.

3. Community Agreement Theory

Community contract theory is also known as social contract theory. That is, a country is formed because of an agreement between peoples. Jean Jacques Rousseau explained that the condition of society before the formation of the state was to live individually, freely and equally.

However, the community cannot be happy and feel safe because there are continuous attacks from outside the community. Until finally the community made an agreement or social contract to establish a state.

Indirectly, the power of a country is in the hands of the people. Because the people determine the leaders and representatives of the people. The state cannot act arbitrarily, because it must follow the limits set by society.

4. Power Theory

The theory of power means that a country is formed because of power. This means that it is the most powerful person or group that establishes the state. Broadly speaking, the theory of power means that the most powerful group will dominate the weakest group, after a fierce battle.

HJ Laski said that the state can regulate the behavior of its people through a number of regulations it has made to force people to obey the state. The state is controlled by a person or group of people who are strong in various ways, such as intelligence, economy, religion, and physique.

5. Natural Law Theory

The occurrence of the state because something naturally occurs is the theory of natural law. This theory says that natural law is not made by the state, but exists because it is according to nature’s will.

Thomas Aquinas wrote that the formation and existence of a state cannot be separated from natural law. This is because according to the laws of nature, humans must live side by side and work together to meet their needs.

In addition, by nature humans are social and political creatures, who need to establish communities to express opinions and contribute ideas.

Types of State Power

State power is the authority of a state to regulate all its people to achieve justice, prosperity and order. According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), state power is solely aimed at maintaining and maintaining power.

In the book The Unitary State: Concepts, Principles, and Their Applications (2006) by Astim Riyanto, according to the theory of figure John Locke state power can be divided into three, namely:

1. Legislative Power

Legislative power is the power to make or pass laws. Reported by the Encyclopaedia Britannica (2015) , before the advent of the legislature, laws were dictated by the king.

Early legislatures included the English parliament and the Icelandic Althing (founded c. 930). Their powers may include passing laws, setting government budgets. Then, the confirmation of executive appointments, executive branch investigators, impeachment and removal of members of the executive office and the judiciary.

In addition, fix constituent complaints. Members can be appointed or elected directly or indirectly. They can represent a specific population, group, or territorial area. In a presidential system, the executive and legislature are separate. In a parliamentary system, members of the executive branch are elected from members of the legislature.

2. Executive Powers

Executive power is the power to enforce laws. They also have the power to try any violation of the law.

In addition, it also appoints officials, formulates and institutionalizes foreign policy. Executive power is the power to enforce laws

3. Judicial power

Judicial power is the power to defend laws. This power also aims to prosecute any violation of the law. This power often resolves administrative cases, disputes between individuals, groups, legal entities, and government institutions regarding the application of laws or the implementation of government programs.

Most legal systems have included the principle of state sovereignty. Where the government cannot be sued by non-state courts without their consent.

 

 

Country Destination

State goals are generally adjusted to the view of life and noble values ​​of a country. Each country has its own goals. In order to achieve these goals, a state must carry out various existing functions. Basically, the goals of the state are related to the form of the state, the formation and function of state agencies, and the relationship of state agencies.

Even so, some experts express their opinions regarding the goals of the state, namely as follows:

1. State goals according to Shang Hyang

Reporting from the book State Science: Educational Materials for Higher Education (2019) by Max Boli Sabon, Shang Yang formulated the goals of the state as power for power. This means that the state power is the center of all power.

The country’s goals can be achieved by preparing a strong, disciplined army that is ready to face all eventualities. Shang Yang explained that in every country, there are two subjects that always confront and conflict, namely the government and the people.

If one of them is strong, the other must be weak. If the state becomes a strong party, it means that the state will be safe. Conversely, if the state is weak, the condition of the state will be chaotic and anarchic.

2. State goals according to Niccolo Machiavelli

Broadly speaking, Machiavelli’s view is almost the same as Shang Yang’s. According to Niccolo Machiavelli, the purpose of the state is to gather and enlarge state power, in order to create prosperity, greatness, honor and welfare of the people (especially Italy).

In order to achieve this goal, there are several efforts that must be made, namely:

• The government must always try to be above all streams, even if it is weak, it must show that it is more powerful (staats raison).
• Against the people, the government sometimes has to be a lion, so that the people are afraid or sometimes like a mouse deer, so that they are clever in controlling the people (double morals).
• The government may do anything, as long as it is in the interest of the state (the goal justifies any means).
• Any resistance to the government must be dealt with firmly (state power or machstaotsgedachte).

3. State goals according to Dante Alighieri

The goal of the state is to create world peace, through the creation of uniform laws for all mankind. Dante Alighieri argues that world peace and order will not be realized, if there are still many countries or governments in the world that are still competing and fighting.

4. Purpose of the State according to Immanuel Kant

The purpose of the state according to Immanuel Kant is to uphold the rights and freedoms of its citizens. That is, the state must guarantee the legal status of individuals within the country.

This guarantee means that there should be no coercion on citizens who do not comply with the law, because they have not agreed to it. In addition, every citizen also has the same legal position, and may not be treated arbitrarily by the authorities. In order to achieve this goal, the state must separate power from their respective bodies.

For example, legislative power is held by the legislature, executive power is held by the executive body, and judicial power is held by the judiciary.

5. Goals of the State for Socialists

According to socialists, the aim of the state is to provide the greatest and most equal happiness for every human being. The basis of the socialist view is that all humans are born with equal rights and are entitled to equal treatment.

Socialists are of the view that social justice can only be achieved by changing a liberal economy into a family economy under state leadership. The method is that the means of production and distribution which are important and affect the lives of many people, must be owned by the state.

State Elements

” The State as a person of international law should possess the following qualifications ” (a state as a subject of international law must have several elements), namely:

1. Permanent population (must have permanent residents or people)

As mentioned above, the most important element in the establishment of a state is the people. The presence of the people or residents is very important for the formation of a state. Because, without the people, the state will not be formed or stand. So, with the initiative of the people a country can stand.

2. Defined territory (must have a territory or areas)

Is an area that is used as a place to live for the people and the location to organize the state government. Territory is also an important element of the establishment of a country. This is because it is impossible for a country to exist or be formed without clear boundaries.

3. Government (there must be a government)

The government is a tool of the state whose duty and function is to lead state organizations to achieve common goals. This important element of the establishment of a country is needed to secure the territory and regulate public relations so that it is orderly.

In order for this to be achieved, it is necessary to have the power held and exercised by the state government. That way, clear laws will be born, so that society can be more orderly and peaceful.

4. Capacity to enter into relations with other States (ability to enter into relations with other countries)

Countries need to establish relations with other countries, to get recognition which explains that the country has existed and is recognized by the world. This important element of the establishment of a country is not an absolute requirement that must be fulfilled immediately. However, it can be done to carry out international relations in order to achieve national interests.

From all the discussion above, it can be said that the existence of a state does not just happen, but must fulfill several elements of the state and also conditions. Thus the discussion about the elements of the state, I hope this article will be of use to Sinaumed’s.

Sinaumed’s can read books to add information by reading books available at www.sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Understanding the Differences in Economic Development and Economic Growth – Economic growth is an increase in Gross Domestic Product (GDP), without estimating whether it will have an impact on growth or population growth. Meanwhile, economic development is a multidimensional process of social change. Well, there are several differences between economic growth and development! Check out a more detailed explanation of the two below:

Definition of Development and Economic Growth

Economic development cannot be separated from economic growth; Economic development encourages economic growth, and conversely, economic growth facilitates the process of economic development. What is meant by economic growth is the process of increasing the production capacity of an economy which is manifested in the form of an increase in national income.

A country is said to experience economic growth if there is an increase in real gross national product (GNP, GNP) in that country. Their economic growth is an indication of the success of economic development.

The difference between the two is that the success of economic growth is more quantitative, namely an increase in income standards and the level of production output produced, while economic development is more qualitative in nature, not only increasing production, but also changes in the structure of production and the allocation of inputs to various sectors. economic sectors such as in institutions, knowledge, social and technical.

As discussed above, growth and economic development are two different things and Sinaumed’s can study these two things more deeply together with other economics through the book Introduction to Economics below.

Furthermore, economic development is defined as a process that causes the per capita income of the population to increase in the long run. Here there are three important elements related to economic development.

Development as a Process

Development as a process, means that development is a stage that must be lived by every society or nation. For example, humans are born, do not immediately become adults, but to become adults must go through the stages of growth. Likewise, every nation must go through stages of development towards a just, prosperous and prosperous condition.

Development as an effort to increase per capita income

As a business, development is an active action that must be carried out by a country in order to increase per capita income. Thus, the participation of the community, government, and all elements in a country is needed to actively participate in the development process. This is done because the increase in per capita income reflects an improvement in social welfare.

The increase in per capita income must take place in the long term

An economy can be said to be in a developing state if per capita income tends to increase in the long term. This does not mean that per capita income must increase continuously. For example, if a country experiences a natural disaster or political turmoil, it will cause the country’s economy to experience a setback. However, this condition is only temporary, the most important thing for the country is that its economic activity has increased on average from year to year.

To better understand the existing economic development in Indonesia, Sinaumed’s can see the book Multilateral Policy and Indonesian Economic Development which was compiled by researchers from the Fiscal Policy Agency.

 

Differences in Economic Development and Economic Growth

Economic growth, namely the increase in national income, is a form of a process of increasing production capacity. So, in more detail, you can see the process of economic growth from the differences in the characteristics below:

• Economic growth or economic growth is a condition in which economic activities or activities cause increases and increases in goods or services produced by the community.
• Economic growth is characterized by an increase in per capita output, and in the long term.
• Economic growth is a process and not a picture of the state of the economy at a certain time.
• In Economic Growth there are 2 sides that must be considered, namely total output (GNP) and the second side is the number of occupations.
• Economic growth is an indicator of successful development.

Economic Development Economic development is always identified with an increase in the per capita of society, this is also called a fundamental change or fundamental change.

• Economic of Development) namely efforts to increase the standard of living of a nation based on real per capita income.
• Economic development is a process or situation in which a transition occurs from a simple to a more advanced level.
• For economic development, visible change is a multidimensional process which must cover societal attitudes, social structures, and even national institutions.
• Economic development stimulates or stimulates an increase in national income and per capita income as a form of economic growth.
• Economic development is always a process that can increase economic growth.

Factors Influencing Development and Economic Growth

There are several factors that influence economic growth and development, but in essence these factors can be grouped into two, namely economic factors and non-economic factors.

1. Economic Growth Factors

Factors that influence economic growth and development include natural resources, human resources, capital resources, and expertise or entrepreneurship.

Natural resources, which include land and natural resources such as soil fertility, climate or weather conditions, forest products, mining and marine products, greatly influence the growth of a country’s industry, especially in terms of supplying raw materials for production. Meanwhile, expertise and entrepreneurship are needed to process raw materials from nature, into something that has a higher value (also known as the production process).

Human resources also determine the success of national development through the number and quality of the population. A large population is a potential market for marketing production results, while the quality of the population determines how much productivity there is.

Meanwhile, capital resources are needed by humans to process these raw materials. The formation of capital and investment is aimed at exploring and processing wealth. Capital resources in the form of capital goods are very important for the development and smooth running of economic development because capital goods can also increase productivity. Non-economic factors include socio-cultural conditions that exist in society, political conditions, institutions and systems that develop and apply.

In understanding economic growth better, the Convergence of Economic Growth book below can be studied by Sinaumed’s which contains an analysis after the implementation of regional autonomy in Indonesia.

 

 

2. Economic Development Factors

Economic Development Factors include Natural Resources (SDA) in question are such as land, water, air and everything in it. In the sense of all available resources and can be utilized. Human Resources (HR), namely Human Resources who are qualified, competitive, and have soft skills in developing creativity, as well as:

• Empowerment of human resources, if development makes humans as objects as well as subjects, then it is carried out by humans and for the welfare of humans themselves. So, humans as objects must be productive in producing products that are creative and have high competitiveness and selling power.
• Sources of Capital – The size of capital is also a factor that will affect economic growth, usually there is an increase in the addition of production activities. Economic growth is usually supported by several aspects such as increased production aspects, technological and educational developments, increased investment, increased national income, growth in population quantity, and management quality.
• Infrastructure – The link between growth and economic development is the existence of the right infrastructure for and on target so it can facilitate economic growth. This condition has resulted in economic development as an alternative for equalizing economic growth and development. Economic activity is oriented towards growth and development which is based on noble character, has spiritual material elements, elements of the world and even elements of the hereafter.
• Socio-Cultural – Independent development whose purpose is independent is to avoid dependence. For example, you cannot rely on a country for the supply of weapons, so you have to be independent so you can meet their needs independently.
• Government System – Continuation development, of course, has plans and measures so that development is not redundant or lacking, of course it is sustainable step by step. Not big on one side and little on the other. Improvement and growth as well as economic development can also increase world confidence in the existence of a nation. Preferably, the quality and quantity of educational institutions is the most highlighted indicator in a nation. Human development and empowerment are subjects in economic development activities.

Recommendations for Economic Books and Articles

For those of you who are studying economics, here are some recommendations for studying economics that you can have:

1. Globalization, Constitutional Economics, and the Economics Nobel

2. Monetary Economy: Case Study of Indonesia

3. Indonesian Economic Politics

Narrative text structure – Based on its content, in Indonesian there are several types of text. One of them is narrative text or narrative text which contains a chronology of an event. You may have heard of narrative text or are even familiar with it. Understanding the meaning of narrative text is of course important for you to know. This is because narrative text appears frequently in a number of works of fiction and non-fiction.

For some people, maybe they don’t know more about narrative text. However, you don’t need to worry because on this occasion, we will discuss more about narrative text, from its meaning to its structure.

 

So, watch this review till the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Narrative Text

Narrative text is a type of Indonesian language text that is favored by the public, especially for students. This type of text is very popular because it contains interesting stories.

For those of you who are exploring and studying the types of text in Indonesian, you need to know what narrative text is. Narrative text is a type of text that tells an event based on time sequence (chronological), which can be fictional (imaginary) or non-fictional. The definition of narrative text is also known as narrative text, because narrative text is narrative in nature, which means it explains an event or event based on time sequence.

Meanwhile, narrative text based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) explains that the narrative text is narrative in nature. The meaning of narrative text can also be explained by outlining or explaining in an essay.

In addition, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) the meaning of narrative text can also be meaningful with prose whose subject is a series of events. In a narrative text has characters, plot and chronology of an event or event.

Narrative texts generally have the aim of entertaining readers, adding insight or simply providing information that is structured in narrative text. Meanwhile, narrative texts also have conflicts that can be in the form of fiction or non-fiction.

Narrative texts in nonfiction are usually in short stories or novels. Therefore, narrative text in literary works is usually in one part of the paragraph which describes the atmosphere or storyline itself.

 

 

Purpose of Narrative Text

In forming a story that is fun and easy to understand so that a series of events in making an imaginative story certainly requires a systemic structure that is easy to understand and fun.

The purpose and function of narrative text itself can be said to provide information as well as add knowledge, provide insight to the reader, and provide entertainment for the reader. Narrative stories can be in the form of discussing or with any various themes. This is because stories from narrative texts do not only happen in Indonesia.

 

Characteristics of Narrative Text

To understand narrative text, you need to understand the characteristics of narrative text. The following are the characteristics of narrative text.

1. In accordance with its definition, narrative text must tell about an event, with several chronological events or an order of events .
2. Shows the element of deed or action.
3. In addition to the existence of several events, the text must be peppered with problems or conflicts that become the culmination of the narrative, as well as other narrative text structures.
4. Arranged in the right order of time.
5. A narrative must have text elements (characters, setting, plot, theme) which we will discuss together later.
6. Trying to answer the question what happened.
7. Narrative text can provide knowledge through storylines, how an event takes place.

Narrative Text Structure

 

Broadly speaking, the narrative text structure can be divided into four parts, namely orientation, complication, resolution, and coda. For more details, here is the full review.

1. Orientation / Orientation

Orientation is part of the story introduction, in which the writer provides information about the background of the place, time, and introduction of the characters. Through this orientation, the reader will get a little picture of the whole story or information.

2. Complications

Complications contain problems or conflicts that start to occur, until they finally reach the peak of the conflict. Usually, this is the fun part of a narrative text story.

With this complication, the storyline becomes more interesting to read, so that the reader becomes interested in completing the story to the end.

3. Resolution

Resolution shows a decrease in conflict, where solutions or solutions to problems begin to appear, until they find an end. With a resolution, the reader will begin to relax and wait for the end of the story.

4. Coda / Coda / Reorientation

The coda in the narrative text structure contains the moral message or message of the story being told. Usually the coda is written as the closing of the story and is optional or not required.

Elements of Narrative Text

The following are the elements of narrative text that must be present in a narrative story, namely:

1. Theme

Theme is the main idea of ​​a story. Examples of themes that are often raised in narrative stories are love, family, friendship, separation, and so on.

2. Background

This setting is in the form of information on the place and time of the incident, which explains where and when the events in the story occur. Setting refers to the understanding of the place and social environment in which the events that are told take place.

3. Groove

Plot is a series of patterns of behavior to solve the conflict contained in the narrative. Usually the flow of a story can be forward, backward (the story starts from the end to the beginning, aka regressive), and combined (back and forth).

4. Characterization

Characterization, is the appearance of the characters listed in the narrative essay. Based on the character, there is usually a protagonist (main character), antagonist (against the main character), and tritagonist (mediator/neutral). With the presence of this character, the storyline becomes more interesting and creates conflict.

5. Point of view

Point of view is the direction of view and delivery of the author when telling a story. Can be in first person, second person, and third person.

Language Rules of Narrative Text

Apart from the elements above, you need to know that there are also elements of the language rules of narrative text. Here is the full explanation.

Verb / Verb

Of course there are various verbs used to describe what the characters in the story do.

Direct conversation / Direct Speech

This direct conversation is like dialogue between characters or characters in the story.

Time markers / Time signal and Conjunctions / Time conjunctions

Of course this is very important because narrative text is chronological, so it requires links and time sequence information.

Types of Narrative Text

In narrative text essays, generally there is something that actually happened or is just fiction. Therefore, there are various types of narrative text that are commonly known.

There are three types of narrative text, namely informative narrative text, artistic narrative, and suggestive narrative. For more details, here is the full explanation.

Expository / Informative Narrative

Expository and informative narration essentially aims to convey information by clearly elaborating an event. Sometimes expository narratives are distinguished from informative narratives, where expository narrative texts provide really detailed information with accurate data.

Artistic Narration

Artistic narratives can be fictional or non-fictional, usually telling a story to entertain and provide a beautiful (aesthetic) experience to the reader.

Suggestive Narrative

This suggestive narrative, as the name implies, tells something with the intention of influencing the reader by giving suggestions (influences/views).

After discussing the types of narrative text, the next discussion is how to write narrative text.

How to Write Narrative Text

The following is a way to write narrative text that Sinaumed’s can learn or apply.

1. Finding and determining the theme and message to be conveyed.
2. Define target readers.
3. Make a design regarding the main events and form the appropriate flow on the schema you want to display.
4. Assemble the main event sequence into sections such as opening, development, and ending.
5. Make details and explanations about the main events in detail to support the story.
6. Develop character schemes, characters, plot, setting, and points of view.
7. Understand and understand how the rules of punctuation for each sentence in the story.
8. Re-check the finished writing, whether there are errors or sentences that don’t quite fit.

Example of Narrative Text About Legend from a Region

Usually, each region has its own story or legend. For example, according to the folklore of the city of Surabaya, there is a story of a fierce fight between a shark named Sura and a crocodile named Baya, which is the story of the origin of the name Surabaya. Therefore, there is a statue of Sura and Baya, which is an icon of the city of Surabaya, which is located in the middle of the city of Surabaya.

If you are curious about the story, we will tell you about the story of Sura and Baya. Of course, every detail of the story and delivery in the media sometimes there are differences. Some say these two beasts are friends, some say they don’t.

In addition, the animals they fight over can be different, whether it’s goats, deer, monkeys, or other prey animals. This time we will tell the story briefly by adapting the story of Sura and Baya.

The story begins in the province of East Java, there is a ferocious crocodile named Baya living in a river, where he hunts for food. The river that Baya lived in, empties into the sea, where a shark named Sura, the ruler of the sea that other fish fear, lives. Sura felt bored because he only ate fish every day. Out of curiosity, Sura finally went to the river and succeeded in preying on the young deer.

Sura said,  “Wow, it turns out the deer is really delicious”. Eventually Sura became addicted and often hunted other prey there. As time went on, Baya became suspicious because there were fewer and fewer prey, making it difficult for him to find food. Angrily, Baya tried to find out the cause.

One day while tracing the river, Baya saw Sura hunting monkeys. How furious Baya witnessed the incident, “Hey, Sura, this is my territory!” .

Seeing this, Sura, who did not accept it, turned against Baya and they fought. The two beasts were both strong, fierce fights ensued for days so that they both felt tired.

The end of the story, they made an agreement, to divide the territory, with the estuary as the boundary, and Sura returned to the sea. After months without problems, Sura began to miss the delicious prey animals around the river.

Initially, Sura circled the estuary first. However, the results were nil. He also returned to his hunting activities, sneaking and hunting prey animals on the banks of the river, for months. Even though Sura tried not to get caught, in time Baya finally found him. They came back fighting even more fiercely.

Bite after bite of their teeth that are so sharp shouted. Finally, Baya managed to bite Sura’s tail, so that he was seriously injured. Sura was in pain and went swimming to the ocean again. The area where Sura and Baya fought fiercely was later named Surabaya.

The impression that the reader gets after reading the imaginary story above is of course fun because they can imagine things that cannot materialize in the real world. Narrative text or imaginary story is a type of text that presents a unique and entertaining series of events.

The text can be made purely as a result of the author’s imagination or a combination of facts and the author’s imagination. Therefore, the function of imaginative stories is to entertain readers and provide lessons and lessons that can be learned by readers.

Example of Short Narrative Text

The following is an example of our short narrative text with a third person perspective:

To welcome this holiday, Lisa and her family went to stay at grandma’s house. Lisa was so happy to meet her extended family. In the evening Lisa sleeps with her sister, Linda in a room facing the courtyard.

“Linda, did you hear that?”

“What?”

“It seems, there is a baby crying.”

“It’s impossible, here no one has a baby, and grandma doesn’t have neighbors.”

“I’m so scared, this house right, standing near the grave.”

That’s right, there really is a grave opposite grandma’s house. The baby’s crying suddenly got louder.

“Eh, I heard too, the sound of crying, sis.”

Lisa and Linda who heard the baby’s cry became afraid. They ended up not being able to sleep all night. The next day, they told their grandmother what happened last night. His grandmother laughed too.

“That’s the sound of the Meow, the sound of a cat sometimes is like a baby crying.”

Those are some examples of narrative text to make it easier for you to understand narrative text.

Closing

As previously explained that this narrative text can be formed because of the structure in it. The narrative structure, namely orientation, complication, resolution, and coda. Each of these structures has its own function, so that it can produce a story or information that is easy to understand.

Thus the discussion about the meaning to the structure of narrative text. Hopefully all of the discussion above is useful for Sinaumed’s as well as making it easier for you to create narrative text. However, to be able to produce a good narrative text, it takes some practice.

Do you want to find out more about narrative text? You can do this by reading a book. If you want to find a book about writing, then you can get it at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Duties of the Board of Directors – A growing company cannot be separated from the role of great people in it. Apart from the owner of the company, the board of directors plays an important role in building the company. However, to make or appoint this board of directors cannot be arbitrary as long as you appoint people. If it is done haphazardly, the company may not run as expected or it may even end in bankruptcy.

Therefore, as a company owner, you need to make various considerations in preparing the right board of directors so that the company can develop later. So that you can choose the right person to serve as a board of directors, you should first understand the duties of the board of directors, their types, members and salaries which have been summarized from various sources. Check out the more detailed explanation below:

Definition of the Board of Directors

In rule 33/POJK.04/2014, corporate companies and public companies are required to have a board of directors. If based on Article 1 number (5) of Law Number 40 of 2007 concerning Limited Liability Companies (“UUPT”), the board of directors is an organ of the Company that has the authority and is fully responsible for managing the Company and is also in the interests of the Company, in accordance with the aims and objectives of representing the Company, either inside or outside the court in accordance with the articles of association.

In addition, the board of directors is also the people who are elected to represent the shareholders as well as the governing bodies. The board of directors is also determined on the basis of the size of the company’s bylaws, starting from the number of members, structure, and powers.

Type of Board of Directors

The Board of Directors itself is divided into two types, namely the Internal Board of Directors and the External Board of Directors, with a more detailed understanding as follows:

1. Internal Board of Directors

The internal board of directors are members of the board of directors who are major shareholders, employees and officials, and members of the Board of Directors who then have experience in advancing a company. The company director cannot be on the board of directors because the position can be said to be a company executive.

2. External Board of Directors

External board of directors are members of the board of directors who are also someone who comes from outside the company or is independent. In the external board of directors can occupy a chair on the board, but are not involved in the day-to-day operational work of the company.

Usually, external directors provide opinions that are more objective and more independent in providing and resolving company problems with the aim of not benefiting several parties.

Duties of the Board of Directors

The board of directors has the main role as someone who represents the shareholders, which means the main role of the board of directors is to act on the interests of the company which will then generate profits for the company.

It’s safe to say that the board of directors has a role as the last line of defence. This is because the board of directors will make decisions regarding the direction of the company to play a role in maintaining Human Resources (HR).

Another role of the board of directors is in determining compensation for executives, establishing company policies or regulations, and representing each network to then support executives and the board of directors team. In addition, the board of directors must also be able to provide power to the management of a rising company and to ensure maximum profits for the company.

The duties of the board of directors that have been stated in Article 97 UUPT and are proactive, include:

1. The Board of Directors is responsible for all management of the company for the benefit of the company which is in accordance with the aims and objectives of the company, and must also comply with policies that are deemed appropriate within the limits specified in the Law or in the Articles of Association.
2. Directors are also required to act in good faith and be responsible for managing a company.
3. Directors are also required to represent the company both outside and in court.
4. The Board of Directors is also required to prepare and maintain a register of shareholders, minutes of the GMS, and minutes of meetings of the directors, maintain the company’s books of accounts, and report their share ownership.
5. If you then experience negligence or loss, each member of the board of directors is then personally responsible for all losses to the Company if the person concerned is then negligent in carrying out his duties. If the board of directors consists of 2 or more members of the board of directors, then this responsibility will then apply jointly and severally to each member of the board of directors.
6. Then, he also has to lead and manage the company by determining policies according to interests and goals. He maintains and manages the company’s assets, organizes, supports and controls the pattern of division of tasks for each of his employees.
7. He also appoints and fires employees and approves the company’s annual budget
8. He determines salaries, compensation and employee benefits, he also submits financial reports, management and company performance to shareholders on a regular basis.
9. Seeking and guaranteeing the implementation of the business as well as the company’s activities in accordance with the aims and objectives.
10. He also prepares the RJPP and RKAP which are strategic plans that contain the company’s goals and objectives to be achieved and seek approval from the board of commissioners.
11. He also makes an annual report in accordance with the applicable laws and regulations.
12. The board of directors will provide accountability for all information regarding the condition and running of the company to the GMS in the form of an annual report.
13. Providing periodic reports according to the method and time in accordance with applicable regulations and other reports whenever requested by the shareholders.
14. Make a complete company organizational structure with detailed tasks, responsibilities and authorities of management at every level.
15. Establish clear and balanced measures of success or performance indicators, both from financial and non-financial aspects, to then observe the achievement of the vision, mission and goals of a company.
16. Monitor and evaluate the implementation of the RJPP and RKAP, including achieving financial and non-financial targets and following up on various deviations from targets.
17. Develop and implement a company risk management system and build company information technology.
18. The Board of Directors also follows up on audit findings from the Internal Oversight Unit, the Audit Committee and the External Auditor, who then report them to the Board of Commissioners.
19. The Board of Directors also reports relevant information to the Board of Commissioners, for example plans, HR development programs, and accountability for risk management, assessment of company soundness, as well as information technology performance reports.
20. Together with the Board of Commissioners, they are responsible for preparing and holding the GMS.
21. The Board of Directors also ensures that the company carries out various social responsibilities and pays attention to the interests of stakeholders in accordance with applicable rules and regulations.
22. The Board of Directors also reports to the company regarding his and his family’s shareholding in other companies.
23. He then also carries out other obligations in accordance with the provisions stipulated in the articles of association and those determined by the GMS.

Members of the Board of Directors in a Company

The members of the board of directors who are generally found in a company include:

1. HR Planning & Policy Department

Responsible for helping managers to coordinate tasks and evaluate the performance of their subordinates, he also creates work programs, such as in the form of training for development for employees.

2. Internal Audits

Internal audit is a systematic and objective assessment which is then carried out by internal auditors to be able to examine and evaluate organizational activities. With this internal audit, the company’s finances can be maintained properly, so that the company’s finances do not go bankrupt.

3. Corporate Secretary

The corporate secretary is a part that supports the board of directors and plays an important role in ensuring the implementation of various aspects of transparency in a company. The corporate secretary then also functions to establish internal and external communications, investor relations and company leaders.

4. Risk Management Department

This part of the risk management department has responsibility for determining financial, safety and security risks in a company. That way, the production of a company can still run well and smoothly.

5. SHE Management Department

Management of SHE ( Safety and Healthy Environment ) is a series of processes and procedures to then identify potential hazards in the company’s work environment.

6. Department of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)

Judging from the law, CSR is then responsible to all stakeholders, starting from employees, shareholders, as well as consumers, the community and the surrounding environment in all economic, social and environmental aspects of the company.

Board of Directors salary

With so many and not easy tasks and responsibilities, the salary you get as a board of directors is not small. The income from the board of directors is not only from the base salary, but also the board of directors also gets allowances, bonuses and so on. The following is a description or example of the salary of the board of directors of some of the largest companies in Indonesia:

• Bank BCA board of directors salary: the average is IDR 2.16 billion per month
• Bank BNI board of directors salary: the average is IDR 1.03 billion per month
• Pertamina’s board of directors salary: average is IDR 5.61 billion per month

Closing

The Board of Directors then has a Big Share in the Company The board of directors in the company has a very big influence, especially on the success of the company. The board of directors who carry out all their duties and responsibilities properly and correctly and in accordance with various applicable regulations, the company will then run as it should.

If the company grows well thanks to the strategy and proper management of the board of directors, then the company’s stock will rise, and vice versa. Vice versa, if the board of directors cannot carry out their duties properly, the company can experience losses or even go bankrupt.

Thus the discussion about the meaning, salary, and duties of the board of directors. As previously explained, the board of directors cannot be done haphazardly. So, company owners must choose carefully and thoroughly if they want to find a board of directors.

Likewise those of you who want to become a board of directors, you must have the ability to manage the company. Then, are you interested in becoming a board of directors?

Related Books

1. Billionaire Kick – A Proven Way to Get Super Rich

Grant Cardone is a self-taught businessman who—no money, no connections, and no academic degrees—founded and runs several companies with sales of nearly $100 million per year and real estate companies worth approximately half a billion dollars, and has a nine-figure net worth.

Cardone has authored five New York Times bestsellers, and conducted more than a dozen bestselling business programs and webinars. He was voted one of the top 5 CEOs in the world and is considered one of the most influential people in social media today. Despite his commitment to entrepreneurship and family, he is very active in a variety of philanthropic activities last year raising over $100 million for charity.

2. Rich Mindset of Insurance Agents: Anti-Failure Ways for Insurance Agents to Get Rich

An insurance agent who wants to change his life to be better than before, he needs to have a rich mindset. This book will reveal the potential wealth within us, which is called a rich mindset and how to turn it into a behavior that supports insurance sales, in order to create a more valuable life.

In this rich mindset book, nine types of wealth are revealed: Rich in Beliefs, Rich in Values, Rich in Identity, Rich in Opinions, Rich in Hopes, Rich in Decisions, Rich in Attitudes, Rich in Habits, and Rich in Thought Patterns. What’s more interesting, this book also includes an overview of insurance agent business models, instilling an entrepreneur mentality, as well as 27 powerful practical moves to help agents sell life insurance successfully.

3. Son, Learn About Money

Learning about money and the economy is the same as learning the basics of life. Don’t live a life where you depend on other people because you don’t have money. But, control your life mandhi. I hope your life can stand firmly on the foundation of a solid opening. —Excerpts from Chapter “Son, Marriage is an Economic Agreement” Books are the hottest treats I can give.

This book contains the sincerity of my father’s heart, by bringing out everything that has been in my heart for a long time. Your father and mother are limp now, always trying to provide the warmest dish for you. For the sake of serving these warm dishes, we are willing to live simply. However, this dish is only available when karma is still with your parents. This is the reason why Father told me to study economics by myself. —Quotes and Chapter “Keep Your Eyes Open at Night”

4. 50 Secrets of Managing Money

The key to success and success in life turns out to be a purpose in life. Everyone should have life goals and one of those goals is financial goals. Being able to meet financial needs to pay for life is most of the financial goals that people have. It’s just that financial goals are relative and can be different for everyone. But in essence, financial goals are a tool to achieve life goals. A financial goal is itself a journey.

Starting from goals that are short term, medium term, and long term. Financial goals to be achieved through a financial plan of course must be realistic. achievable. yet challenging. In this book there are at least 50 secrets that you can use: 1. How to understand money. 2. How to plan finances. 3. How to put money in investment. 4. How to manage accounts payable. 5. How to set a custom budget.

If you want to find books about managing finances, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Review Text Structure – Does Sinaumed’s know about review text? Of course this theme is familiar, but it is very interesting if it is reviewed through a version that is not exactly the same as the previous one. Well, talking about writing certainly cannot be separated from the presence of language in writing sentences.

Yes, it’s true, it’s easier to write something by using formal language, but another view is that it’s also easier to use informal language, but that’s the taste of each writer, Sinaumed’s. The important point is that formal and informal language is the basis for providing information to the reader, that’s why the review text is formed through writing.

The use of formal language in written sentences is usually based on good and correct Indonesian language rules. Because it is written according to the rules of the language, a formal sentence has a standard word function in it.

Formal sentences themselves are intended for scientific information or official statements. While connoisseurs of non-formal sentences are usually sentences that deviate from grammatical rules and tend to use slang and casual. This sentence is often used in everyday conversations between peers, then in writing it is shown information that is relaxed and includes the reality of everyday life.

The existence of a writing is a communication activity through text media whose purpose is to provide an explanation of an object, or the communicant (reader). In addition, writing can also provide news about events or events that are currently happening, that have already happened, and or represent the feelings of the communicator (writer).

In fact, there is also writing which contains information as the opinion of a writer in giving an assessment of the object he is highlighting.

As human Sinaumed’s, of course we have to buy books, read scientific works and the like. When reading a book or article, you must digest the reading book carefully so you can understand its contents.

In addition, it is also necessary to communicate our understanding in various forms for writing purposes, such as research proposals, book reviews, film reviews and others. That way, it can give birth to someone’s opinion in giving an assessment of an object which is called reviewing.

So, automatically the person reviewing that person is completing or writing a review text. In short, review text is a text that contains reviews or assessments of a work such as films, poetry, books, to other works of literature or art. In other words, review texts are called reviews.

By making this text, if we as writers try to understand another person’s work that we want to review from a point of view that is determined by us. Next, what is the full explanation of the review text? Come on, keep reading this article until the end, Sinaumed’s friends.

Definition of Review Text

Regarding the review text, we can refresh it first, in our daily lives we cannot be separated from the existence of a work that was actually made by someone else. As the work in question, these are works in the form of art, literature, poetry, films, songs, books, music and many other types.

However, with the existence of these works, then there is also a person or group who wants to provide comments or suggestions or a review of the work or more appropriately we call it the author of the review text.

Borrowing a term in the Big Indonesian Dictionary, abbreviated as KBBI, text is defined as a manuscript in the form of the original words of an author; then written materials for the basis as lessons, speeches, and so on. While the comments in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) are satisfactions or interpretations or comments.

We may agree on the review itself as a word review or reviewer. The point is that we can say that a review text is an essay whose contents are in the form of various kinds of peels or comments in conveying views on a predetermined object.

By making the following text, the review text writer will provide information related to the object being reviewed. Therefore, the text can be said to have a subjective nature or only be considered as a suggestion.

We need to know that the text of this review can be written in the media, be it online media or print media. If in online media , usually the text of the review can be found on a blog owned by a person or institution that can be found on social media. Meanwhile, in print media, this text is usually found in newspapers, magazines, or also in a book. So the question is where have you read it?

Basically, when someone has read a review text or review text in a media, of course it can make someone more interested in doing the same thing. For example, reading a review text about a film, the curious reader wants to watch the film as soon as possible.

Meanwhile, when someone reads this text about a book, then they can be interested in buying that book. Even though it is only in the form of a review and is subjective in nature, it is better in making texts, using language that doesn’t drop.

In fact, as much as possible to provide support for the object being reviewed, then the quality of the object can experience a good improvement. That way, the works are increasingly recognized by the wider community, even worldwide.

Next, we will discuss the meaning of review text by experts who say, don’t stop here, friends.

Definition of Review Text put forward by Experts

Strengthening the understanding of the review text, we can refer to other meanings according to experts. Some of the opinions of other experts regarding the meaning of the review text are as follows.

1. Dalman

According to Dalman (2014: 229), review or review is a term used to assess the strengths and weaknesses of a book (work).

2. Insatun & Farida

Text reviews or reviews are writings that contain considerations or assessments of a work written or created by another person (Isnatun & Farida, 2013, p. 57).

3. Waluyo

According to Waluyo (2014, p. 106) a review (review) or also called a text review is a text that contains considerations or reviews about a book (work).

4. Hyland and Diane

Hyland and Diani say that a review is a text that functions to explore and provide an assessment of a literary work, most of which will become a benchmark for improving the quality of a work for readers.

5. Kosasih

According to Kosasih, the review text is the same as the review, which means introducing the work or book to the reader and helping the reader to understand or can even make the reader interested in buying or owning the work or book.

From several definitions according to experts, it can be said that a review text is a writing which contains considerations or judgments about an object, work, or book. In this case, the assessment given can be in the form of strengths and weaknesses depending on the object to be written.

Review Text Structure

After getting to know the definition of review text and definitions according to experts, we also need to understand the structure of review text which consists of four important structures, namely work identity, orientation, synopsis, and work assessment. Borrowing from an excerpt from the Peel Complete Literature module that has been published by the Ministry of Education and Culture, regarding the explanation of the structure of the review text as follows.

1. Identity

The thing that needs to be done when you first want to make a review text is to identify the work to be reviewed. Identity is at the beginning for review text. This identity section consists of the title, author, publisher, year of publication, and pages for literary works.

2. Orientation

Next, make notes on the important things in the work to be reviewed. The first paragraph of the review text contains the orientation of the work introduction. This initial section reviews information about the author or publisher of the work. In addition, it can also be used as an opening sentence for the contents section.

3. Synopsis

After making notes regarding the important and interesting things in the work being reviewed, the next step is to make a synopsis section. In this section a summary of the contents of the work that needs to be reviewed. The author provides a short summary of the book or film, but not everything is explained. For example, from the introduction of characters and the beginning of the conflict to attract readers.

4. Work Assessment

This section contains the advantages and disadvantages of a work. The author can describe more and less sentences using light language and easy to understand. The advantages and disadvantages of a work benefit the reader in understanding the content of the reading.

 

 

Type of Review Text

After understanding the structure of the review text, it doesn’t stop there because the review text also has three types. Descriptive review text, critical review text, and informative review text. The explanation is as follows:

1. Descriptive review text

Descriptive review text is a type of review text that is generally used to review literary works. Therefore, this type of review text is usually in the form of a description or assessment by the author of a literary work in the form of a description. When reviewing literary works with descriptive texts, literary works will be understood in detail and complexly. This is done because the aim is for the reader of the review text to be able to understand the intent of the author of the literary work.

2. Critical review text

Critical Text is a type that is critical or provides a review of a work (generally a literary work) in the form of criticism from a certain point of view. Usually, this critical review is done by analyzing the work or literary works being reviewed. Even though it is analyzed, this critical text is still subjective or only uses the views of the author.

 

 

3. Informative review text

The third or last type of review text is informative text. Informative text is a type of text whose content is in the form of a review of a work that is described with the aim of providing information to the reader. Therefore, informative texts can add information and insight to readers of the review text. Because it contains information that is informative, this informative review text is made using language that is short, clear, and concise.

Steps to Write Review Text

The steps for writing a review text start with determining the topic to concluding it, as follows.

1. Topic

The first step, determine the topic that will be used to write a review text. You can choose a topic as you wish or make observations first. Look for interesting and important things in a work.

2. Introductory paragraph

Once you have decided on a topic, write an introductory paragraph to cover. You can make the initial subject matter to determine the next sentence. Then make a summary of the contents of the work.

3. Series of paragraphs

This part of the paragraph can contain the advantages and disadvantages of the author in a work. Reviewers can read or look for reference sources to strengthen arguments. You can write an opinion based on your personal opinion for the review. Besides that, you can discuss with friends to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the work.

4. Conclusion

The final part is a conclusion that serves to reaffirm the previous sentences. The conclusion also contains suggestions for readers regarding the work.

Features of Review Text

To make it easier to understand and to be able to distinguish review text from other texts, we need to know its characteristics, including:

1. Has another designation that is known by many people, namely the reviewer.
2. It contains the advantages and disadvantages or the advantages and disadvantages of a work or object being reviewed.
3. Include opinions about the content of a work being reviewed.
4. The text structure consists of orientation, interpretation, evaluation, and summary.
5. Opinions or opinions in the review text are facts that have been interpreted.
6. Information comes from the author’s opinion in reviewing or reviewing products or works.

Example of Review Text

Review of the Drama Manuscript Kapai-Kapai by Arifin C. Noer

Work identity

• Title: Kapa-kapai
• Author: Arifin C. Noer
• Publisher: Lontar Foundation
• Year of Publication : 1970
• Pages: 38 pages

Work Introduction Orientation

Drama script is one of the literary works created by the imagination and creativity of an author. Apart from that, the drama script also stores various messages that will be conveyed to the reader or audience.

One of the drama scripts that is often played and has high quality is the drama script Kapai-Kapai by Arifin C Noer.

Summary synopsis of the contents of the drama script

The drama script tells of a young man named Abu who has a wife named Iyem and many employers and always oppresses him. Abu has a lazy nature and likes to fantasize, in every of his fantasies Abu is always lulled by his mother with a mirror of deceit that can make someone’s life happy, while a dark figure always reminds of the time or time of Abu’s death.

Abu continues to try to get the deceitful mirror by justifying any means. In the end Abu got the mirror of deceit he was looking for all this time but at the same time he also met his death.

Assessment of work (strengths and weaknesses)

This drama script has a very high literary value, this can be seen from the language used. The language used is very poetic and full of meaning and conveys moral messages. This is one of the strengths of the drama script entitled Kapai-Kapai. This manuscript was also selected as one of the works in the anthology of 100 years of Indonesian drama published by the Lontar Foundation.

In addition, the characters in it are also interesting, such as Abu, Mother, Moon, The Dark and others. However, I am very interested in the character Yang Kelam even though he is not a character in the script. The dark is a character who has evil and cruel characteristics, a very deep interpretation is needed to find out who this character really is.

The dark one is like the figure of the angel of death who always tells the time of Abu’s death. But on the other hand, the Dark One is also a figure who is on Mother’s side, a character who always cradles Abu. Indeed, there are many advantages of this drama script titled Kapai-Kapai, but there are still weaknesses in it. The highly poetic language which is an advantage earlier can also be categorized as a weakness of the script, because highly poetic language makes it very difficult for the readers or connoisseurs of the play to understand.

So, that’s some information about review text, starting from the definition of review text to examples of review text. Sinaumed’s friends can find other information at sinaumedia.com or books that are interesting to you, you can visit sinaumedia.com.

Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for you and make it easier for you to write a review text. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Examples of content plans – In business development, various types of powerful strategies are needed. One of them is in the marketing process carried out by all parties, especially for the marketing team. Currently, the marketing process is also quite diverse.

Not only relying on conventional methods, but in the marketing process that has been carried out, they have started using digital marketing systems. This shows that the business world has begun to take advantage of existing technological advances.

Maybe the term digital marketing is already familiar to you. However, when talking about digital marketing, of course you cannot be separated from what is called digital content . Creating content cannot be done just like that, there must be special considerations or research carried out so that the goals to be achieved can be more easily realized.

One way is to use a content plan strategy. It is important for business people, especially marketing teams, to know what a content plan is.

So, this article provides an explanation of the content plan which you can read in full.

Definition of Content Plan

Simply put, a content plan is a planning schedule in the development of content with the aim of being a form of support for the business so that it can achieve the goals to be achieved. The planning in question can be like content ideas that will be adapted to the target market, choosing a platform for the content that has been created to choosing the right time to upload the content that has been made.

Apart from that, a content plan can also be interpreted as a technique that must be done for those who want to create content. One of the goals of creating content is to get new customers for the products offered. Therefore, in the process of creating content, planning stages are also needed.

In addition, a content plan can also be interpreted as a method that aims to make a media look more attractive and can make the information contained in the content easier for the audience to understand.

For example, with a content plan, you can try to present content that tells an overview of the products offered, starting from the various advantages to how to use these products.

Reasons Why Content Plans Are Important in Business

As a form of marketing strategy, business people who use digital marketing methods are really obliged to upload content consistently in order to achieve the goals they want to achieve. Be it, to increase the number of new customers, purchase transactions, increase website traffic, increase the number of sales and so on.

In principle, a content plan can indeed assist businesses in developing a content strategy that is more targeted and can provide solutions to problems currently being experienced by consumers. The positive impact of having a content plan is that it can help businesses grow their business more quickly.

In addition, content plans can also help achieve predetermined targets. For example, such as the target number of customers and the number of sales within a month.

So, you as a business actor need not hesitate anymore to take advantage of various types of social media tools to expedite the development of the business that you are running. As an example, you can try using tools that can be used to search for keywords or keywords that are often used by customers when looking for products that are the same as your field of business.

You can also take advantage of tools that can be used to track customer behavior. Or maybe you can try using engagement tools from various platforms such as Twitter and Instagram.

Types of Content Plans

Content plan is divided into several types in it. Which type of content plan will depend on which stage of the marketing funnel you are targeting. So, for more details, you can read several types of content plans, which are seen based on their objectives below.

1. Content Plan with Brand Awareness Objects

The first type of content plan is brand awareness. Where this type of content plan has the goal of increasing awareness related to the business brand. You can try to create top of the funnel content or commonly called TOFU so that you can display your product brand and can get the attention of the intended audience.

By utilizing TOFU content, you can tell your audience about the brands and products you offer. Apart from that, you can also show the value of the company, provide an overview of the role of your product in the problems experienced by customers and can also provide important information to existing audiences.

 

2. Content Plan With Objective Keywords Ranking

A content plan with objective keyword ranking is the next type of content plan. Increasing the number of keywords in the rankings will help you to get organic traffic by utilizing search engines like Google and so on.

That means, the content you create is no longer about how to sell products and to your customers. But the content that you create will also focus on how you sell that content to search engines like Google.

The content that you create will ultimately have a purpose such as showing Google if the content has answers to questions in the search field by using certain keywords that match your content.

3. Content Plan With Conversions Objectives

Content plans with objective confessions have the goal of increasing the number of sales or the number of conversions. You can try creating bottom of the funnel or BOFU type content with the target audience to take action on the product you are offering, such as making a purchase transaction.

In this case, the content you create needs to have the ability to sell products directly and be able to convince the audience that the product you have is the best solution they can use to solve the problems they are facing.

Pros of Content Plans

As previously explained, content plans are very important in business development. The reason is, the use of content plans also provides its own advantages or benefits to the business that is being run.

Below are some of the advantages of a content plan that will be felt by business people.

1. Improved Consistency

The existence of a lot of random content that is not connected to various platforms will have a confusing effect on the audience. This also applies when you try to distribute irrelevant content.

Where the upload process is carried out randomly on an inconsistent schedule will only reduce the level of consistency. But when you are more consistent in determining relevant content and have the same upload schedule, then the audience will continue to visit the posts that you have made.

In fact, it’s not uncommon for them to look forward to posting your next content. This indirectly establishes a relationship between you as a business person and your audience.

 

2. Increase the Target Audience

A content plan will help you better understand your target audience and be able to create content that is more relevant to your audience’s needs. Apart from that, you also know what platform is most appropriate for distributing the content that has been created.

It should also be noted that the goal of content marketing is to be able to provide the right content, to the right audience, at the right time and a comprehensive strategy that is considered to help you achieve it more easily.

3. Improving Branding Quality

Content plans also help you get quality content that is created and shared with a more valuable audience. Of course, it can increase your credibility as a brand and also a thought leader in a certain vertical or industry.

Where it also has an important role in the attractiveness obtained from posts that have been made before. Make sure you always keep the content that is created so that it remains relevant to the business and ensure that the content is insightful.

4. Increase SEO Value

You also need to know if a content plan can help you further optimize some of the important things in the content you create. For example, such as keywords, types of images or videos and titles. Sharing on various types of social media platforms is not only a bridge to direct your audience to your personal website, but also helps increase the SEO value on the business website.

How to Create a Content Plan

Creating a content plan is not as easy as you think. There must be steps that need to be carried out so that the content that is created until finally published can remain relevant and according to the needs of the audience.

So, here are some ways to create a content plan along with explanations.

• Determine the Purpose of Content Creation

When you decide to create the content needed for digital marketing. The first thing you can do is determine the purpose of creating the content. Does the content you create have the sole purpose of sharing information, product education or maybe it is more focused on encouraging consumers to make transactions.

Of course, the three target types of content are very different because the target market to be reached is also different. Content with informational purposes, of course, only focuses on the information provided to the audience.

The hope of this type of content is to be able to provide solutions to the audience to solve the problems they are facing. Then, educational content will provide information about the products you offer.

Where you as a business person and product owner will provide an explanation of the product and the benefits it provides. Whereas content that has the goal of encouraging targets to make transactions will usually provide information about complete product specifications, the advantages of the products you offer compared to competing products and how these products can be useful for customers.

• Determine which platform to use

The next step is that you can try to determine which platform to use. Where each platform will require quite different content. For example, such as a website platform that will require content in the form of articles that are equipped with photos, supporting images or infographics.

Meanwhile, if you choose to use other digital platforms such as Instagram as promotional media, then the form of content created can be in the form of unique photos and videos that can attract the attention of the audience.

It cannot be denied that every social media platform can indeed be used for the business media that you are currently using. But you also need to know that each platform always has a different marketing algorithm.

Even in terms of style and user interests will also be different. Therefore you also need to do analysis and surveys related to the target market and the platforms they often use.

• Create and Collect Customer Database

In order to be able to adjust content to what is needed by customers. Then you also have to find out and get to know potential customers better. It would be better if you try to create a user persona while compiling and collecting a database of existing customers.

Currently, there are many types of social media platforms that you can use to get databases from customers. Meanwhile, the database that you can collect is such as gender, customer name, telephone number, age, home address to e-mail address.

One way that you can apply to get data from customers is to ask customers to subscribe to updates or promotional emails from your company.

The process of creating and collecting this data aims to dig up important information from the customers you are targeting. In the end, you can get demographic reach in compiling a content plan so that it can be more precise towards predetermined goals.

In fact, in this way, you can also adjust the type of content to the audience that is your target market.

• Perform Periodic Evaluation

If you are just trying to run a business, then evaluating it every day is a must for you to do. You can use the results of the evaluation as new promotional material.

When you do an evaluation, you also need to understand more about market psychology. Where you can find out the problems they are facing. Is the content you create can provide a solution to the problems they are experiencing.

In order to get the best results, try to position yourself as a consumer. Think about what consumers expect from the content that you will present. Does the content you create is in accordance with the wishes of the audience.

Sample Content Plan

After you understand everything related to the content plan. The last thing we will learn together is about the example content plan itself. Below are examples of content that you can study.

Get2Growth is a marketing service that provides examples of marketing plans from coffee businesses such as Starbucks. From the example below, you can see that the marketing that is made can be made in a form that is quite practical and does not require many pages. We can already make a content plan. Analysis from various aspects such as the audience, strategy and marketing activities that will be carried out.

So, that’s information about content plans to examples of content plans. Content plans are very important for business development, so now you can try implementing a content plan so that the content you create is also more relevant to the needs of your audience.

If you want to find books about digital marketing strategies, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Hendrik

Reference:

• https://www.jagoanhosting.com/blog/content-plan/
• https://glints.com/en/vacation/content-plan-ada/
• https://www.qubisa.com/article/content-planning-what-and-how-to-make it
• https://qontak.com/blog/how-to-content-plan/
• https://vocasia.id/blog/content-plan-Jadi/
• https://www.dewaweb.com/blog/marketing-plan-for-business/

The scope of macroeconomics –  Economics is a type of science that has developed since ancient civilizations. Starting from such a simple form, economics can develop so that it becomes more complex and structured as it is today.

The scope of economics is very broad. Of course, if we discuss it as a whole, it might take quite a long time.

However, in this article we will discuss one part of economics, namely macroeconomics. Maybe those of you who are often involved in the world of economics are familiar with the term macroeconomics.

So what exactly is macroeconomics? For more details, see the review below.

Definition of Economics

Before we discuss about macroeconomics, it would be better if we also know what economics is. According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, economics has two different definitions.

The first definition, economics is a science that deals with the production, distribution, consumption of goods and also issues related to it such as labor, financing and also finance.

Then, for the second definition of economics in the KBBI is a science related to human social activities in the process of fulfilling life’s needs obtained from their environment.

Branch of Economics

Economics is divided into two branches, namely macroeconomics and microeconomics. Judging from the context, these two types of branches of economics have quite fundamental differences.

Where macroeconomics is more focused on the economy as a whole. Whereas for macroeconomics it is more towards individual economic units.

In addition, the difference between the two can also be seen from how economists emphasize the themes to be discussed. The emphasis for microeconomic theorists is usually on the behavior of economic agents as a whole.

Whereas those who adhere to microeconomic theory will emphasize individual or individual behavior. An example is how the behavior of a company that is located as a producer and consumer as well as a workforce in a more limited context.

Then there is another difference from the economic theory is the assumptions used. Where microeconomic theory is often also referred to as classical economic theory has the assumption that the market structure is a form of perfect competition, the information is perfect and also symmetrical.

In addition, there are also similarities in the input and output sections as well as rational economic actors who also aim to maximize profits. This theory also has an assumption that adjustments through instantaneous market mechanisms can be achieved in which money only functions as a means of transaction.

Thus, according to adherents of classical economic theory. The economic problem is only in the content of the offer.

The momentum of the Great Depression that occurred from 1929 to 1933 was also a milestone for the rise of macroeconomic theory, which was born as a critique of Smith’s classical theory. Adam Smith himself is the most popular figure in microeconomics.

The emerging macro theory was pioneered by John Maynard Keynes so that his followers are often referred to as Keynesians.

Contrary to the assumptions of the proponents of microeconomic theory, the Keynesians have the notion that the market structure has a monopolistic tendency with asymmetrical and imperfect information.

Then, for inputs and outputs that are used as exchanges, they can also be of various types. Keynesian also has the assumption that money can not only be used as a means of transaction, but money can also be used as a means of storing value.

Thus money has the possibility to get an advantage with more speculative actions. From some of these assumptions, it can be concluded that macroeconomics has a view that the role of the government is needed in the process of managing the economy with more monetary and fiscal policies.

 

 

Definition of Macroeconomics

Previously, we briefly explained what macroeconomics is. In this point, we will explain more deeply about macroeconomics.

Macroeconomics is a science that studies the economy as a whole. Macroeconomic studies specifically study matters related to the economy, but on a larger scale and as a whole.

For this reason, macroeconomics is often used as an instrument in the process of analyzing and designing a series of policy targets related to inflation, employment, economic growth and balance of payments in a sustainable manner.

In addition, macroeconomic studies can also be used to conduct a more thorough analysis of producers. Of course consumers will also not be left behind, in which macroeconomics can provide an analysis to them in the context of how to allocate their income to purchase a product and use a service.

Scope of Macroeconomics

There are several economic scopes that we will study together. But before that, we also have to remember again how the mechanism of macroeconomics works. In macroeconomics, which is often applied to target analysis, there are several important things. Starting from policies on economic growth, employment, inflation, country balance of payments and several other things.

This indirectly explains if macroeconomics teaches about an economy that exists in a country in a comprehensive manner, but will still be studied related to causal relationships with aggregate variables.

Then, for the scope of macroeconomics it is divided into three types. Now for more details, here are several types of macroeconomic scope.

1. Determination of the Level of State Economic Activity

The first scope of macroeconomics is as a determinant of the level of economic activity of the State. This is because macroeconomics has a fairly broad and complete scope, such as in the process of producing products, both in the form of goods and services. In this case there are a number of expenditure items such as the points below.

• Corporate or investment expenses
• government spending
• Export as well as import
• Household expenditure used for consumption

2. Government Policy

The problem of inflation and unemployment cannot be separated from the economy in a country. The government has also made various efforts to overcome these two problems, both through tests of fiscal and monetary policies.
Where fiscal policy is a set of steps taken by the government to be able to change the amount and structure of taxes.

The purpose of this fiscal policy is to be able to influence the country’s economic activities and also the community. Meanwhile, monetary policy is a set of policies that will be implemented by the government with the aim of influencing how much money is circulating in the community within the scope of the economy.

 

 

3. Comprehensive Expenses

Overall expenditure can also be referred to as aggregate spending. Where when these expenditures cannot reach the ideal level it will result in problems in the economy. When employment opportunities materialize, they can also help keep an eye on the inflation rate. Therefore, ideally aggregate spending could be at the required level.

Macroeconomic Objectives

The purpose of the existence of macroeconomics can have an influence on the economy in a country. There are several kinds of objectives of macroeconomics. Each of these goals will be used to be able to solve problems that arise in a country. So, for more details, here are some points of purpose of macroeconomics.

1. Helps Create Jobs

One of the policies produced in the macro economy is to help regulate the creation of jobs. That means the state can minimize the problem of unemployment.

When there is an increase in the unemployment rate it can also have a negative impact on a country. In the end, the high unemployment rate can also be a burden on the economy in the country.

2. Increasing domestic production

Much or little production capacity in a country also depends on the high or low amount of investment that can enter the country. Then, for investment itself also depends on the level of domestic savings.

Meanwhile, domestic saving depends on people’s income and interest rates. Therefore, in order to increase production capacity in a country, it can also be done by increasing the income of the people in that country, one way is to increase the productivity of the community.

3. Helps Stabilize Economic Conditions

Economic stability in a country includes several aspects. Starting from the stability of the price of goods, employment and also the level of income owned by the community. The existence of the application of macroeconomic policies can help stabilize the prices of goods and the availability of jobs. This in the end will be able to provide a fairly good impact for a country.

4. Helps Make the Balance of Payments Balanced

The existence of trade transactions with other countries can also affect the economic conditions that exist in that country. Therefore, the balance of payments conditions must also be balanced. Where some of the balance of payments components that are so important are such as monetary traffic, ongoing transactions and also the trade balance.

5. Making Population Income More Even

Equal distribution of population income can occur with the distribution of processed natural resources and human resources. Equal distribution of income is expected to help increase consumption or people’s purchasing power. That way, a balanced and peaceful life without any riots can be realized more easily.

 

 

Macroeconomic Policy

Macroeconomic studies also deal with inflation and deflation, the unemployment rate, and job availability. In practice, macroeconomics also has several policies. So, for more details on what policies are in macroeconomics, here is a complete explanation.

1. Fiscal Policy

Fiscal policy regulates the income and expenditure of a country. A country’s income can be obtained from the taxes paid by each citizen. Not only that, state revenue can also be obtained through non-tax payments such as auctions, fines, gifts from other countries and gratuities.

2. Monetary Policy

Monetary policy is also a differentiator between macroeconomics and microeconomics. Where monetary policy has a function as a measure of how much funds have been issued through the central bank in a country. The more money circulation that occurs, the more it will affect the inflation rate.
In the end, this can help increase the price of a product. But conversely, when the velocity of money is less, the price of a product will also be cheaper.

This is what is often referred to as deflation. Where monetary policy can play an important role in people’s lives to be able to maintain the pace of economic growth in a country.

3. Supply Side Policy

Next, there is a supply side policy that can be used to balance the financial account of a company or country. It is undeniable that currently companies need experts in economics because all financial management processes, especially in the production sector, can be reduced to a minimum.

In addition, product quality can also be balanced with this policy. This will result in a higher quality product. In the Indonesian context, macroeconomics is a system that is used to provide an analysis of economic changes in this country that have the potential to impact companies, markets and society.

In addition, from the existence of macroeconomics, an explanation can also be obtained about the occurrence of an economic condition in Indonesia so that the best analysis results can be obtained.

Macroeconomic Problems in Indonesia

Some of the macroeconomic problems that occurred in Indonesia are as follows.

1. There is Interrupted Economic Growth

In the world of economics, macroeconomic problems can also have an impact on business, entrepreneurs and production. For example, such as large factories, companies to other business ventures.

When this happens, it can cause a company to experience difficulties so that bankruptcy occurs, even at worst, it disrupts economic growth.

When economic growth is disrupted, of course it will also cause a significant impact on other economic sectors.

2. High Unemployment and Poverty Rates

The macroeconomic problem that may be difficult to avoid is the high unemployment rate. This can happen because there are companies that cannot survive in the midst of existing competition, so they have to take action to lay off employees to maintain the company.

One of the causes of the bankruptcy of a company or business venture is because the company carries out a process of selling products aimed at the lower middle class.

Meanwhile, during difficult times, other sectors also decide to reduce employees. This will also further increase the value of unemployment so that it will eventually result in diminishing buying and selling power due to the absence of money circulation.

3. There is an Exchange Rate Crisis

The existence of foreign debt will also be able to cause macroeconomic problems such as exchange rate crises. This will also affect the country’s foreign exchange. It should also be noted that the country’s foreign exchange is one of the sectors that can get the worst impact.

In addition, this impact will also be felt by investors and companies that have cooperation with foreign companies or carry out export import sales.

4. There is Inflation

The existence of high inflation in this country will also be able to have a high enough influence on foreign debt which can also affect the banking world in Indonesia. Meanwhile, the most pronounced form of difficulty is liquidity problems. The impact is that there is a bottleneck in the sector due to the large burden of state forests.

So that’s a summary of macroeconomics . Starting from the understanding of the scope, objectives to the macroeconomic problems that exist in Indonesia have been explained in detail in this article.

If you want to know more about macroeconomics, then you can read macroeconomics books that can be found at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

In Islam, every Muslim is obliged to pray five times a day, one of the five obligatory prayers is the evening prayer. On this occasion, we will discuss more deeply about the evening prayer, starting from the intention of the evening prayer to its virtues. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Meaning of Isha Prayer

Islam is the religion of rahmatan lil alamin. The meaning of ” Islam Rahmatan lil ‘Alamin ” is Islam whose presence in the midst of people’s lives is able to create peace and compassion for humans and the universe.

Islam has a sharia foundation that must be followed by every member of the community. One of the foundations is prayer. Therefore, prayer is often referred to as a pillar of the Islamic religion that Muslims cannot leave behind, especially fardhu prayer. Prayer is our obligation as a good Muslim. There are two types of prayer based on the law, namely obligatory prayer and sunnah prayer.

There are two types of prayer based on how to pray, namely prayer alone and prayer in congregation. For anyone who prays in congregation, it will get extraordinary advantages compared to praying alone. In addition, if we pray in congregation, then we will be much more solemn than praying alone.

Therefore, for those of you who are used to praying alone at home, there is nothing wrong with occasionally praying in congregation with other family members or coming to the mosque or prayer room.

There are five obligatory prayers, namely dawn, midday, asr, maghrib and evening prayers. The Isya prayer is the last prayer in a day because it is at night and is usually done before someone goes to bed.

The Isha prayer is held from the time the sun disappears until the sun rises. The Isya prayer has many virtues especially when it is done in congregation. The Isya prayer consists of four cycles and one greeting.

The Most Important Time to Establish Isha Prayer

The scholars agree that the main time for carrying out the procedure for the Isha prayer is when it enters the third of the night. This is based on the following hadith:

“From Abu Hurairah RA that Rasulullah SAW said, ‘If I don’t burden my people, I order them to end/postpone the Isha prayer until 1/3 of the night or half of it .” (Narrated by Ahmad, Ibn Majah, and Tirmidhi)

Apart from that, there are also hadiths from other narrations which explain the most important time to establish the Isha prayer.

From AIsyah RA, “Rasulullah SAW ended the Isya prayer one night until it was late and the people of Medina fell asleep. Then he came out and he said, ‘This is the time (Isha), if it does not burden my people.” (Narrated by Muslim and Nasai)

The scholars then concluded that indeed the Isha prayer does not have to be done at the beginning of time. However, this prayer must still be held at the mosque in congregation, not praying individually at home.

The Virtue of the Isha Prayer

Among the virtues of the Isha prayer in congregation, besides getting the priority and reward of twenty-seven degrees, it will also distinguish whether a person is a hypocrite or not.

From Abu Hurairah, he said that Rasulullah SAW said:

إِنَّ أَثْقَلَ صَلَاةٍ عَلَى الْمُنَافِ Wh there is

Meaning: “Indeed, the most difficult prayers carried out by hypocrites are the Isya prayer and the Fajr prayer. If they knew the virtues of both of them, they would come to him even if they had to crawl.” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

Every time you perform a prayer, including the Isya prayer, make sure that during prayer your eyes look at the place of prostration, and pray in an orderly manner according to the teachings of the Prophet Muhammad.

According to the jumhur scholars of Imam Ahmad, Imam Malik, and Imam Abu Hanifah, there is no specific word for the intention of praying. In addition, there is no hadith saying that if you are going to pray, you must read the intention.

This obligatory worship also has a number of virtues that are important for Muslims to know. The virtues of the evening prayer are as follows:

1. Getting Good News

Every Muslim who performs the evening prayer will get good news from Allah SWT. In addition, that person will also be surrounded by light within himself, both in this world and in the hereafter. Of course, this priority can be obtained for those who are solemn and persistent in performing the obligatory worship.

This is as stated in one hadith:

Meaning: “Give good news to those who walk to pray in the dark of the night, that he will be given perfect light in this world and in the hereafter.” (Hadith History of Abu Daud No. 561 and Tirmidhi No. 223).

2. Removing Sin

The virtue of the next Isha prayer is that it can erase sins. Every Muslim who performs this worship, his sins will be forgiven and erased by Allah SWT.

This is as stated in one hadith:

Meaning: “Not a Muslim when it is time for the obligatory prayers, he makes his ablution better, then is humble in his prayer, and perfects his bowing. Rather, it will erase all his sins, as long as he does not commit major sins.” (HR. Muslim no. 228).

 

 

The intention of the Isya prayer

Among followers of the Shafi’i school of thought, reciting the intention to pray is sunnah. Because it is very helpful for someone’s solemnity in prayer. The intention at each obligatory prayer time is different.

One of them, the reading of the intention of the Isha prayer for the priest and the congregation as compiled by Muhammad Masrur in the book Understanding the Meaning of Prayer Readings , is quoted as follows:

The intention read by the Imam

أُصَلِّي فَرْضَ الْعِشَاءِ رَكْعَتَيْنِ مُسْتَقْبِلَ الْقِبْلَةِ أَدَاءً إِمَامًا لِلهِ تَعَالَى

Ushalli fardhal-isya’I arba’a raka’atin mustaqbilal-qiblati adaa’an priesthood lillahi ta’ala

Meaning: “I intend to pray fardhu Isya four rak’ahs facing the Qiblah because of Allah Ta’ala.”

Makmum’s intention to read

أُصَلِّي فَرْضَ الْعِشَاءِ رَكْعَتَيْنِ مُسْتَقْبِلَ الْقِبْلَةِ أَدَاءً مَأْمُوْمًا لِلهِ تَعَالَِ

Ushalli fardhal-isya’I arba’a raka’atin mustaqbilal-qiblati adaa-an makmuman lillahi ta’ala

Meaning: “I intend to pray fardhu Isha four cycles facing the Qibla as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.”

The intention to read when praying alone

أُصَلِّى فَرْضَ العِشَاء ِأَرْبَعَ رَكَعاَتٍ مُسْتَقْبِلَ الْقِبْلَةِ أَدَاءً لله تَعَالَى

Ushalli fardhal Isha’i arba’a raka’aatin mustaqbilal qiblati adaa’an lilaahi ta’aalaa

Meaning: “I (intend) to perform the obligatory Isya’ prayer of four cycles facing the Qiblah, because of Allah Ta’ala.”

Procedure for the Isya Prayer

1. Takbiratul Ihram

When doing this, all the fingers are brought together facing forward and raising both hands, the tips of the fingers are parallel to the shoulders or ears but not too close while saying ‘Allahu Akbar’.

In addition, the eyes look at the place of prostration. Then, bring both hands together with the position of the right hand over the left hand and hold the left wrist bone with the right hand.

2. Read the Iftitah Prayer

After takbiratul ihram, the procedure for the next Isya prayer is to recite the iftitah prayer. Reading this prayer is actually a sunnah law, so if you don’t read it doesn’t matter either.

Reading the iftitah prayer is done after takbiratul ihram. Then the hands are clasped in front of the chest and then recite the iftitah prayer. Many hadiths regarding Iftitah prayer. Iftitah prayer readings that are often used by Indonesian people are:

Allaahu Akbaru kabiiraw-walhamdu lillaahi katsiiran, wa subhaanallaahi bukratan-wa ashiilaa. wajjahtu wajhiya lilladzii fatharas-samaawaati wal ardha hanifam-muslimaw-wama ana minal musyrikiina. Inna shalaatii wa nusukii wa mahyaaya wa mamaatii lillaahi Rabbil ‘aalamiina. Laa syariikalahu wa bidzaalika umirtu wa anaa minal muslimiin.

Meaning: “Allah is the Greatest with the greatest. All praise is due to Allah. Glory be to Allah in the morning and evening. I turn my face to God who has created the heavens and the earth with all obedience and submission and I am not one of those who associate partners with Him. Verily, my prayer, my worship, my life and my death belong only to Allah, Lord of the Worlds, with whom He has no partner. With all that I was ordered and I am among those who surrender (Muslims).”

3. Read Surah Al Fatihah

Without reading Al-Fatihah, prayer is invalid. Surah Al-Fatihah is one of the pillars of prayer which if it is not read then the prayer is invalid because it leaves the pillars of prayer.

4. Reading Surahs or Verses from the Al-Quran

People who pray can read a whole letter or a fragment of a verse from the Koran after reading the letter of Al Fatihah.

5. Ruku

The way to do bowing is to raise your hands to ear level and recite ‘Allahu Akbar’, then bend your body, both hands clasping your knees, eyes looking at the place of prostration, back and head flat. After that read the prayer ‘Subhaana rabbiyal azhiimi wa bi hamdih’ ( Glory be to my Lord, the Most High and with all praise be to Him) three times) .

6. I’tidal

This is the standing position from bowing to standing straight, by raising both hands to the level of the ears and saying: ‘Sami’allahu liman hamidah’ ( Allah hears those who praise Him ).

During i’tidal, the eyes look at the place of prostration and recite the i’tidal prayer: ‘Rabbana lakal hamdu’ ( O Allah, our Lord, to You be all praise ).

7. Bow down

Then proceed with making prostrations and reading ‘Allahu Akbar’ with both knees first, then the forehead and nose, palms, knees and feet against the floor and read:

Subhaana rabbiyal a’la wabihamdihi

Meaning: “Glory be to my Lord, the Most High, and with all praise be to Him three times.”

8. Iftirasy (Sitting Between Two Prostrations)

After prostration, it is followed by getting up while saying ‘Allahu Akbar’ (God is Greatest). Then sit between two prostrations or sit iftirasy. The sitting position is by sitting on the left foot, with the sole of the right foot standing and the finger on the base while facing the Qiblah, then recite:

Rabbighfirlii warhamnii wajburnii warfa’nii warzuqnii wahdinii wa ‘aafinii wa’fu ‘annii

Meaning: “O Allah, forgive me, have mercy on me, suffice me, raise my rank, give me sustenance, guide me, give me health and forgive me”.

9. Bow down

From a sitting position, then return to do the second prostration and say ‘Allahu Akbar’ , and read ‘Rabbiyal a’la wabihamdihi’ ( Glory be to my Lord, Most High, and with all praise be to Him ) three times. For the 2nd cycle, do it like the movements and readings in the first cycle, but do it without the Iftitah prayer.

10. Early Tahiyat

After the second prostration, then do the initial tahiyat prayer by sitting in the Iftirasy position. You do this with the left hand placed on the left thigh with the position of the fingers extended.

Many Muslims in Indonesia straighten their index finger when they start reading the sentence asyhadu an laa ilaaha illallah. There is also another opinion that moves the index finger starting from the beginning of tasyahud (Tahiyat), by reading:

At-tahiyaatul mubarak atush-shalawaatu wath-thayyibaatu lillaah i. Assalaamu ‘alaika ayyuhan-nabiyyu wa Rahmatullaahi wa barakaatuhu. Assalaamu ‘alainaa wa ‘alaa ‘ibaadillaahish-shaalihiina. Asyhadu an laa ilaaha illallaahu wa asyhadu anna Muhammadar Rasuulullaahi. Allaahumma salli ‘alaa Muhammadin.

Meaning: ” All honor, blessings, mercy and safety (shalawat), as well as goodness belongs only to Allah. Salvation, mercy and blessings from Allah may continue to be upon you, O Prophet (Muhammad). Safety, mercy, and blessings from Allah may also be poured out on us, and also on all the pious servants of Allah. I testify that there is no god but Allah and that Muhammad is the messenger of Allah. O Allah, bestow mercy and safety (Shalawat) on the Prophet Muhammad.”

Then stand up straight and read ‘Allahu Akbar’ , followed by crossing your arms.

For the third rak’ah, do the movement and reading in the first cycle, but without the Iftitah prayer and go straight to the bowing movement after reading Al Fatihah.

For the fourth cycle, it is carried out like the movement and reading in the first cycle but without the Iftitah prayer and goes straight to the bowing movement after reading Al Fatihah.

11. Final Tasyahud

After the last or second prostration position, then recite the final tahiyat prayer by sitting in the final tasyahhud (tahiyat). How to sit on the left groin with the position of the left foot coming out from the bottom, while the sole of the right foot is in an upright position.

Then, the left hand is placed on the left thigh with the fingers spread out, and many Muslims in Indonesia straighten their index finger when they start reading the sentence asyhadu an laa ilaaha illallah, there is another opinion that explains moving the index finger starting from the beginning of tasyahud (Tahiyat). Then read:

Attahiyyaatul mubaarakaatush shalawatuth thayyibaatu lillaah. Assalaamu ‘alaika ayyuhan-nabiyyu wa Rahmatullaahi wa barakaatuhu. Assalaamu ‘alainaa wa ‘alaa ‘ibaadillaahish-shaalihiina. Asyhadu an laa ilaaha illallaahu wa asyhadu anna Muhammadar Rasuulullaahi. Allaahumma salli ‘alaa Muhammadin. Wa ‘alaa aali Muhammadin kamaa shallaita ‘alaa Ibraahiim, wa ‘alaa aali Ibraahiim, wa barik ‘ala Muhammadin wa ‘alaa aali Muhammadin, kamaa baarakta ‘alaa Ibraahiim wa ‘alaa aali Ibraahiim, fil ‘aalamiina innaka hamiidun majiidun.

Meaning: “All honor, blessings, mercy and safety (shalawat), as well as goodness belongs only to Allah. Salvation, mercy and blessings from Allah may continue to be upon you, O Prophet (Muhammad). Safety, mercy and blessings from Allah may also be showered on us, and also on all the pious servants of Allah. I testify that there is no god but Allah and that Muhammad is the messenger of Allah. O Allah, bestow mercy and safety (Shalawat) on the Prophet Muhammad.

And also bestow mercy and safety (shalawat) on the family of Muhammad, as You have bestowed mercy and safety (shalawat) on Abraham and on the family of Abraham. Bestow blessings on Muhammad and the family of Muhammad, as You have bestowed blessings on Abraham and on the family of Abraham. In the entire universe, You are indeed the Most Praised, the Most Great (Glorious).”

12. Greetings

After reading the tahiyat, proceed with saying the greeting (assalamu alaikum wa Rahmatullaah), followed by turning your face to the right when saying the first greeting and looking to the left when saying the second greeting.

Thus the discussion about the intention of the evening prayer to the procedure. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for Sinaumed’s. If you want to get more knowledge about prayer by reading books available at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Various Kinds of Insurance – Sinaumed’s has certainly heard the term insurance which is said to protect your property. But what exactly is insurance? And what kinds of insurance? However, before discussing the various types of insurance, it is better if we discuss the meaning of insurance first.

Definition of Insurance

According to Wikipedia, insurance is coverage or an agreement between two parties, in which one party is obliged to pay dues/contributions/premiums. Meanwhile, the other party has the obligation to provide full guarantees to the contribution/premium payer if something happens to the first party or his property in accordance with the agreement that has been made.

The term insured usually refers to anything that is protected. Meanwhile, referring to the OJK website, insurance is an agreement between insurance service providers (as insurers) and the public (as policyholders).

Rights and obligations between insurance services and policyholders have been regulated. The policyholder has the right to receive protection for compensation for loss, damage and death from insurance service providers. However, all rights will be obtained when the policyholder performs the premium payment obligation to the insurance company.

Insurance companies also benefit from investment. This advantage is obtained from investment premiums received until they have to pay claims. This money is called a “float”. The insurer can gain or lose from the changing price of the float as well as interest rates or dividends on the float .

In the United States, property losses and deaths recorded by insurance companies amounted to US$142.3 billion in the five years ended 2003. However, the total gain in the same period was US$68.4 billion, as a result of floats.

Insurance Benefits

Insurance itself turns out to have a lot of benefits. Therefore, not a few people who want to make insurance. Here are some of the benefits of insurance.

1. Protect income from sudden risks.
2. Protects money saved to realize future plans.
3. Protecting the future of the family when death comes.
4. Protecting physical and mental health when there is a risk of an accident.
5. Provides future protection of investment.

Insurance Principles

In the world of insurance there are 6 principles that must be met. Here is the full explanation.

1. Insurable interest

Insurable interest is the right to insure, arising from a financial relationship, between the insured and the insured and legally recognized.

2. Utmost good faith

Utmost good faith is the act of disclosing accurately and completely, all material facts regarding something to be insured, whether requested or not. The meaning is: the insurer must honestly explain everything clearly about the extent of the terms/conditions of the insurance and the insured must also provide a clear and correct description of the insured object or interest.

3. Proximate cause

Proximate cause is an active, efficient cause that creates a chain of events that gives rise to an effect without the intervention of something that starts and is active from a new and independent source.

4. Indemnity

Indemnity is a mechanism in which the insurer provides financial compensation in an effort to place the insured in the financial position he had just before the loss occurred (Commercial Code articles 252, 253 and emphasized in article 278).

5. Subrogation

Subrogation is the transfer of claim rights from the insured to the insurer after the claim has been paid. Contribution The right of the insurer to invite other insurers who are equally responsible, but does not have to have the same obligations towards the insured to participate in providing indemnity.

Various Kinds of Insurance

After discussing the meaning to the principles of insurance, the next discussion is the various types of insurance.

1. Life Insurance

Some people think that this type of life insurance is the same as health insurance. Life insurance is a type of insurance that provides guarantees for the death of an insured person by providing financial benefits.

There are several insurance companies that provide payments only after someone dies and there are also companies that provide payments before someone dies.

This type of insurance can be said to be insurance that can provide financial benefits in the event of death, sudden illness, or suffering from total or partial permanent disability due to an accident or illness. There are insurance provider services that apply a payment system after death. However, there are also those who allow Policyholders to claim funds before their death.

The following types of life insurance, namely:

a. Unit Link Life Insurance

Unit linked insurance combines investment with life insurance and health insurance. You just simply sit pretty and read the report every month about the value of the investment. Investment value will be managed by unit link.

However, the profit or loss of the investment is still borne by yourself. However, you also have to be patient if you want to enjoy the return on your investment, because it can only be enjoyed in the fifth year when there are no more premiums to pay.

b. Term Life Insurance

The most important thing you should know about term life insurance is a coverage system that has an expiration date. The length of time specified starts from 5 years, 10 years or 20 years, according to the offer given by the insurance company.

c. Lifetime Life Insurance

Whole life insurance provides protection to policyholders for life. The lifetime in question is 99 years or 100 years.

The advantage of this life insurance is in the insurance premium which will not be forfeited when there are no claims, so that it can be taken in its entirety when the contract period ends. However, to get all these advantages, the price to be paid is of course more. In other words, the premium money is much higher than term life insurance.

d. Dual Purpose Life Insurance

This life insurance offers two advantages. This is because there is a collaboration of benefits between term insurance and savings for children’s education and pension funds. What is profitable and different from term life insurance is the life benefit that the policyholder gets.

If the insured is still alive when the policy expires, then the sum insured will be given by the insurance company. The validity period for endowment life insurance varies widely, ranging from 10 years to a certain age, for example 60 years.

2. Loss Insurance ( General insurance)

General insurance is a type of insurance that will provide services to cover a risk of loss, loss of benefits, and legal liability to third parties from an uncertain event. This type of insurance is not permitted to do business outside of general insurance and reinsurance.

However, the thing that needs to be considered from this type of insurance is the compensation for this protection. The customer is required to pay the premium to the insurer based on the agreement in the policy. As for what is included in loss insurance, among others:

a. Fire insurance

Fire insurance covers fire, explosion, lightning, airplane crash, and others.

b. Freight Insurance

Insurance covers  marine hull and marine cargo . Marine hull is insurance that provides protection against loss or damage or loss of the hull and its machinery and equipment. Meanwhile, marine cargo is insurance for cargo transportation at sea.

c. Miscellaneous Insurance

Insurance that is not included in fire and transportation insurance, such as motor vehicle insurance, theft, and so on. Some of these various insurance products include:

• Theft insurance that will cover compensation for assets registered in the policy when theft occurs.
• Accident insurance.
• Travel insurance.
• Property insurance.
• Earthquake insurance.
• Liability insurance.
• Construction insurance.
• Machinery and equipment insurance which is usually used for large-scale projects, construction and production plants.

In addition, the benefits of loss insurance are as follows:

• Can provide a sense of security
• Help complete credit requirements
• Reducing capital costs
• Helps business stability

Help determine the cost of business risks

3. Education Insurance

Education insurance is insurance whose existence is considered very important at this time. This is because people think that education insurance is smart insurance that can guarantee better education.

There are two types of education insurance offered, namely endowment insurance and unit linked insurance. Endowment insurance, is a product of a combination of life protection combined with market instruments such as deposits.

This type of insurance will protect children’s education costs if a parent suddenly dies or becomes totally disabled so that they are no longer able to make a living. In addition, the endowment insurance product does not apply an investment system, so the profit for education funds obtained is clear.

Unit linked education insurance is a combination of life insurance and investment. Profits from the investment component are divided according to the child’s education level. The difference with unit linked insurance lies in the profit process. If you buy a unit link, usually the investment profit will be taken together with the disbursement of the sum insured. However, in unit linked education insurance, investment profits are taken according to the time to pay for education costs.

4. Health Insurance

This type of insurance is quite popular among the public. This is because health insurance is insurance that provides coverage for health problems caused by illness.

This health insurance company will provide care services to its insurance members which include: protecting and covering members who are sick, disabled, injured, and other things caused by illness or accidents.

To choose the type of policy to take, you should adjust your financial capabilities. For example, if you want to buy a health insurance product, you may choose a health insurance product that covers only inpatient care or only outpatient care.

Types of health insurance, namely:

• Term insurance
• Savings insurance
• Lifetime insurance
• Annuity contract insurance

5. Vehicle Insurance

Many people who have luxury vehicles or cars include their personal vehicles with vehicle insurance. Vehicle insurance is a type of insurance that provides insurance services for vehicles that experience damage, loss, and so on.

The benefit of buying a vehicle insurance premium is that it provides protection and a sense of financial peace if we are faced with the risk of vehicle damage. In addition, having vehicle insurance also makes the selling price of your car more competitive.

There are basic coverage conditions that can be guaranteed by insurance, including:

• Vehicle damage
• Liability, which consists of third party legal liability and passenger legal liability

The amount of the car insurance premium calculation is determined by the insurance company by taking into account the condition of your vehicle, including:

• Vehicle physical condition
• Vehicle type Vehicle age
• Location of use
• Functions and uses
• Experience of loss events that have been experienced
• Type of coverage

Apart from guaranteeing the main risks, motor vehicle insurance can also be expanded with additional guarantees, namely:

• Losses due to riots and riots
• Terrorist activities, and floods
• Personal accident of driver and passenger
• Legal responsibility (TJH) for third party losses

There are several risks that cannot be covered by vehicle insurance, including:

• Intentional act of the insured
• Violating traffic signs
• Conduct races, carnivals, campaigns and acts of crime
• Driven by someone who does not have a driver’s license (SIM) towing another vehicle
• Driven by someone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs
• Driven by force even if the vehicle is damaged or not roadworthy
• This insurance also does not cover loss and damage to additional equipment that is not stated in the policy such as keys, vehicle registration certificate (STNK), and motorized vehicle owner’s book (BPKB).
• Theft of non-standard equipment
• Damage or loss due to embezzlement
• Overload
• Entering or passing through closed or forbidden roads
• Nuclear radiation, radioactive contamination, nuclear reactions
• Riot strikes or disturbance of public order
• Property loaded or unloaded

6. Business Insurance

Business insurance is an insurance service that guarantees the insured party with business activities. This type of service includes damage, loss and loss in a large enough amount, but according to the insurance company policy that has been agreed upon.

Business insurance is generally owned by companies such as manufacturing, service, trade, and so on, which carry risks in their business activities. Business insurance provides protection in the form of protection for life, health, accidents, and critical illness.

7. Old Age Insurance

Someone will usually prepare for their old age with insurance. Old age insurance is an insurance product that offers protection and guarantees to policyholders when they reach retirement age. In this case, retirement age is when you are no longer productive and can no longer make money.

By buying an old age insurance policy early on, it will help you prepare a retirement fund for old age. This insurance is very useful for those of you who do not get a pension from work. Old age insurance provides more benefits than regular savings. You can plan for retirement with old age insurance. For the amount of premium, you can also choose according to your financial capabilities.

8. Property Insurance

This type of insurance generally provides a service to protect homeowners from risks such as personal property, damage to the residence such as fire, and damage to personal belongings.

In addition, this insurance service includes protecting and providing relief if one day an accident occurs at the insured house or item such as a fire and so on.

The benefits of having property insurance are:

• Compensation for damages
• Compensation for loss
• Expansion benefits

Thus the discussion about the meaning of insurance to various types of insurance. So, has Sinaumed’s decided what type of insurance it will be?

To get more information about insurance, Sinaumed’s can read books available at sinaumedia.com .

In reading the Al-Quran, it is required to comply with the tajwid. Within the tajwid itself there is a qalqalah. Then, what exactly is meant by qalqalah? And what are the examples of qalqalah? Well, on this occasion, we will discuss more about qalqalah. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Qalqalah

Studying and practicing the tajwid law in the Qur’an is something that is important for Muslims. There are at least 15 tajwid laws that every Muslim must learn.

As the word of Allah SWT in the letter Al Baqarah verse 121:

اَلَّذِيْنَ اٰتَيْنٰهُمُ الْكِتٰبَ يَتْلُوْنَهٗ حَقَّ تِلَاوَتِهٖۗ اُولٰۤىِٕكَ يُؤْمِنُوْنَ بِهٖ ۗ وَمَنْ يَّكْفُرْ بِهٖ فَاُولٰۤىِٕكَ هُمُ الْخٰسِرُوْنَ

Meaning: “Those to whom We have given the Book, they read it as it should be, they are the ones who believe in it. Whoever disbelieves in it, it is they who are the losers.”

While the meaning of tajwid itself is tahsin, which means to beautify. Meanwhile, according to the terms, tajwid is sounding each letter from its makhraj by giving each letter, its right and mustahak.

Knowing or studying the science of recitation is fardhu kifayah, but practicing reading the Koran is fardhu ‘ain, which means that all reciters or people who read the Koran are required to apply tajwid readings when reading verses from the Koran.

In the science of tajwid, it is known the properties of letters when they are sounded in their makhraj. Qalqalah is one of the characteristics of letters that do not have opposite words and qalqalah is a law of reading that is part of the science of tajwid.

While the meaning in general, qalqalah can be understood as a vibration or reflection. Meanwhile, the meaning of qalqalah in the science of tajwid means reflecting sound vibrations when reading the pronunciation contained in the qalqalah letters which have the vowel breadfruit or waqaf.

Qalqalah is the reflection of certain letter sounds for breadfruit with original death, for waqaf by turning it off, and tasydid/syiddah for waqaf.

Qalqalah is a law of reading that is part of the science of recitation. This qalqalah can be interpreted as an additional sound or a strong and clear reflection on the breadfruit letters. Interpreting this one tajwid law can be done in two ways, namely sugra and kubra.

It is very important to study the law of reciting qalqalah because it relates to breadfruit, endowments, and tasydid so that recitation of the Al-Quran avoids misunderstandings. There are five qalqalah letters that can be used as signs, namely ba, jim, dal, ta, and qaf.

Types of Qalqalah

Qalqalah is divided into two types, namely qalqalah sugra and qalqalah kubra. Here’s an explanation:

1. Qalqalah Sugra

Qalqalah sugra literally means small. This type is if there is a qalqalah letter in the middle of the pronunciation with the vowel breadfruit. The way to read qalqalah sugra is to reflect it not too strong.

This type of qalqalah occurs when the letter qalqalah is turned off in the middle of a sentence (breadfruit). That is why some qiraat scholars call this qalqalah wustha (middle) qalqalah.

2. Qalqalah Kubra

Meanwhile, qalqalah kubra is interpreted linguistically as big. The definition of qalqalah kubra is if there is a qalqalah letter which is located at the end of the pronunciation, both in the vowel breadfruit, fathah, kasrah, dhammah, and tanwin, it is still read as waqaf. How to read it better reflected quite strongly. This type of qalqalah occurs when the letter qalqalah is turned off at the end of a sentence (waqaf).

Qalqalah Sugra and Kubra letters

As with other types of tajwid law, qalqalah sugra and kubra have certain letters, there are five qalqalah letters, namely ba (ب), jim (ج), dal (د), tha (ط), and qaf (ق). To make the memorization process easier, the five letters above can be abbreviated as qatbujadin or BA-JU-DI-THO-QO.

Qalqalah Sugra and Kubra Recitation Laws

Al-Qur’an can not be read arbitrarily. There are special rules and rules that need to be understood through the science of recitation. This is as stated by Allah SWT in surah al-Baqarah verse 121:

اَلَّذِيۡنَ اٰتَيۡنٰهُمُ الۡكِتٰبَ يَتۡلُوۡنَهٗ حَقَّ تِلَاوَتِهٖؕ اُولٰٓٮ يُؤۡمِنَ بِهٖ‌

Meaning: “Those to whom We have given the Book, they read it with the true reading, they are the ones who believe in it. And whoever disbelieves in it, it is they who are the losers.”

Studying and practicing the tajwid law in the Qur’an is something that is important for Muslims. There are at least 15 tajwid laws that every Muslim must learn, one of which is the qalqalah law. Qalqalah is divided into two types, namely qalqalah sugra and qalqalah kubra.

As a life guide that must be read, studied, and practiced at the same time, the Qur’an cannot be read haphazardly. There are special rules and rules that need to be understood through the science of recitation.

Based on the verse above, practicing the knowledge of recitation that has been learned is an obligation that must be carried out by every Muslim. Likewise with practicing the law of reciting qalqalah sugra and kubra.

As previously mentioned, the law of reading qalqalah sugra occurs when the qalqalah letter is in the middle of the pronunciation with the vowel of breadfruit. How to read the reflection is not too strong or the reflection is read thinly.

Meanwhile, the law of reading qalqalah kubra occurs if one of the qalqalah letters at the end of the pronunciation has the vowel breadfruit, fathah, kasrah, dhammah, and tanwin, still read waqaf. How to read qalqalah kubra reflected strongly and boldly.

Examples of Qalqalah Sugra and Kubra

In order for the understanding of the sugra and kubra qalqalah reading to be more afdal, every Muslim needs to know examples of each of these reading laws.

Qalqalah Sugra

Examples of verses that contain reading qalqalah sugra include:

 

• Al-Kautsar verse 3

إِنَّ شَانِئَكَ هُوَ الْأَبْتَرُ

The letter ba ( ب ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is read bouncing with a slight pressure.

 

• Quraysh verse 4 

Allah

The letter tha ( ط ) breadfruit is pronounced bouncing but thin.

 

• Al Qari’ah verse 3

وَمَا أَدْرَاكَ مَا الْقَارِعَةُ

The letter dal ( د ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is read bouncing with a light pressure.

 

• Al-Qari’ah verse 10

وَمَا أَدْرَاكَ مَا هِيَهْ

The letter dal (د) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is still read bouncing, but with a light emphasis.

 

• Al Fiil Verse 2

أَلَمْ يَجْعَلْ كَيْدَهُمْ فِي تَضْلِيلٍ

The letter jim ( ج ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is also read as bouncing with a light pressure.

 

• Al-Humazah verse 5

وَمَا أَدْرَاكَ مَا الْحُطَمَةُ

The letter dal ( د ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is still read bounce, but with a light emphasis.

 

• Al-‘Adiyat verse 5

فَوَسَطْنَ بِهِ جَمْعًا

The letter tha ( ط ) breadfruit is pronounced bouncing but thin.

 

 

• Ad-Dhuha verse 6

أَلَمْ يَجِدْكَ يَتِيمًا فَآوَىٰ

The letter dal ( د ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is still read bounce, but with a light pressure.

 

• Al-Lail verse 20

إِلَّا ابْتِغَاءَ وَجْهِ رَبِّهِ الْأَعْلَىٰ

The letter ba ( ب ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is read bouncing with a slight pressure.

 

• Al-Balad verse 1

لَا أُقْسِمُ بِهَٰذَا الْبَلَدِ

The qaf ( ق ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is still read bounce, but with a light pressure.

 

• Al-Fajr verse 8

الَّتِي لَمْ يُخْلَقْ مِثْلُهَا فِي الْبِلَادِ

As with the previous reading, the letter qaf ( ق ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation is read bouncing with a light pressure.

 

• Al-Fajr verse 29

فَادْخُلِي فِي عِبَادِي

The letter dal ( د ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation, still reads bouncing with a light pressure.

 

• At-Tin verse 5

ثُمَّ رَدَدْنَاهُ أَسْفَلَ سَافِلِينَ

The reading above also consists of the letter dal ( د ) breadfruit in the middle of the pronunciation. That way the way to read it is bouncing with a light pressure.

Qalqalah Kubra

 

• Al-Falaq verse 1

قُلْ اَعُوْذُ بِرَبِّ الْفَلَقِۙ

The letter qaf ( ق ) in the last pronunciation, even though it has the vowel kasrah, how to read it, is still recited and read bouncing

 

• Al Buruj verse 20

وَّلّٰهُ مِنْ وَّرَاۤىِٕهِمْ مُّحِيْطٌۚ

The letter tha ( ط ) in the last pronunciation even though it has the vowel dhammah, how to read it is still fixed and read bounces.

 

• Al Falaq verse 3

وَمِنْ شَرِّ غَاسِقٍ اِذَا وَقَبَۙ

The letter ba ( ب ) in the last pronunciation, even though it is vowel fathah, how to read it is still recited and read bouncing loudly.

 

• Qaf verse 5

فِيْٓ اَمْرٍ مَّرِيْجٍ

The letter jim ( ج ) in the last pronunciation, even though it has the vowel tanwin kasrah, how to read it is still bouncing and read bouncingly.

 

• Al Ikhlas verse 1

قُلْ هُوَ اللّٰهُ اَحَدٌۚ

The letter dal ( د ) in the last pronunciation even though it has the vowel dhammah, the way to read it is still fixed and read bounces.

 

• Al Hajj verse 5

مِنْ كُلِّ زَوْجٍ بَهِيجٍ

The letter jim ( ج ) is located in the last pronunciation even though it has the vowel tanwin kasrah, how to read it is still bouncing and it is read bouncing with strong pressure.

• Al Buruj verse 2

وَالْيَوْمِ الْمَوْعُودِ

The letter dal ( د ) is located in the last pronunciation even though it has the vowel kasrah, the way to read it is still fixed and read bounces.

 

• Ali Imran verse 18

قَائِمًا بِالْقِسْطِ

The letter tha ( ط ) in the last pronunciation even though it has the vowel kasrah, the way to read it is still fixed and read bounces.

 

• Hud verse 70

إِلَى قَوْمِ لُوطٍ

The letter tha ( ط ) in the last pronunciation, even though it has the vowel kasrah tanwin, the way to read it is still fixed and read bounces.

 

• At Tariq verse 1

وَالسَّمَاءِ وَالطَّارِقِ

The letter qaf ( ق) in the last pronunciation even though it has the vowel kasrah, how to read it is still bouncing and read bouncingly.

The Virtue of Studying the Qur’an 

Al-Qur’an is the book of Islam as a way of life for Muslims. Studying the Qur’an for Muslims is certainly mandatory. The following are the virtues in learning the Al-Quran, namely:

1. Obtaining Merit and Kindness

For those who study and memorize the Qur’an, will get multiple rewards and goodness. The atmosphere in the surrounding environment is always peaceful, calm and full of blessings.

Rasulullah SAW said:

عَنْ عَائِشَةَ عَنْ النَّبِيِّ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ قَالَ مَثَلُ الَّذِي يَقْرَأُ الْقُرْآنَ وَهُوَ حَافِظٌ لَهُ مَعَ السَّفَرَةِ الْكِرَامِ الْبَرَرَةِ وَمَثَلُ الَّذِي يَقْرَأُ وَهُوَ يَتَعَاهَدُهُ وَهُوَ عَلَيْهِ شَدِيدٌ فَلَهُ أَجْرَانِ

Meaning: From Aisha from the Prophet sallallaahu alaihi wasallam, he said: “The parable of a person reading the Koran while he memorizes it, then he will be with the noble angels. Whereas the parable of a person who reads the Koran diligently, and he has difficulty over it, then he will get two rewards.” (HR Bukhari) [No. 4937 Fathul Bari] Sahih.

2. Learning the Koran is the best of people

عن عثمانَ بن عفانَ رضيَ اللَّه عنهُ قال: قالَ رسولُ اللَّهِ صَلّى اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وسَلَّم:

Meaning: From Usman bin Affan ra, Rasulullah saw. said, “The best of you are those who learn the Qur’an and teach it.” (Narrated by Bukhari).

3. Get intercession on the Day of Judgment

Allah will keep the bodies of those who memorize the Qur’an intact in their graves until the Day of Resurrection arrives. Reading the Qur’an can bring goodness and glory that humans have never imagined before, even on the Day of Resurrection with great glory.

Rasulullah SAW said:

عَنْ زَيْدٍ أَنَّهُ سَمِعَ أَبَا سَلَّامٍ يَقُولُ حَدَّثَنِي أَبُو أُمَامَةَ الْبَاهِلِيُّ قَالَ سَمِعْتُ رَسُولَ اللَّهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ يَقُولُ اقْرَءُوا الْقُرْآنَ فَإِنَّهُ يَأْتِي يَوْمَ الْقِيَامَةِ شَفِيعًا لِأَصْحَابِه

Meaning: From Zaid that he heard Abu Sallam say, had told me Abu Umamah Al Bahili he said; I heard the Prophet sallallaahu alaihi wasallam say: “Read the Quran, because it will come to intercede for its readers on the Day of Resurrection. (HR. Muslim) [No. 804 Syarh Sahih Muslim] Sahih.

4. Give Degree and Authority

Allah SWT will also raise the honor of the parents of their children who memorize the Qur’an. Those who memorize the Al-Quran will be given flexibility in all their affairs. This also makes the person look more authoritative and appreciated by many people.

عن عمرَ بن الخطابِ رضي اللَّه عنهُ أَنَّ النَّبِيَّ صَلّى اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وسَلَّم قال : « إِنَّ اللَّه يرفَعُ بِهذَا الكتاب أَقواماً ويضَعُ بِهِ آخَرين » رَوَاهُ مُسْلِمُ

Meaning: From Umar bin Khattab ra. Rasulullah saw. said, “Surely Allah SWT will raise the degree of a people with this book (Al-Qur’an), with it Allah will also humble other people.” (HR. Muslim).

5. People who read the Koran have a fragrant mouth

One of the hadith texts expressly compares people who read the Koran with those who do not read the Koran.

From Abu Musa Al-Asy’ari said, Rasulullah said:

“The parable of a believer who recites the Qur’an is like a lemon, which smells good and tastes delicious. And the parable of a believer who does not recite the Qur’an is like a date palm, it tastes delicious and has no smell. And the parable of the hypocrite who reads the Qur’an is like the fruit of the raihanah which smells good and tastes bitter, and the parable of the hypocrite who does not read the Qur’an is like the fruit of the hanzhalah which has no smell and tastes bitter.” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

6. With the Angels

People who read the Koran, that is promised Allah will be in a place together with the angels.

From `Aisyah Radhiyallahu `Anha said, the Messenger of Allah said, “A person who reads the Qur’an and he is proficient in reading it, he will be gathered with the angels who are noble and devoted. While the person who reads the Qur’an and he is still stuttering and feels heavy (not yet fluent) in reading it, then he will get two rewards.” (Narrated by Bukhari Muslim).

7. Receive God’s Grace

People who read the Koran will get peace, mercy and praise a people who recite the verses of the Koran, and angels will circle around them.

عَنْ أَبِي هُرَيْرَةَ رَضِيَ اللهُ عَنْهُ قَالَ: قَالَ رَسُوْلُ الله : « وَمَا اجْتَمَعَ قَوْمٌ فِي بَيْتٍ مِنْ بُيُوتِ اللهِ يَتْلُونَ كِتَابَ اللهِ، وَيَتَدَارَسُونَهُ بَيْنَهُمْ، إلاَّ نَزَلَتْ عَلَيْهِمُ السَّكِينَةُ وَغَشِيَتْهُمُ الرَّحْمَةُ، وَحَفَّتْهُمُ الْمَلاَئِكَةُ، وَذَكَرَهُمُ اللهُ فِيمَنْ عِنْدَهُ » رَوَاهُ مُسْلِمُ.

Meaning: From Abu Hurairah RA, he said: Rasulullah SAW. said, “There is not a people who gather in one of the houses of Allah’s houses (mosques), to read the Qur’an and study it, unless peace will be sent down to them, and they will be covered by Allah’s grace, the angels will surround them and Allah will protect them. will mention them in front of His creatures who are near Him (the angels).” (HR. Muslim).

8. Loved by Allah

By reading the Al-Quran makes a Person Behave Noble. Reading the Qur’an with a calm heart and a happy feeling can change someone who previously behaved badly for the better.

Thus the discussion about the meaning of qalqalah and also examples of qalqalah. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you. If you want to find a book about the law of reading the Koran, then you can get it at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Definition of Moral and Ethics – The terms moral and ethics are often considered the same, so that the use of the terms moral and ethics is often interchanged. However, these two terms have different meanings.

Moral and ethics are terms commonly used as guidelines that are adhered to by a person or group in living life, so that people can live well and in an orderly manner.

The connection between these two terms makes many people think that morals and ethics are the same terms and have the same meaning. However, morals and ethics have some fundamental differences. In order not to misuse the terms moral and ethics again, understand the following meanings of morals and ethics, complete with their differences.

Definition of Ethics

In language the word ethics comes from the Greek word ethos which means the appearance of a habit. In this case, the object perspective is attitudes, actions and human actions.

The definition of ethics in particular is the science of the attitude and decency of an individual in a social environment that is thick with rules and principles related to behavior that is considered right.

Meanwhile, ethics in general can be interpreted as norms, rules, rules or procedures that are usually used as a guide on the principle of an individual in carrying out actions or behavior.

The application of this norm is closely related to the good or bad nature of an individual in society. That way, ethics can be interpreted as a science that explains good and bad and obligations, responsibilities and rights both socially and morally for every individual in social life.

Ethics can also be defined as values ​​related to individual morals related to right and wrong. There are also many types of ethics that can be found in the surrounding environment. Examples include friendship ethics, work or professional ethics, household ethics and so on.

Of course everyone must have ethics, because ethics is needed to socialize which bridges conditions in social life. For example, the etiquette that is often found in everyday life and its surroundings is to say hello when visiting other people’s homes.

Another example is saying an apology when you make a mistake and saying thank you when someone is willing to help or help.

Definition of Ethics According to Experts

In order for Sinaumed’s to understand more about the meaning of ethics, consider the meaning of ethics according to the following experts:

1. Aristotle

According to Aristotle, ethics is a science that discusses the problems of human behavior and actions. While manner and cutom is the study of ethics that has to do with the procedures and customs that are inherent in each individual and their relation to good or bad behavior, actions or behavior of an individual.

2. WJS Poerwadar Minta

Ethics according to WJS Poerwadar Minta is knowledge related to human actions and behavior seen from the good and bad sides which are determined by humans as well.

3. Dr. R. Soegarda Poerbakawatja

Ethics is a science that provides references, directions and also becomes the basis for human behavior and actions.

4. Louis O. Kattsoff

Kattsoff argues that ethics is essentially more related to the principle of justification in behavioral relations between humans.

5. H. A Mustafa

According to Mustafa, ethics is a science that examines human behavior and actions in terms of good and bad by paying attention to human behavior as far as the human mind and mind know.

6. Sumaryono

Ethics according to Sumaryono is ethics as a study that discusses the truth of human actions and behavior on the nature and nature that is inherent in a human being.

Understanding of Morals

Moral is the result of human creation which is produced through elements of culture and religion. Moral is closely related to the values ​​taught by religion. Its relation to culture, in which each culture has different moral references based on the social value system that has been in force and been constructed for a long time.

Moral becomes a legal reference for behavior that is applied to each individual when socializing or interacting with other individuals, so that mutual respect and respect will be established between fellow human beings.

Fundamentally, morals originate from values ​​regarding goodness and are then manifested into the form of one’s actions. So, a moral can be attached tightly to the value of the behavior.

In life, no one’s behavior is separated from the role of values. The process of moral awareness in life goes on gradually, starting with social interaction in an environment that has orders, prohibitions, threats or even reproaches and causes and effects that arise as a result of one’s actions that may be fun or disappointing.

In their social reality, people realize that every action or action they take will certainly have an impact on life. In this case, it is important to be guided by morals and interact with the people around you.

Moral can be defined as a teaching about the good or bad of an action or behavior and is closely related to the morals of society.

In life, there are indications that a person is considered to be moral, if he has the awareness to accept and implement the applicable regulations, and then act or behave in accordance with the moral values ​​that are upheld in society.

Moral can also be interpreted as a guideline of behavior that is applied to each individual to be able to socialize with other individuals, so that there will be mutual respect and respect for fellow human beings.

Understanding Moral According to Experts

In order to better understand the notion of morals, here are the opinions of experts on the notion of morals.

1. Russell Swanburg

Russel Swanburg argues that morals have meaning as a statement of ideas, ideas or even thoughts related to encouragement and bubbling up in an individual at work and functions as an aspect that can evoke one’s behavior.

2. Elizabeth B. Hurlock

Moral according to Elizabeth B. Hurlock is an order of habits, culture and customs that apply from a rule that has an orientation to behavior that has become a habit for society in a cultural sense.

3. Maria J. Wantah

Maria J. Wantah expressed the opinion that the notion of morality is something that is closely related to the ability to determine the value of right or wrong and good or bad an individual behavior that is inherent in every individual who lives in society.

4. Priest Sukardi

According to Imam Sukardi, morality is a characteristic that is attached to something that contains good values ​​that are upheld in society based on a shared value system.

Ethical Characteristics

In order to better understand the notion of morals and ethics and the differences between the two, Sinaumed’s can listen to the following characteristics of morals and ethics. We will discuss the characteristics of ethics first.

1. Ethics is absolute or absolute

Ethics has an absolute nature, so it means that ethics applies anywhere, to anyone and anytime. Ethics as a principle that is non-negotiable and does not depend on a changing moral basis.

For example, killing or seizing other people’s property is an unethical act and action, whatever the reason.

2. Ethics still apply, even if not witnessed by other people

In general, ethics still apply even if no one is watching. This is because ethics has to do with conscience and the principles of good human life.

For example, if someone steals, even though the theft is not known by other people, the act of stealing still violates the ethics and norms that apply in society.

Therefore, how come the morale of someone who has stolen is bad, even though he is not charged by law enforcement or officials.

3. Ethics relates to the perspective of the human mind

Ethics is a way and perspective that has a good and bad relationship from an act committed by an individual or human being. In essence, every human being is certainly taught in various ways, so they know what is good and right.

So, gradually, people will soon know about these matters that will be formed and instilled in their hearts. This of course will bring up debate within a human being, so that an individual will have consideration before carrying out a certain action.

4. Ethics relates to the behavior, actions and behavior of a human being

Ethics has a close relationship with one’s actions, behavior and behavior. In general, ethics will be formed naturally because of the actions, behavior and behavior of an individual.

Bad behavior and actions will be considered as bad ethics as well. Meanwhile, good behavior and actions will also be considered as good ethics.

So in essence, however, this ethics is closely related to the behavior and actions carried out by the individual himself.

Moral Characteristics

Like ethics, morals have characteristics or characteristics, according to Bertens K the following are the characteristics of morals.

1. Relating to responsibility

Moral values ​​have to do with the person of a human being, but more specifically morals relate to the person of a human being who has responsibility. Moral values ​​will cause a person to feel guilty or not guilty, because he feels responsible.

2. Relating to conscience

The next characteristic of moral values ​​is moral values ​​that give rise to voices from within the conscience, both consciences that accuse people of belittling or opposing moral values ​​or praising someone who embodies his moral values.

3. Mandatory

Moral values ​​will oblige absolute and non-negotiable. For example, if there is someone who has aesthetic value, then he will appreciate a quality painting.

Vice versa, other people may not appreciate the painting. This absolute obligation is attached to moral values ​​because these moral values ​​apply to humans as humans.

4. Has a formal nature

According to Max Scheler, moral values ​​piggyback on other values. This means that in realizing moral values, someone will include other values ​​in a moral behavior again.

Purpose of Moral and Ethical Functions

Purpose and Function of Ethics

1. As a place to get critical views and perspectives that deal directly with confusing morals.
2. As a view or ethical orientation that requires taking a reasonable attitude in situations or conditions of a pluralistic society.
3. Can demonstrate skills in thinking clearly.
4. Serves as a differentiator which can be changed and which cannot be changed.
5. Serves to investigate a conflict or problem to its roots.
6. Serves to help a consistency.
7. Serves to be able to resolve a conflict. Whether it’s a morality conflict or other social conflict with a systematic and critical form of ideas.

Moral Purpose and Function

1. Guarantee the realization of one’s personal dignity and humanity.
2. Motivating people to always be kind and wise on the basis of self-awareness based on morality.
3. Maintain relationships so that they are always harmonious between people.
4. Provides a foundation of patience to endure every instinct, desire, lust that can threaten one’s dignity.
5. Giving insight into the future for humans, both social sanctions or consequences in living life, so that humans will be full of consideration before carrying out certain actions.
6. Making people healthy spiritually and physically because they carry out moral functions, so there is no feeling of disappointment, sin, regret or inner conflict.

Moral and Ethical Differences

With an explanation of morals and ethics, does Sinaumed’s know the difference between the two? Although etymologically the notions of morals and ethics have the same meaning, they have different practices in life. To be clear, here are some differences between morals and ethics:

1. Morals teach about what is right, while ethics do what is right.
2. Morals teach about how life should be, while ethics do or act according to what is taught in moral education.
3. Morals provide the rails in life, while ethics run the rails of life.
4. Morals function like signs of life, while ethics obeys signs of life.
5. Morals give the direction of life that must be taken, while ethics goes according to a predetermined direction.
6. Morals function like a compass in life, while ethics pays attention to and follows the direction of the compass to live life.
7. Moral is likened to a map of life, while ethics follows the map of life.
8. Morals are the guidelines of life, while ethics follow these guidelines.
9. Morals cannot be manipulated, while ethics can be manipulated.
10. Moral is a rule that must be obeyed by anyone, while ethics is often oriented to situations, conditions, motives, interests, goals and others.
11. The reference source of morals is norms and customs, while the source of ethics is human reason.
12. Moral looks at the behavior of a human being locally and specifically, while ethics looks at human behavior in general.

From the explanation of the differences in morals and ethics, it can be concluded that the benchmarks in morality are customs, habits and others. Meanwhile, ethics is based on human reason. Both have meanings that are not much different, but usage in everyday life is different.

That is an explanation of the notion of morals and ethics and their differences. If Sinaumed’s is interested in increasing knowledge about morals and ethics or other topics, then Sinaumed’s can read the books available at sinaumedia.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides various kinds of quality and informative books for Sinaumed’s. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Every Muslim is required to read the Al-Quran and in reading the Al-Quran must be in accordance with the law of tajwid. In the science of recitation, there are laws for reading mad lin or mad layyin. To find out more about mad lin, you can see this Sinaumed’s article.

Meaning of mad

Before we discuss mad lin, it’s a good idea to discuss the meaning of mad first. Mad literally means continuing or exaggerating, in term mad can be interpreted as a sign of a long sound in Arabic (a short sound becomes a long sound).

In terms of terms, tajwid scholars and reading experts say that mad means lengthening the sound with continuation according to the position of one of the mad letters. There are two parts of mad, namely mad genuine and mad far’i. There are three mad letters, namely alif, wau, and ya’ and these letters must line up dead or saktah. The length and short reading of mad is measured using the same vowel. Mad law on lafadz; faa, fii, fuu, faa.

In general mad is divided into 2, namely:

Mad Thabi’i

Mad Thabi’i is mad law that is original and still pure, where Mad means long and thabi’i means ordinary. As for how to read it, it must be two vowels long which is called one alif.

Mad thabi’i this happens if:

• Letters with the vowel fathah that meet the alif
• Letters with the vowel kasrah that meet ya breadfruit
• The letter with the vowel dhammah meets wawu breadfruit

Here’s an example:

سَمِيْعٌ

read: Samī’un

يَقُوْلُ

read: Yaqulu

كِتَابٌ

read: Kitabun

Mad Far’i

Mad Far’i in terms of language means branch. Meanwhile, from the term, mad far’i is the law of reading which is an addition to the original mad. The length of the reading itself is two and a half alif or equal to 2, 4 or 6 beats.

Mad Far’i is read at length because of the existence of hamza, breadfruit, tasydid, and endowments.

Mad Obligatory Muttasil

This mad happens when mad thabi’i meets hamzah in one sentence or verse. As for how to read it, it is usually extended for four to five vowels (two to two and a half alifs) if there is washal and waqaf, and it is read six vowels if it is at the end of a word and it is read waqaf.

Example:

جِيْٓءَ

جَآءَ

سَوَآءٌ

 

 

Mad Jaiz Munfasil

Mad Jaiz Munfashil occurs when a mad thabi’i meets a hamzah, but the hamzah is in a different sentence. Jaiz itself means allowed, while Munfashil has a separate meaning. How to read mad jaiz munfashil, extended from two to six vowels.

Example:

مَآ اُنْزِلَ

اِنَّآ اَوْحَيْنَآ اِلَيْكَ

يٰآ اَيُّهَا

قُوْآ اَنْفُسَكُمْ

Mad Lazim Mutsaqqal Kilmi

Mad Typical Mutsaqqal Kilmi occurs when the original mad meets tasydid in one sentence, then it is read in length in the form of 3 alif or 6 vowels and then it is read in weight.

Example:

وَلَا الضَّآلِّيْنَ

الْحَآقَّةُ

الطَّآمَّةُ

Mad Lazim Mukhaffaf Kilmi

This mad happens when the original mad meets a dead letter ( breadfruit ). As for how to read it is a long 3 alif or 6 vowels. This Madrasa requires that the reading be long, light, deep. Uniquely, this mad reading is only in Surah Yunus verses 51 and 91.

Example:

آلْاٰنَ

Mad Lazim Mutsaqqal Harfi

In terms of mad, this means the usual length of the letter and the weight. This Mad occurs if at the beginning of a surah of the Al-Quran there is one or more of the following letters:

ن ق ص ع س ل ك م

arranged in sentences:

نَقْصُ عَسَلِكُمْ

This mad must be read 6 vowels or 3 alif.

Example:

نٓ, صٓ, قٓ, كٓهٰيٰعٓصٓ, الٓمٓ

Mad Lazim Mukhaffaf Harfi

Mad in terms means the length of the light letters. That is, if at the beginning of a surah of the Koran there is one of the following letters:

ح ي ط ه ر

arranged in sentences:

حَيُّ طُهَرً

The way to read it is also the same length as mad thabi’i, namely 1 alif or 2 vowels.

Example:

حٰمٓ, يٰسٓ, الٓرٰ, طٰهٰ

Mad Layyin

Linguistically, it means long, soft or gentle. If there is a وْ or يْ because the waqaf (stop) falls after the vowel fathah, then the law for reading is 2 to 6 vowels (1 to 3 alif) with a soft and gentle tone.

Example:

 خَوْفٍ, قُرَيْشٍ الصَّيْفِ

The definition of Mad Lin

In reading the Al-Quran, one thing that is important to note is the law of reading. There are many reading laws in the Al-Quran that need to be memorized, understood, and then applied directly when reading the Al-Quran.

The law of reciting the Al-Quran is included in the science of tajwid which aims to prevent the reading of the Al-Quran from making mistakes and to maintain the oral language so that it is not wrong when reading it. That way, the activity of reading the Al-Quran can be carried out properly and correctly according to predetermined teachings.

One of the laws of reading that you need to know is mad layyin or also known as mad lin. Mad layyin is one of the 13 mad far’i laws. The law of this reading is actually almost the same as mad thobi’i. However, what distinguishes it is the vowel sign and the law from mad layyin which applies to the hijaiyah letters in the form of alif.

Mad lin or mad layyin is a type of mad in the science of recitation. How to read it must be pronounced with a length of 2, 4, or 6 vowels. Every qori or Al-Quran reader must understand mad discussion in the science of recitation. This is because mad readings will always be found in every surah of the Koran. Linguistically, mad means long, while lin means soft or flexible.

As a note, if the reader of the Koran has decided to read madlin in 2 vowels, the reading of the waqaf madlin must also be repeated in 2 vowels consistently. Likewise 4 vowels or 6 vowels

Mad Lin is a dead wawu or yes’ dead which is located after the letters in the fathah line. Mad layyin is useful when reading stops, waqaf is marked stopping or waqaf is at the end of the verse. Reporting from the book Nihayatul Qaul al-Mufid, the way to read mad layyin is to read the letters with the vowel fathah first. Then, it is connected with the letters yes or wau breadfruit by reading it long, then it is locked using hijaiyah letters afterwards.

The reading length of the mad layyin may be 2 vowels (1 alif), 4 vowels (2 alif), or 6 vowels (3 alif), depending on which one is chosen. This law still applies if the reading length is consistent (fixed, even, and regular). When mad lin is pronounced not in accordance with the tajwid, then the meaning and meaning of the verse will be distorted.

For this reason, the scholars stated that the law of studying recitation, including the discussion of mad lin, is fardu kifayah, as reported by NU Online.

Reading the Al-Quran properly and correctly is a command from Allah SWT, as illustrated in surah Al-Muzzammil verse 4

“… And read the Koran slowly,” (QS. Al-Muzzammil [73]: 4).

Among the various mad lins, there are mad lin which only occur when reading the Koran stops or waqaf on letters with the vowel fathah or dammah meet with the letters ya (ي) or waw (و) marked with breadfruit. Then, in front of the letters yes or waw, there is another letter that is turned off because it has to be waqaf.

In Arabic, mad (المد) means to lengthen. The term is to lengthen the sound when pronouncing the mad letters.

In other words, the reader of the Al-Quran lengthens the sound of letters or readings because in that verse there is one mad letter.

When reading the Al-Quran stops or endowments on letters with the vowel fathah or dammah meet the letters yes (ي) or waw (و) which are marked with breadfruit. Furthermore, in front of the letters yes or waw, there is another letter that is turned off because it has to be waqf, as Imam Zarkasyi wrote in Lessons of Tajwid (1987).

Examples of words that contain mad lin rules are: قُرَيْشٍ (read: Quraisy), ٱلصَّيْفِ (As-Shaiif), and خَوْفٍۭ (Khauuf).

How to Read Mad Layyin or Mad Lin

After knowing the meaning of mad layyin or mad lin, it feels incomplete if you don’t discuss how to read it.

The way to read mad layyin or mad lin laws is to read the letters with the fathah vowel first, then continue with the letters “waw” breadfruit or “yes” breadfruit which are read in length. Then after that it is locked using hijaiyah letters.

Meanwhile, for the reading length of mad layyin or mad lin, it may be two vowels (1 alif) or six vowels (3 alif). One of these is chosen and still applies to mad reading laws. Even so, the length of the vowel must also be consistent.

Examples of Mad Layyin or Mad Lin Reading Laws

Example of Mad Layyin Wau Sukun

For mad layyin reading laws that use waw breadfruit, an example is as follows:

مَوْتِ

The reading is read “death”. But because there is a waqf, it reads as “mauuuut”.

خَوْفٌ

The reading is read “khoufun”. But because there is a waqaf, it reads as “khouuuuuuf”.

Example of Mad Layyin Ya Sukun

For mad layyin reading laws that use ya breadfruit, an example is as follows:

هَذاَ الْبَيْتِ

The reading is read “hadzal baiti”. But because there is a waqaf, it reads as “hadzal baiiiiti”.

اِلَيْهِ

The reading is read “ilaihi”. But because there is a waqaf, it reads as “ililaiiiiih”.

Examples of Mad Lin Readings in the Koran

According to the book Learning Methods for Reading and Writing the Qur’an by Mursal Aziz and Zulkifli Nasution, there are several examples of Mad Lin’s readings that must be examined in the Al-Quran, including:

Al Baqarah verse 2

ذٰلِكَ الْكِتٰبُ لَا رَيْبَ

An example of the first mad lin can be observed in the pronunciation of رَيْبَ. There ro’ meets ya’ breadfruit, so it must be read two vowels long.

Al-Baqarah Verse 3

Allah

Allażīna yu`minụna bil-ghoibi wa yuqīmụnaṣ-ṣalāta wa mimmā razaqnāhum yunfiqụn.

Meaning: “(namely) those who believe in the unseen, pray, and spend some of the sustenance that We give them,” (QS. Al-Baqarah: 3).

Al-Baqarah Verse 6

???

Innallażīna kafarụ sawā`un ‘alaihim a anżartahum am lam tunżir-hum lā yu`minụn.

Meaning: “Verily those who disbelieve, it is the same to them, you (Muhammad) warn or you do not warn, they will not believe.” (QS. Al-Baqarah: 6).

Al Baqarah verse 61

قَالَ اَتَسْتَبْدِلُوْنَ الَّذِيْ هُوَ اَدْنٰى بِالَّذِيْ هُوَ خَيْرٌ

Lafadz خَيْرٌ is an example of mad lin reading, namely the letter kho with the punctuation fathah meets ya’ breadfruit, so it must be read two vowels long.

Al Baqarah verse 182

فَاَصْلَحَ بَيْنَهُمْ فَلَآ اِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ

The mad lin of this verse is found in the pronunciation of بَيْنَهُمْ. There is the letter ba’ fathah meeting with ya’ breadfruit, so the way to read it is to read it in length for two vowels.

Al-Kahf Verse 19

قَالُوْا لَبِثْنَا يَوْمًا اَوْ بَعْضَ

In the pronunciation of يَوْمًا, the letter ya’ fathah meets wawu breadfruit, so the way to read it is two vowels long.

Ali Imran Verse 26

قُلِ ٱللَّهُمَّ مَٰلِكَ ٱلْمُلْكِ تُؤْتِى ٱلْمُلْكَ مَن تَشَآءُ وَتَنزِعُ ٱلْمُلْكَ مِمَّن تَشَآءُ وَتُعِزُّ مَن تَشَآءُ وَتُذِلُّ مَن تَشَآءُ ۖ بِيَدِكَ ٱلْخَيْرُ ۖ إِنَّكَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرٌ

“Qulillāhumma mālikal-mulki tu’til-mulka man tasyā`u wa tanziul-mulka min man tasyā`u wa tu’izzu man tasyā`u wa tużillu man tasyā`, biyadikal-khaīr, innaka ‘alā kulli syai`ing qadīr”

Meaning: “Say: ‘O God who has a kingdom, you give the kingdom to whoever you want and you take away the kingdom from the one you want. You glorify the person you want and you humiliate the person you want. In Your hands are all goodness. Indeed, You are the Almighty over all things, “(QS. Ali Imran [3]: 26).

Al-Quraish verses 1-4

لِإِيلَٰفِ قُرَيْشٍ

Li`īlāfi quraīsy

Meaning: “Because of the habits of the Quraysh people,” (QS. Al-Quraish [106]: 1).

إِۦلَٰفِهِمْ رِحْلَةَ ٱلشِّتَآءِ وَٱلصَّيْفِ

“Ilāfihim riḥlatasy-syitā`i waṣ-ṣaīf”

Meaning: “(That is) their habit of traveling in winter and summer,” (QS. Al-Quraisy [106]: 2).

فَلْيَعْبُدُوا۟ رَبَّ هَٰذَا ٱلْبَيْتِ

“Falya’budụ rabba hāżal-baīt”

Meaning: “Then let them worship the Lord of this house (Kaaba),” (QS. Al-Quraisy [106]: 3).

ٱلَّذِىٓ أَطْعَمَهُم مِّن جُوعٍ وَءَامَنَهُم مِّنْ خَوْفٍۭ

“Allażī aṭ’amahum min jụ’iw wa āmanahum min khaụf”

Meaning: “Who has given food to them to relieve hunger and secure them from fear,” (QS. Al-Quraisy [106]: 4).

Abraham Verse 33

وَسَخَّرَ لَكُمُ ٱلشَّمْسَ وَٱلْقَمَرَ دَآئِبَيْنِ ۖ وَسَخَّرَ لَكُمُ ٱلَّيْلَ وَٱلنَّهَارَ

“Wa sakhkhara akumusy-syamsa wal-qamara dā`ibaīn, wa sakhkhara akumul-laila wan-nahār”

Meaning: “And He has subjected (also) to you the sun and the moon which are constantly circulating (in their orbits); and has subjected to you the night and the day,” (QS. Ibrahim [14]: 33).

Al-Jumuah Verse 9

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ master امَنُوٓا۟ إِذَا نُودِىَ لِلصَّلَوٰةِ مِن يَوْمِ ٱلْجُمُعَةِ فَٱْعَوْا۟

“Yā ayyuhallażīna āmanū iżā nụdiya liṣ-ṣalāti miy yaumil-jum’ati fas’au ilā żikrillāhi wa żarul baī’ .. “

Meaning: “O you who believe, when called on to perform Friday prayers, then hasten you to remember Allah and leave buying and selling. That is better for you if you know, “(QS. Al-Jumuah [62]: 9).

Al-Balad Verse 8

أَلَمْ نَجْعَل لَّهُۥ عَيْنَيْنِ

Alam naj’al lahụ ‘ainaīn

Meaning: “Did We not give him two eyes,” (QS. Al-Balad [90]: 8).

Al-Balad Verse 9

وَلِسَانًا وَشَفَتَيْنِ

“Wa lisānaw wa syafataīn”

Meaning: “Tongue and two lips,” (QS. Al-Balad [90]: 9).

Ar-Rahman Verse 17

رَبُّالْمَشْرِقَيْنِوَرَبُّالْمَغْرِبَيْنِۚ

Robbul Masyriqaini wa robbul maghrobaiiiin.

Meaning: “God (who cares for) the two easts and God (who cares for) the two west.” (QS. Ar-Rahman: 17).

Thus the discussion of mad lin reading laws along with examples. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful for Sinaumed’s.

Sinaumed’s can get more information about mad lin by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Identity is a long journey that must be taken by everyone. There is a saying that ‘knowing oneself is the beginning of wisdom’ which means that by knowing oneself, one can determine what happiness one wants to achieve.

Maybe you are also one of those people who are in a period of searching for identity. But do you understand what identity means? Before you look for the real self, it’s better to understand what the true self means. Or maybe you can find something useful for yourself that you don’t know.

Come on, understand what identity means and how to find identity.

 

What is Identity?

Identity comes from the word substance in Arabic which means essence, substance, or existence. Meanwhile, self comes from the Arabic word al nafs which means self or self.

Identity according to KBBI or the Big Indonesian Dictionary is the characteristics, description or special circumstances of a person or an object, it can also mean identity, soul core, spirit, and inner movement or spirituality.

Some people argue that identity is a manifestation of one’s life ideology. Identity can appear from childhood and can be influenced by several factors such as environmental and social factors.

Broadly speaking, the process of self-discovery is not easy because of many factors and it is certainly full of various kinds of trials. However, when we have succeeded in finding identity, then usually someone will become more confident. In addition, they become more confident in determining their life goals.

 

 

How is Our Identity Formed?

Identity is usually formed from a combination of internal factors (genetics, personality, and so on) and external factors (school, home, people around and so on). A teenager’s identity develops when they try various roles in different environments, such as school, home and environment. This will give them the opportunity to explore their own values, beliefs, ethics, spirituality and sexuality.

Tips for Finding Yourself

After discussing the notion of identity, the next discussion is tips on finding identity. For more details, here is the full explanation.

1. Recognize yourself by knowing talent

The first way to find identity is to know the talent that is in you. You can start from what activities you like, look for new activities, listen to other people’s opinions and look for new experiences. Apart from that, you can also take various fuel tests such as the FACT or Flanagan Aptitude Classification Test. FACT is a test which consists of 14 tests to determine one’s talents and basic abilities.

2. Recognize personality

In the process of finding identity, it is important for someone to know his personality. Are you an introvert or extrovert. If you don’t know anything about your personality, you can take the MBTI test. This test will identify you as an introvert or extrovert. Are you an intuition or sensing, feeling or thinking and perception or judgmental.

3. Recognize productive time

If you recognize productive time, it can help you not to do activities at inappropriate times. Indirectly, this will also help you to recognize your identity. You can pay attention to whether you are a productive person at night or in the morning? In addition, you can pay attention to what time your energy is peaking or falling?

4. Determine life goals

Life goals are different from ideals that are only career-oriented and also financial. The purpose of life is more about meaningful achievement and how to turn dreams into useful tools for the environment.

5. Know your strengths and weaknesses

When looking for identity, you have to know what strengths and weaknesses you have. This is very important because if you know your strengths it will be an important key for you to have self-confidence.

If you don’t know your strengths, you don’t even respect yourself and become less confident. Strength is not only physical but also intelligence, character, the ability to regulate emotions and so on is also self-strength.

You need to know the shortcomings in this case so that you don’t fall into the same hole. In fact, with strong self-confidence, you can make your weaknesses the strengths that you highlight.

6. Determine what makes you feel comfortable

Searching for identity is not only done when you are feeling productive or primed. However, it can also be done when you are facing difficult times in this life. It would be nice, try to remember the hard times you went through, what comfort can you feel? And what makes you feel better?

By knowing what makes you comfortable, it will be easier for you to find your identity. Apart from that, you can also find people to help improve your mood or you choose to be quiet by yourself listening to songs or watching movies. Or you can just eat your favorite food.

7. Take time to be quiet and reflect

Make sure you also provide time for silence without work interruptions, love disturbances and other disturbing hustle and bustle. You also need time to be quiet and alone, because basically no one can find their identity without giving themselves time to be quiet.

By being silent or contemplating, you will be able to listen to what your soul is telling you and at the same time carry out an honest self-evaluation. Apart from that, this can also be used as a moment of reflection to hear what you are actually pursuing, without being influenced by the hustle and bustle around you.

8. Record the thoughts and emotions that arise in a diary

In the search for identity, you also need to recognize and observe existing thoughts and feelings. You can do this for a week or so to get a bigger picture of the topics that pop up in your head. After that, you write it in a diary.

By observing what you have written, then maybe you will find a vague statement about the purpose of life that you have never realized. Once you find a repeating pattern, try to find time to think about the meaning of your thoughts and feelings.

9. Start doing something good

In the process of finding your identity, you also have to start doing good things. Do good things continuously until these good things will help us to find a good habit too.

10. Learn to solve problems yourself

Indeed, various problems will arise in the process of finding identity. You will face problems ranging from mild to severe problems. However, try to identify the problem you are facing and solve it as best you can.

11. Stay away from those who try to lead you down a negative path

When you are looking for identity, especially when you are at an age that can be said to be still unstable, choosing a good social environment is indeed very risky. In association, not always the people you know will have good intentions for you.

There are times when other people will also plunge other people into bad things. When you have found signs that are not right in your environment or you find a relationship that is already toxic, then you can avoid and stay away from friends like that.

You don’t need to be afraid that you won’t have friends, but you will be relieved when you are on a better path. If you are in a good social environment, then you will also be able to form a good identity.

12. Ask for opinions from people about yourself

When you don’t know anymore to be able to recognize yourself. Try to ask the people closest to you. Ask them to rate you.

That assessment can be in the form of specific characteristics or moments that they think will describe who you really are. After finding the answer, you can reflect on their answer and start thinking about what you need to do.

Signs That You’ve Found Your True Self

Have you found your identity yet? For those of you who haven’t found your identity, you can recognize it through the signs below.

1. You have a strong desire and drive to get through the day

When you have found your identity, then everything you do will focus on a clear goal. Laziness and boredom will not succeed in making you lose motivation every day.

With clear goals, it will give you extra energy and will make you more enthusiastic about carrying out activities.

2. You will not expect validation and self-acceptance from others

Not a few people are currently doing good just so they can get acceptance from others. In fact, if you expect validity and acceptance from others you can potentially experience pressure and be chased by your own expectations.

If you have found your identity, the judgment or acceptance of others will no longer be the focus of attention. Identity makes you understand the qualities that you have so that in the end you don’t need other people’s recognition so you can be confident.

3. You will understand how important it is to love yourself

Loving yourself may be rarely done and even put aside for some people, even though before you can love others you need to love yourself. The love that comes from you is what will be able to present love around you simply and warmly.

When you have found your identity, then you will definitely appreciate and love yourself more wisely. That love will make you feel enough and not make other people your reason to be happy.

4. You dare to do something that is contrary to most people

Are you still jealous of what other people have achieved? If so, it means that you are not considered to have found your identity. If you have found your identity, then you will not be affected by what other people have.

The more you can recognize yourself, then you will no longer have the intention to join in, or be jealous of other people’s achievements and lives. You already understand that you can achieve not all the achievements of others. That way, you will grow into someone who is more mature and wiser to overcome anything in life.

5. You are aware of your priorities and have clear goals

When you understand what is a priority, then you will also understand the goals you want to achieve in the future. The more you are aware of life’s priorities, the more you will no longer use your spare time to do things that are less useful.

If at this time, you are still using your free time for things that are less useful, it could be a sign that you haven’t found your true self.

Why Is Having Identity Important?

Having a commitment to one identity will make someone more confident and responsible for their choices in life. They will also feel that they have control over their life because of the confidence and clarity that is formed from this self-identity.

It is also important to realize that human life is not static and there are times when we will question our identity again as we get older and experience in life. Maybe the discovery of identity will not stop at a certain age.

Therefore, by understanding identity, it will be easier for someone to deal with various problems that are being faced. So, never hesitate to find yourself.

Things to Do When Experiencing an Identity Crisis

When you are looking for identity and questioning yourself ‘who am I?’ There are several things that can be tips that you can do when facing this crisis.

Explore interests and talents

If you don’t know yourself well, then you can start by looking for things that interest you. Like things you don’t like and you like.

Consider the goals you want to achieve

Have you ever thought about what you want to achieve in life? What will give you peace as well as happiness? An identity crisis could be a sign that you have unmet needs right now. Knowing what your purpose in life is is the first step that will fulfill that need.

Get close to the support system

Many people already know that an identity crisis is a very crucial thing where you are vulnerable to outside influences. So, it’s important to get closer to people who really care about your kindness so you don’t go astray and stay on the right path.

Well, that’s it, Sinaumed’s is an explanation of identity along with tips for finding identity. From all the discussion above, it can be said that identity is something that must be owned by someone to be more confident in living this life. So, don’t give up and keep achieving your life goals.

If Sinaumed’s wants to read about books about self improvement or other books, then Sinaumed’s can read and buy his books at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Christin Devina

Definition of ICU in a hospital – In the hospital area there is a room called ICU. The existence of an ICU or Intensive Care Unit will help treat everyone who has a serious enough illness that basically requires careful medical monitoring and the highest level of medical care.

The ICU room or Intensive Care Unit is also often referred to as a critical care unit. Usually, people who are treated in the Intensive Care Unit will move to the usual treatment room when they are in a stable condition.

Maybe all this time you also know the existence of the ICU room at the hospital but don’t really know the ins and outs of the Intensive Care Unit room. In fact, there are many important things that we must know about a hospital’s Intensive Care Unit room.

So, so that you also understand more about the hospital’s Intensive Care Unit room. Of course, the reviews in this article related to the hospital ICU room can help you understand more.

Definition of ICU Room in Hospital

pixabay

The first thing we will learn together is the meaning of ICU in a hospital. ICU or Intensive Care Unite is a room within a hospital area equipped with special staff and equipment to help manage patients with illnesses such as trauma or life-threatening complications due to failure of one or more organ dysfunction due to several factors. Starting from illness, disaster and complications which of course still have hope to live.

In managing the ICU, special ICU doctors are needed who already have the ability to understand medical technology, physiology, pharmacology and also conventional medicine who will also collaborate with educated and trained nurses for critical care.

This makes the ICU a high dependency unit. Where you can carry out a strict observation process with an EKG monitor and also fast resuscitation, but a ventilator is only given for less than 24 hours.

There are several types of ICU, but basically the goal of all types of ICU is the same, namely to manage seriously ill patients who are already in a life-threatening condition.

There are several indications that a patient enters a hospital ICU room. For example, such as a patient who is in a life-threatening condition at any time due to failure or dysfunction of one or multiple organs or systems and there is still a possibility of being cured again with intensive care, monitoring and treatment procedures.

Medical Equipment in the ICU Room

pixabay

Some people think that the ICU room in a hospital is scary because usually in that room there is a lot of medical equipment related to patients with serious conditions. Even so, the existence of various kinds of medical equipment combined with the ability of doctors and nurses can support the process of stabilizing the patient’s condition.

Some people who are not in the medical field may only know the exterior and main functions of a hospital ICU room without knowing what equipment actually is that can help treat patients in it.

So, for those of you who really don’t know anything about some of the medical equipment in the hospital ICU, you don’t need to be confused anymore, because this article has provided some medical equipment in the hospital’s ICU room.

1. Monitors

The existence of a monitor in the hospital ICU room is used to monitor the performance of the patient’s organs. For example, such as heart rate, oxygen levels in the blood and blood pressure.

2. Ventilators

Next, there is a ventilator which is in the ICU room of the hospital and is used to help patients who are being treated breathe. This tool will be connected to a tube which will later be inserted into the nose, mouth and throat.

3. Defibrillators

A defibrillator or commonly known as a cardiac shock device is used as a tool to restore a normal heartbeat if the heartbeat suddenly stops. Basically, the way a defibrillator works is by sending an electric shock to the patient’s heart so that it can function again.

4. Feeding Hose

The feeding tube will be used to enter the nutrients needed by the patient’s body as long as he is in a critical condition and cannot eat independently. Usually, a feeding tube will be inserted through the nose which is directed towards the stomach.

5. Infusion

Furthermore, there is an infusion which has the function of injecting fluids, nutrients and also drugs through the veins.

6. Catheters

Most of the patients who are in the hospital ICU are unable to urinate independently. In some patients, the amount of fluid that comes out of the body, including urine, must be counted as an important part of monitoring the patient’s condition.

In this case, we need a tool that is often referred to as a catheter. The catheter itself is an elastic tube that can be inserted through the urethra for the process of removing urine from the patient’s body.

So, those are some of the medical equipment in the ICU that can indeed be a support so that patients can survive and recover soon. Even though the equipment looks terrible and is risky, the process of installing the tool will be carried out based on considerations so that it can ultimately benefit patients.

In addition, later the patients will always be under surveillance for 24 hours while in the ICU. Patients will also be given painkillers and sedatives to stay asleep.

This is done so that patients are not disturbed by sound and also the presence of medical devices in the hospital ICU room.

 

Types of ICU Rooms in Hospitals

The existence of the ICU room is indeed used for special treatment processes for patients with serious illnesses and does require close monitoring. Where the ICU room in general will also be equipped with various kinds of equipment as previously described and the support of health workers in particular.

Even so, there are several types of ICU rooms. Where each type of ICU has a different function. For example, there are intensive rooms that are used specifically for heart disease, specifically for children and even for babies.

So, for more details, here are several types of intensive care units used for the treatment of special patients in hospitals.

1. Intensive Care Unit (ICU)

The ICU or intensive care unit is a special room used for intensive care of critical patients and continuous monitoring. The hospital ICU room will provide critical medical procedures that also have a system of organ function support or life support for every patient who is acutely ill or seriously injured.

Some of the conditions of patients who will receive treatment in the ICU room of the hospital are patients with major injuries or major trauma, severe burns, respiratory failure, patients after organ transplants, cardiothoracic surgery, and complex spines.

Meanwhile, patients who are not in an acute condition, if they really want to be sent to the ICU room, still need approval from the doctor concerned.

 

2. High Care Unit (HCU)

HCU or high care unit is a room under the ICU before the patient is returned to the inpatient room. HCU is specifically for patients who have started to show better conditions and do not need further treatment in the ICU room, but close supervision is still needed by medical personnel.

In Indonesia, there are regulations related to HCU services, namely in the Decree of the Minister of Health number 834 of 2010. The existence of HCU is expected to increase the effectiveness and efficiency of services in the ICU room for patients. It was explained that the condition of HCU patients was usually in a stable state of respiration, hemodynamics, and consciousness.

3. Intensive Coronary Care Unit (ICCU)

The ICCU is actually parallel to the ICU room, but especially for patients who experience heart problems. Some of the conditions that are usually treated in the ICCU room are coronary heart disease, heart attack, severe heart rhythm disturbances, and heart failure.

The existence of the ICCU is one part of the heart and blood vessel service center in several hospitals. As a facility that is prioritized for the treatment of patients with complications of cardiovascular disease, ICCU patients will usually be in an unstable condition and require extra care and attention from medical personnel.

4. Neonatal Intensive Care Unit (NICU)

Then, there is the NICU which can also provide special services for babies who have just been born or who really have difficulties. NICU patients are usually premature babies aged 23 or 24 weeks to 40 weeks who also have normal digestive system conditions.

In some cases, babies usually will not be accepted into the NICU room if they are sick after being discharged from a health care facility. The hospital has concerns that the baby who is not doing well will infect other existing patients.

Under these conditions, babies who need emergency care will usually be sent to the Pediatric Intensive Care Unit (PICU) room.

5. Pediatric Intensive Care Unit (PICU)

The existence of the PICU is usually reserved for babies who are not taken by the NICU and for children aged around 18 years or it could also depend on the applicable hospital policy.

In general, the PICU is a transitional service room from childhood to adulthood. Several cases of blurred age boundaries for patients with special needs or chronic illnesses require treatment in the pediatrics department even though they are 20 years old.

An example is a patient with a congenital heart condition but can only be operated on when he is an adult. Some doctors don’t mind if the patient is sent to the PICU room after the operation. Even so, there are also those who choose to put these patients into the intensive care unit for adults.

Conditions of Patients Requiring Treatment in the ICU Room

The fact is that most doctors find it difficult to make a decision on who should be treated in the ICU. Even so, a study explained that almost 13 percent of patients who were hospitalized had pneumonia and most of them were treated in the ICU.

However, many patients who enter the ICU have a low risk of emergency or death. The patient’s need for the equipment in the ICU is also not that urgent.

In addition, there are around 6 percent who have the potential to recover faster than patients who are treated in ordinary wards. Therefore it can be concluded that there are some patients who are not supposed to be in ICU care but are still placed in that room.

Now, to better understand it, there are several criteria for patients who should be able to get help in the ICU room, as follows.

1. Patients With Close Monitoring Requirement

Basically, there are some patients who really need care and monitoring under strict conditions from medical personnel. Starting from patients who have just had surgery, accidents or injuries to the head.

Where those who must get close monitoring can be placed in the ICU room. This is done so that when something very critical happens, the ICU room with the support of medical equipment and personnel can be more alert and able to act more quickly.

On the other hand, several factors such as hemodynamic conditions or the patient’s blood flow system, room temperature, ventilation and nutrition must also be monitored routinely in the ICU. This is done in order to increase the chances of survival of patients who are still alive.

2. Patients Who Have Problems In The Lungs

It’s not only patients who have to get close monitoring. This is because patients with lung problems are also often treated in the ICU. For example, their lung conditions are inflamed due to an injury or infection so that it can make it difficult for them to breathe.

These conditions sometimes also make the patient need assistive devices such as a ventilator so they can breathe easily. Therefore, the equipment in the ICU room must be complete because there are always patients who must be given help quickly and professionally.

3. Patients With Heart Problems

Unstable blood pressure and the presence of heart attacks are conditions that are often found in patients who are in the ICU. Therefore, a more complete observation is needed to be able to find out the cause and provide an appropriate treatment.

In addition, people who have just had heart surgery are also susceptible to infectious diseases. This makes them have to be monitored in the ICU room.

This problem is also quite serious, especially in the first 24 to 48 hours that the patient has passed. Therefore, the ICU room is often used to treat patients with heart problems.

4. Patients With Serious Infectious Conditions

The last is for patients with severe and serious infectious conditions who will need intensive care from doctors and will be placed in the ICU room. For example, patients who suffer from severe infections, causing sepsis, are highly recommended for treatment in the ICU.

For those who have an infection will get top priority from the ICU so they can get treatment more quickly. This is intended to prevent the infection from spreading to other organs of the body such as the organs of the respiratory system or the central nervous system.

So, that’s a summary of the reviews related to the hospital ICU room. Starting from the definition of the ICU in a hospital to the criteria for patients who must be treated in the ICU room, the explanation is available. Hopefully, all the discussion above can be useful as well as add to your insight.

If you want to find books about health, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Hendrik Nuryanto

The definition of fiber or in English is fiber is a type of material in the form of pieces of components that form a long and intact network. In general, there are two types of fiber, namely natural fibers and synthetic fibers. Natural fibers are then classified again according to their origin, such as plants, wood fibers and animals.

Fiber is widely used by humans to make clothes or used as the main material for making certain crafts. Usually, the fibers used as raw materials for clothing are natural fibers made from plants, animals and wood and not synthetic fibers. In order to understand the meaning of fiber and know the types of fiber, see the explanation further in this article!

Definition of Fiber

Fiber is a type of material in the form of component pieces that have a long and intact network shape. An example of the most commonly encountered fiber is the fiber in cloth.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), fiber is a material that has a very large ratio of length and width with oriented compound molecules, especially in the long direction. Cotton fiber for example, when has a length and width ratio ranging from 500 or about one to 1000.

In addition, fiber is also used as a raw material for textiles. Fibers used as textile raw materials are fibers used for textile applications. Fiber can also be interpreted as a raw material used in the manufacture of yarn and cloth.

As a raw material for making yarn and cloth, fiber has an important role. The properties of the fiber will affect the properties of the resulting yarn and fabric, whether processed mechanically or chemically treated.

Textile raw materials are materials for clothing and other needs. In general, fiber as a raw material is divided into two types, namely natural fibers and synthetic fibers.

Natural fibers have been known and used as raw materials since thousands of years before Christ. Some historical evidence even notes that natural fiber materials have been used since 2640 BC.

Quoted from the Learningmu.com page , the country that first processed natural fibers was China. Since ancient times, China has produced silk fiber. Silk fiber is obtained from caterpillars and these fibers are then processed into yarn and then produced to meet the needs of textile products.

Besides silk, another natural fiber material is cotton. In fact, since 1540 BC there has been a cotton industry in India. In its development, natural fiber materials are often used in other parts of the world, for example, flax fiber was first used in Switzerland in 1000 BC, then there was wool fiber used in Mesopotamia since 1000 BC.

For thousands of years, flax, wool, cotton and silk fibers have been the raw material for various human needs. Then, in the early 20th century, synthetic or artificial fibers were introduced.

The production of natural fiber materials is quite stable from year to year, but the percentage of all textile fiber production is decreasing over time, given the increasing number of production of synthetic fiber materials which are increasingly preferred.

This causes the availability of natural fibers to be very limited, besides that natural fibers can only be produced if climatic conditions are favorable, thus requiring a longer process than synthetic fibres.

The conditions of the dry season or rainy season can affect the production of natural fiber materials. Natural fibers have properties that are resistant to dry or rainy seasons, although in general natural fibers have healthy characteristics, in terms of quantity, shape, nature or size they will certainly experience obstacles.

If natural fiber is produced continuously, it will affect the market price. The more scarce the availability of natural fiber materials, the more expensive the production costs will be and make the selling price of natural fiber materials more expensive.

Fiber Types

Synthetic Fiber

The first type of fiber is synthetic fiber. Synthetic fibers are fibers made by a chemical synthesis process. Synthetic fibers or man-made fibers are different from natural fibers produced by living organisms, such as plants or animal hair.

Synthetic fibers are produced through research by scientists to be able to duplicate natural events that occur in animals and plant fibers. In general, synthetic fibers are made by extracting fiber material through a spinneret, then producing a synthetic fiber.

Synthetic fibers have several advantages over natural fibers, one of which is that they are more durable and can absorb various kinds of dyes. Another advantage of synthetic fibers is that they are more user friendly, for example they are water resistant, stain resistant and stretchable.

However, there are some disadvantages of synthetic fibers, including the following:

• Single synthetic fibers cannot trap water like natural fibres, so they provide poor insulation.
• Synthetic fibers are more flammable than natural fibers.
• Vulnerable to damage caused by heat, for example when cleaned with hot water.
• It’s easier to melt.
• Generates static electricity by rubbing against natural fibers.
• Most synthetic fibers absorb very little moisture, so users of synthetic fibers will feel sticky when their bodies sweat.
• Synthetic fibers are a source of microplastic pollution from washing machines.

There are several categories of common synthetic fibers, for example nylon was discovered in 1931, modacrylic was discovered in 1949, olefin was discovered in 1949, acrylic was discovered in 1950 and polyester was discovered in 1953.

Natural Fiber

The second type of fiber is natural fiber. Natural fiber is a type of fiber produced from plants, animals or geological processes. Natural fibers can experience weathering and can be classified into three, namely plants, wood and animals, along with an explanation.

 

• Plant Fiber

Plant fiber is a thread-like material that comes from plants. Plant fibers are classified into four, including seed, leaf, stem and fruit fibers. Usually plant fiber is composed of cellulose and hemicellulose and sometimes also contains lignin in it. Here are some examples of plant fibers.

 

• Hemp fiber

Hemp fiber is a plant fiber that comes from the Boehmeria nivea plant and is one of the materials used to wrap corpses in China. In addition, hemp fiber is also often used as a raw material for making canvas or rigging.

• Abaca fiber

Abaka fiber is a fiber produced from Musa textilis, a plant that has a split shape and originates from the Philippines. Abaca fiber is also known as Manila. Usually, the people of the Philippines use abaca fiber as a raw material for making clothes for nobles or clothes for respectable families in the Philippines.

• Urine fiber 

Urene fiber is a fiber produced from a plant called Urena lobata and is used as a basic material for household needs, for example material for making sacks. The characteristic of urea fiber is that it has a slightly creamy white color and is shiny, smooth and flexible in texture.

• Sun fiber

Sunn fiber is fiber that comes from a plant called Crotalaria Juncea. Sunn fiber is a fiber that is mostly produced in Pakistan and India. The benefits of sunn fiber are as a raw material for making paper, sacks, nets or rope.

• Kenaf fiber

Kenaf fiber is a fiber that comes from a plant called Hibiscus Cannabinus and is most commonly found around Pakistan and India. The outer stem of this plant has a fairly rough texture compared to the inner stem.

 

• Wood fiber 

The second type of natural fiber is wood fiber which comes from woody plants. Wood fiber has a pretty beautiful texture. Examples of wood fiber are mahogany, teak, sungkai wood, ironwood, acacia wood, sangon wood, pine wood and camphor wood.

• Animal Fiber

The third type of natural fiber is animal fiber which is composed of several proteins. Examples of animal fibers commonly used by humans are sheep wool which is processed into wool, fur skins, mineral silk which is made from asbestos. Currently, asbestos is the only naturally occurring mineral in the form of long fibers. The following is an explanation and classification of animal fiber.

 

• Staple fiber

Staple fibers are a form of animal hair such as wool. Examples of animals that produce staple fiber are rabbits, vicunas, mohair, alpacas, sheep. The most widely used animal fiber is wool, which is fiber from sheep’s wool.

 

• Filament 

Filaments are animal fibers that are in the form of a network. An example of a filament is the silk fiber that comes from the larvae of silkworms. Silk fiber is made from the cocoons and the cocoons are then processed to become thread, then spun to become silk cloth. Silk cloth has a fairly high selling value in the market.

Examples of Animal Fibers 

To be clearer, here are some examples of fibers derived from animal fibers:

 

• Silk 

Silk fiber comes from the saliva of silkworms when they pupate. This type of silk cloth made from silk fibers has a fairly high selling price and is in great demand.

This is because silk has a distinctive luster and fine texture that other fibers do not have. The strength of the silk fiber is also quite good, but in a wet state the strength of the fiber can be reduced by up to 15%.

Silk fiber has the characteristics of shiny, smooth, soft, strong, supple and can adapt to air temperature. If silk fiber is used as a clothing material, the clothes will feel cold and can absorb sweat well.

However, silk fibers will turn yellow when exposed to sunlight too often. Silk fibers are also impervious to heat and acids, but are resistant to moths.

The characteristics of silk fiber are having a fine texture, not slippery, strong, light, susceptible to damage by insects if left dirty, moderate to poor elasticity, weakens when exposed to sunlight.

Fabrics made from silk fiber are usually produced as ties, shirts, dresses, blouses, pajamas, robes and others, besides that silk is also widely used as upholstery for upholstery, wall coverings and wall hangings.

 

• Wool 

Wool is a fiber that comes from sheep’s wool and includes animal fibers that have a fairly rough texture, wrinkled with scales on its surface. Wool fibers contain protein. The appearance of the wil fiber depends on the breed of sheep.

Wool fibers that have a finer, softer and warmer texture tend to have more scales. Meanwhile, thick wool, usually less warm and has fewer scales and has a rough texture.

The characteristics of wool fibers are hygroscopic elasticity, easy to absorb moisture, coalesce at higher temperatures, has a low rate of fire spread, and is resistant to static electricity.

Wool is usually used to make suits, pants, jackets, hats, fur, carpets and more.

 

• Alpaca fur

Alpaca is an animal that has physical characteristics like Ilama, but the body of the alpaca animal has a smaller size. Alpaca is taken for its fiber and is used to make knitwear and sewing items such as sheep’s wool.

Alpaca fiber is a natural fiber that comes from alpaca. This fiber has a soft, luxurious, smooth, durable texture. Compared to wool fiber, alpaca fiber tends to be warmer, has no scales and does not contain lanolin which makes alpaca fiber hypoallergenic.

Naturally, alpaca fiber is water resistant and hard to burn. There are two types of alpaca fiber, namely Huacaya, which is alpaca that grows with soft, spongy fibers with natural wrinkles and Suri, which has wrinkles and is suitable to be used as a material for making woven fabrics.

 

• Cow hide

Besides wool, one of the animal fibers that is often used is fiber from cowhide. Cowhide can be used to make various kinds of crafts. This is because cowhide is a durable and flexible material, so it is suitable for use as a raw material for making shoes, bags and others.

In addition to bags, shoes, wallets and others, cowhide is also used as a raw material for clothing, vehicle interiors, furniture, drums, and various other musical instruments.

The choice of cowhide is used because cowhide is a material that is quite flexible and durable when processed by tanning animal skins.

Currently, most of the tools and handicrafts are made from cow, goat, sheep and deer hides. These three types of animals were chosen because they will produce a softer material and have a fairly high price.

Apart from these three animals, it is not uncommon for kangaroo skin to be chosen because it has the characteristics of animal skin being flexible, light, strong and anti-abrasion. Kangaroo skin is often used as a material for whips to leather jackets for motorbike riders.

Kangaroo skin is also used to make boxing gloves, balls for soccer. Stingray skin is also often used as a material for katana handles or traditional Japanese swords.

That is an explanation of the meaning of fiber is one type of material in the form of component pieces that form a long and intact network. For Sinaumed’s who are interested in studying fiber types or other topics, they can find information by reading books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides various kinds of quality and original books for Sinaumed’s. Don’t hesitate to buy books at sinaumedia and check out the book right now!

Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Khansa

 

Understanding Compound Sentences – In Indonesian grammar, most people certainly know what compound sentences actually mean. A compound sentence itself is basically a sentence consisting of two or more main clauses that can stand alone as free sentences.

Knowing the meaning of compound words will be very useful for you when compiling a particular paper. In addition, the thing that also needs to be considered in writing activities is, a good piece of writing is composed of good paragraphs. Meanwhile, to compose a good paragraph, it is necessary to have neat and good wording.

Well, for those of you who want to know more deeply about the meaning of compound sentences. In this article, we will also discuss the types of compound sentences and various examples. Let’s review in full below!

A. Definition of Compound Sentences

As previously stated, compound sentences can generally be understood as a sentence consisting of two or more main clauses and can stand alone as a separate sentence.

Yendra in his book entitled Knowing Language (2018) states that a sentence can basically be interpreted as the smallest unit of language in the form of spoken or written. Compound sentences themselves are usually arranged to convey ideas or thoughts as a whole in accordance with syntactic units. Compilation of compound sentences based on basic constituents, such as clauses or arrangement of clauses that form a meaningful unit of speech.

Meanwhile, Dendy Sugono in his book entitled Indonesian Language Syntax: Analysis of Syntactic Functions (2019) reveals that compound sentences can actually be interpreted as several words that have sentence structures, and these sentences contain several basic sentences.

Therefore, the meaning of a compound sentence is a broad sentence form as a result of merging or expanding single sentences, thus forming a certain pattern or pattern of new sentences that are different from existing patterns.

Another thing that also needs to be considered in constructing compound sentences is the use of conjunctions or conjunctions. In a compound sentence, conjunctions have an important role in being a bridge between the base of the sentence and the other sentences in a compound sentence.

B. Types of Compound Sentences

After learning about the meaning of compound words, this section will explain the four types of compound sentences themselves. There are four types of compound sentences, which consist of equivalent compound sentences, compound compound sentences, multilevel compound sentences and mixed compound sentences.

1. Equivalent Compound Sentences

Equivalent compound sentences or also known as coordinating compound sentences can be interpreted as one of the clause sentences having an equal or equal status. Therefore, the two clauses in an equivalent compound are not dependent on each other, but both of them still have an intra-sentence relationship.

In equivalent compound sentences, there are several conjunctions that are commonly used to connect between sentences. Some of these conjunctions, namely like and, or, but, whereas, then, and then.

 

 

a. Compound sentences that express addition

This type of equivalent compound sentence can also be called a compound sentence that expresses addition or addition or addition. Compound sentences of this type usually use conjunctions or conjunctions in order to show the addition relationship of the basic sentence. Some conjunctions or conjunctions in this sentence, namely and, as well as, besides.

Examples of compound sentences that express addition include:

• I read a book of fairy tales and my younger siblings listened enthusiastically.
• Mom cleans the barn on holidays, dad organizes the garden, and I clean the bedroom.
• We just do assignments all day without oral lessons, after all the teacher is in a meeting.
• This question has been asked to the IT department, and has been confirmed many times.

b. Compound sentences that describe the sequence of events

One of the next types of compound sentences is a compound sentence that expresses a sequence of events, for example like conjunctions or conjunctions then, then, then, then, and so on.

Even though equivalent compound sentences already use conjunctions to connect the bases of sentences, a comma is still needed to be a delimiter of the two sentences that are combined.

Examples of compound sentences that state the sequence of events include:

• I live in Bandung, then my family moved to Yogyakarta.
• My classmate was riding a motorbike without wearing a helmet, then the traffic police stopped them.
• You pour the egg whites in a container, then you beat the egg whites using a mixer until fluffy.
• I paid the fare to the angkot driver, then he gave me the right amount of change.

c. A compound sentence denoting a choice

Then, one of these types of equivalent compound sentences can be marked with a conjunction or. The use of the word or in this compound sentence can be used to select two or more basic sentences. In addition, the selection relationship between these sentences can also be shown by the word apa (whether).

Examples of compound sentences that express election include:

• He wants to take part in basketball extracurricular activities, or other physical activities that can fill the void on weekends.
• I have sent the new book you ordered, has the package arrived at home?
• You are free to choose science, social studies, or language majors.
• Is it better for us to leave early in the morning when it’s not crowded, or catch up in the afternoon?

d. Compound sentences expressing opposition or resistance

This type of equivalent or coordinating compound sentence can also be used to express a sentence about contradiction or resistance. Even though the two sentences in this compound sentence have differences or contradictions, these sentences are able to connect one basic sentence with another basic sentence.

Some conjunctions or conjunctions that are often used in compound sentences that express opposition or resistance, include: but, but, and whereas.

Examples of compound sentences expressing opposition or resistance:

• I wanted to major in fine arts, but my parents didn’t have enough money to pay for college.
• Underage bullying is not entirely the fault of children, rather parents have a huge responsibility to educate their children.
• Doni was diligent in working on group assignments to get the best results, while Edwin played video games all day without helping us at all.
• The birthday celebration went ahead as planned, although not many invitees turned up.

2. Multilevel Compound Sentences

A multilevel compound sentence is a sentence that consists of one basic sentence that has a function as the core of the sentence (a sentence that does not depend on any sentence) and one or several basic sentences that function as a clause or filler for one of the sentence elements (a sentence that depends on the sentence). other).

In its use, the function of sentence elements that can be changed is like subject, object, or description. The thing that makes the difference between multilevel compound sentences and other compound sentences is the existence of clauses and the main clause.

In multilevel compound sentences, the main sentence has an important role as the main sentence or main sentence. Meanwhile, clauses in multilevel compound sentences fill one of the elements. Based on several different roles, clauses in multilevel compound sentences can be divided into eight, namely:

 

 

a. Adverb adverb of time

The first clause is usually placed in the initial, final position, between the subject and the predicate. In some cases adverbial clauses of time are placed between the predicate and the object of the main clause. Conjunctions or conjunctions that can be used in this clause, namely when, time, when, while, while, when, after, after, and before. Here’s an example sentence:

• When I visited him in the hospital, he was gone.
• The public transportation fare to my house was still 300 rupiah, when I was in elementary school.
• When mom and dad were teenagers, they often went on excursions to the lake.
• Don’t forget to lift the fried tempe, when the color of the tempe is brownish yellow.
• The judge banged the gavel loudly, all present in the trial was silent for a moment.
• After washing the clothes, Roni returned to doing his math assignment.
• After all this time I have been a writer, finally one of my published books has become a best seller.
• The two brides said their vows of fidelity, before the priest invited them to exchange rings.

b. Subordinate adverb of cause

This type of clause has the properties of a clause adverb of time, but this sentence is more focused on discussing causal relationships. These clauses can be marked with conjunctions, such as because, because, and due to. Here’s an example sentence:

• Due to excessive consumption of sugar, grandma got diabetes.
• He discouraged buying a PS 5, because he wanted to save the money.
• Because the price of land and buildings in the capital city is high, millennials choose house contracts.

c. Adverb adverb clause

This type of clause expresses the relationship as a result, so it is usually located at the end, after the main clause. This clause can be marked with conjunctions or conjunctions such as until, so, then, consequently, and finally. Here’s an example sentence:

• It rained all night, until the rice fields were submerged in water.
• Middlemen buy rice at low prices, causing losses to farmers.
• The mainstream media only becomes mouthpieces for politicians, so the quality of journalism is getting worse and worse.
• The government gave permission to hold face-to-face learning activities, resulting in the emergence of new clusters in schools.
• I no longer take care of the garden behind the house, in the end many plants in the garden wither.

d. Conditional adverb clause

This type of clause focuses on expressing conditional relationships. Some signs that can be seen from this sentence, namely if, if, if, if, and suppose. Meanwhile, the position of this clause can be placed anywhere in the sentence. Here’s an example sentence:

• If I don’t want to be late for school, I have to get up early.
• The pandemic will end soon, if everyone adheres to the protocol from the start.
• Father will not be angry, if you are honest from the start.
• If I pass into a public university, I treat classmates.
• Media editorial rooms in Indonesia would be more independent if media companies were not run by politicians.

e. Destination adverb clause

This type of clause is usually used to express objective relationships. Some signs that can be used for this clause are in the form of conjunctions, such as so, for, for, and for. Here’s an example sentence:

• Dinda rode her bicycle slowly, so that the chicken eggs she was carrying would not break.
• To avoid dehydration, you should drink lots of water.
• The boss put up billboards on the street to increase sales targets.
• Exercise regularly at home, to maintain body fitness.

f. Adverb clause of manner

This type of clause can be used to connect adverbs of manner. This clause can be marked with conjunctions such as, with, and in. The position of the adverb clause of manner can also be placed in any part of the sentence. Example:

• With the passing of the Job Creation Law, a number of parties are of the opinion that this has added to a bad record for Joko Widodo’s administration.
• The task force sends short messages to all Indonesian citizens, in order to prevent disinformation related to Covid-19.

g. Substitute clause of the delimiter

This type of clause has a function as a complement to object, subject, and predicate nouns. Substitute clauses of this delimiter can be seen with the conjunction that or the hint word. Here’s an example.

• She’s the new student council president, who was elected last week.
• We chose to take shelter in the building which was always filled with moss.
• h. Substitute clauses for nouns
• This type of clause can be seen with the conjunction that. Substitute clauses for nouns themselves can be subjects or objects in every transitive sentence. Examples as follows.
• Adik promised that he would never steal the neighbor’s mangoes again.
• The regional head gave an order that every house of worship must implement strict security protocols as long as there is still a danger of Covid-19

3. Mixed Compound Sentences

In contrast to equivalent and multilevel compound sentences, this type of compound sentence is a combination of equivalent sentences and multilevel sentences. Therefore, this type of compound sentence is usually called a mixed compound sentence.

One of the various types of compound sentences is known to have three clauses in one sentence. This is because a mixed compound sentence has two unequal clauses.

Examples of mixed compound sentences:

• This wish is always postponed because Dedi concentrates more on educational institutions abroad, while his parents choose education at home.
• When the night was getting scary, I pulled the blanket and I closed my eyes, but the fear didn’t leave my heart and mind.
• Because he never paid attention to the lessons at school, Bobi got bad grades and had to skip classes.
• After graduating from junior high school, Rina had to choose a public or private school.
• Before she died, my grandmother advised me never to leave my prayers even though I was busy working to earn money.
• As many as five people were reported killed in this accident, while the number of injured victims is still unknown because many have left the scene.

4. Meeting Compound Sentences

Finally, compound sentences can be interpreted as a compound sentence that has several single sentences which are then combined into one complete sentence. Compound sentences can be identified from the absence of mention of the same words in the sentence.

In compound sentences, a sentence will be joined or separated by using a comma. Some examples of conjunctions that are often used in compound sentences, namely and, also, as well as, and others.

Examples of compound compound sentences:

a. Diah buys fruit. He bought vegetables. He bought groceries.

Combined into a compound sentence: Diah buys fruit, vegetables and groceries.

b. Ani was sitting on the terrace. Ani is daydreaming.

Merged into: Ani was sitting on the terrace even lost in thought.

c. Refugees leave their flooded homes. Refugees go to refugee barracks and rest.

Merged into: Refugees leave their flooded houses and then head to the evacuation barracks and rest.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Complex Sentences – Sentences in Indonesian lessons are divided into two, namely simplex sentences and complex sentences. Simplex sentences and complex sentences are two types of sentences that are often studied in grammar rules. In addition, simplex sentences and complex sentences are often used in everyday life.

However, sometimes there are still some people who do not know exactly what is meant by complex sentences and simplex sentences. For those of you who don’t know about complex sentences and simplex sentences, don’t worry, because on this occasion we will discuss more about complex sentences and simplex sentences.

So, watch this article till the end, okay, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Complex Sentences

A complex sentence is a sentence that has two clauses, namely the main clause (main clause) and a subordinate clause (child clause). In sentence structure, the main clause can stand alone as a detached sentence and the subordinating clause cannot stand alone as an independent sentence.

Subordinating clauses (clauses) always depend on the main clause (main clause). The function of the subordinate clause is as a complement to the sentence, so that they are related to each other. Another term for a complex sentence is a multilevel compound sentence. The main clause can stand alone as a sentence, while the subordinate clause depends on the main sentence.

The subordinate clause (subordinate clause) functions as the development of the sentence. So, the relationship between these two clauses is not equal or not parallel. The function of the subordinate clause is that it is used as a complement to the object, subject, and description function. This sentence is usually used in composing essays and fantasy stories. Complex sentences consist of two clauses, three clauses, up to seven clauses.

Characteristics of Complex Sentences

To understand complex sentences, we need to know their characteristics first. Following are the characteristics of complex sentences.

1. In one sentence there are two events or incidents.
2. There are two subjects and predicates in one sentence.
3. Use a comma between the main clause and the subordinate clause.
4. Structures in complex sentences are separated using commas or conjunctions (conjunctions).

From the characteristics above it can be said that this complex sentence is a sentence in which there is a main clause and also a subordinate clause. Therefore, there must be conjunctions in complex sentences.

Types of Complex Sentences

After knowing the characteristics of complex sentences, the next discussion is the types of complex sentences. There are two types of complex sentences, namely paratactic and hypotactic complex sentences. Here’s the difference between the two:

1. Paratactic Complex Sentences

Paratactic complex sentences are sentences that consist of two or more clauses that have an equal relationship. The equivalent relationship here means that the relationship between the clauses is coordinative.

So, one of these clauses can stand alone as a complete sentence. The relationship between clauses in this complex sentence is connected by conjunctions and, or, but, as well as, while, whereas, and but.

Examples of Paratactic Complex Sentences

To provide further understanding, here are some examples of paratactic complex sentences, namely:

1. I bought new shoes, but they are too big.
2. Wati went to the market, while Andi went to the repair shop.
3. Egi is a smart kid, but his arrogant nature makes him disliked by many people.
4. You can enjoy it for free or choose a paid subscription.
5. Tania really wants to be a doctor, but she doesn’t like biology.
6. Vira is studying at a public university, while Elita is studying at a private university.
7. Rima is a diligent child, but her younger sister is lazy.
8. Chef Arnold cooks fried chicken and boils meat in the kitchen.
9. Nana always wakes up early, while Wanwan always wakes up late.
10. He is not a poet, but a broadcaster.
11. Mother cooked fried chicken and boiled cassava in the kitchen.
12. My father works as a lecturer, while my mother works as a high school teacher.
13. Auntie just bought beef and mutton at the old market.
14. My sister went to school this morning, but her father didn’t accompany her.
15. I’ve been trying to do math homework, while my friend wants to copy it.
16. Aunt buys beef and mutton at the impromptu market.
17. Linda was confused to choose between tongseng or young goat satay.
18. Mom was shopping at Alfamart this afternoon, but not with dad.
19. Saiful is always eager to help his mother, while his younger brother prefers to play.
20. Arya has learned to save, while Shafira is good at washing.
21. I’ve tried very hard, while he just silent.
22. Latif went to school, while Reno went to the fields.
23. Nanda had a great effort, but the result was still the same.
24. Coffee shops are popping up everywhere, but Bu Trinil’s coffee shop is everyone’s favourite.
25. Aunt sells beef and mutton at the supermarket.
26. You can go shopping with dad tomorrow, but mom isn’t coming.
27. We tried so hard to win, but other teams are stronger in football.

2. Hypotactic Complex Sentences

A hypotactic complex sentence is a sentence that has two clauses but the meaning is not equivalent or not equal. One of the clauses occupies the main function or main clause, while the other clauses act as subordinate clauses or clauses.

Hypotactic complex sentences consist of explanatory or complementary sentences. These sentences are interrelated, so meaning and information complement each other. Conjunctions that connect these sentences include so, even though, so, then, without, that, if, however, when, if.

Examples of Hypotactic Complex Sentences

To understand more about hypotactic sentences, then you need to know some examples. The following are examples of hypotactic complex sentences:

1. Brother was watching television, while mother was cooking.
2. If I had a cat, maybe I’d buy a cat cage too.
3. Anya was sleeping, when dad was finishing his work.
4. You need additional dough so that the cake is more chewy
5. Don’t take out the trash.
6. When my brother came home, I was reading a book.
7. My father wanted to go on a pilgrimage if he had enough money.
8. Mother will give me a prize, if I become the overall champion in this school.
9. Dina would like to see a movie at the cinema if she had the money.
10. You can buy a new motorbike because you have enough savings.
11. Saskia was not at home when the earthquake was in progress.
12. Ibu Gusti is busy at the shop, so.
13. Gusti went to help his mother.
14. I want to buy a new cellphone, if my savings are enough.
15. Rere watched a horror movie in the cinema with her friends tonight, so she didn’t do her school work.
16. I want to go to America, if I have enough money.
17. Rayhan still goes to school, even though it’s raining heavily.
18. Eat and drink a lot to be healthy and stay strong.
19. Mother diligently watered the rose plants in the garden, so that the flowers flourished.
20. The patient was allowed to go home when his condition improved.
21. Aunt turned on the light, when it was getting dark.
22. Fachri was able to get good grades in Mathematics tests, even though he didn’t study last night.
23. I want to go to Saudi Arabia if I have enough money.
24. Fina didn’t go to school today because she was being treated in the hospital.
25. Nisa was not at home when the earthquake was in progress.
26. Eat and drink a lot to be healthy and stay strong.
27. Do not throw garbage anywhere, including in the river because it can cause flooding during the rainy season.
28. Erna watched a horror movie at the cinema with her friends tonight, so she didn’t do her schoolwork.
29. Mother closed all the windows when it got dark.

Conjunctions in Complex Sentences

Conjunctions are often used in complex sentences, you could say a lot. In addition, also adapted to the conditions of use. The following are conjunctions for complex sentences, namely:

1. since, since
2. when, while, during
3. after, before, after, done
4. provided, if, if, if, when, when
5. if, suppose
6. in order to
7. even though, even though, although, though
8. so, until, then
9. with, without, that, that

Complex Sentence Structure

Complex sentence structure consists of one main clause and one subordinate clause. In the main clause, at least have a subject and predicate (SP). Meanwhile, the minimum subordinate clause consists of subordinating conjunctions, subjects, and predicates (Conj-SP).

However, in this sentence, the subordinating clause only represents one sentence function, such as adverb, object, or subject.

Definition of Simplex Sentences

A simple sentence is a sentence that has only one sentence function. In accordance with its simple name. So, simplex sentences only consist of one clause or one predicate element. Well, this simplex sentence is also commonly known as a single sentence. In a simplex sentence, there are all the required elements.

There are several types of sentence functions, namely subject (s), predicate (p), object (o), adverb (k), and complement (pel). So, in simplex sentences or single sentences, there is only one function of each type.

Simple Sentence Characteristics

Simplex sentences have characteristics that distinguish them from complex sentences. Including the following:

The sentence is simple because it consists of one clause. It can be in the form of Subject (S)-Predicate (P), SP-Object (O), SPO-Description (K) or SPOK-Complementary. Generally, simplex sentences contain only one incident or event. Simplex sentences do not use conjunctions or conjunctions and comma punctuation.

Simple Sentence Examples

To understand more about simplex sentences, we need to understand examples of simplex sentences. Here is an example of a simplex sentence that you can see.

1. Dad sweeps in the yard.
2. Meita buys vegetables at the market.
3. I am sleepy.
4. Mrs. Nia teaches English at SMAN 1 Ruangguru.
5. Syifa cleans up the trash behind her house.
6. The beast pounced on its prey fiercely.
7. Rais wears a new uniform on the first day of school.
8. Mbak Dira is making a cake.
9. Uncle is reading the newspaper.
10. Mother is watching television.
11. Efira is doing her math homework.
12. Mother planted roses in the garden.
13. Dad fishing in the river.
14. Brother fell off the bike.
15. Hani wears a headscarf to school.
16. The police caught a gang of thieves.
17. I throw trash in its place.
18. Ica burst into tears.
19. Teddy plays ball in the field.
20. Tien’s mother sells fruit in the market.
21. Elfina is playing volleyball on the field.
22. Nurwanto kicked the ball.
23. Pina’s mother is a teacher at SMAN 21 Jakarta.
24. Dhea washes the dishes in the kitchen.
25. Mother sweeps in the yard.
26. The teacher teaches his students to write
27. Juventus signed Cristiano Ronaldo from Real Madrid.
28. Erna watched a horror movie at the cinema with her friends tonight.
29. Cinta cleans up trash behind her house.
30. Ikhsan wears a new uniform on the first day of school.
31. Said observed the plants around his house.
32. The hunter shoots his quarry on target.
33. The tiger pounced on its prey with gusto
34. Arman is going on vacation to Malaysia.
35. Dina read the Whatsapp chat from Suci.
36. Pambudi describes his younger brother a natural landscape.
37. Pak Embo signed the agreement yesterday afternoon.
38. PLN officers climbed the tower without any equipment.
39. Mother bought her daughter story books.
40. Meta was successful with his swimming championship in Karanganyar Regency.
41. Nabila planted roses and she watered them every day.
42. The research isn’t over yet and the report submission is only one day away.
43. The deadline for submitting reports and Mrs. Sri has completed her research.
44. Fikri still went to work even though it was raining.
45. Raffi was confused about choosing between chocolate or vanilla flavors.
46. Dinda wakes up after being awakened by her mother.
47. Rino did not go to school today because he was being treated at the hospital.
48. Mother cooked fried fish and cut vegetables in the kitchen.
49. Rina will buy a new bag if she has a lot of savings.
50. Nabila is always eager to help her mother while her sister prefers to be lazy.

Difference between Simplex and Complex Sentences

Simplex sentences consist of one clause, while complex sentences are composed of two clauses, namely the main and subordinate clauses. Apart from that, there is also another difference between these two sentences, which is in their function. Aside from being an adverb function, a subordinate clause can also take the form of an object or a subject.

So, in simple terms, the difference in the sentence is in the main clause and also the subordinate clause. After knowing the difference, don’t make a mistake in writing those two sentences, okay, Sinaumed’s.

Closing

Basically, this complex sentence can be said as a sentence which contains a main sentence and a subordinate sentence. In other words, this sentence has a main clause and a subordinate clause. Therefore, complex sentences are often referred to as compound sentences which have the same characteristics.

In addition, this type of sentence also often uses conjunctions. This conjunction aims to connect the main sentence with the subordinate clause. That way, sentences in complex sentences will be easier to understand. The connecting words used, such as, although, but, then, and many more.

Meanwhile, simplex sentences are sentences that only consist of a main sentence or main sentence. In general, this simplex sentence does not use conjunctions. This is because the simplex sentence only has one main sentence.

Thus the discussion of complex sentences, starting from their meaning, characteristics to examples, along with the meaning of simplex sentences and also the differences between the two sentences. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful as well as add insight to you.

If Sinaumed’s wants to deepen his knowledge of the Indonesian language and also sentence patterns, then he can do this by reading books. You can get books about Indonesian sentences at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.